Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global

SS7 database provisioning procedures

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA

3400 West Plano Parkway, Plano, Texas 75075

(972) 477-3000
©2007 Alcatel-Lucent

Issue/date Purpose
Edition 01 P04, October 2007 Initial issue for Alcatel-Lucent 5070 SSG release 826-04.10.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

 Legal notices

This document is classified as ECCN 5E991 and is subject to US Export Administration Regulations, 15
CFR Parts 730 through 799 and the Canadian Export and Import Permits Act, and may be subject to
similar laws and regulations (collectively referred to as "Export Regulations"). As a condition to
allowing the use of this document, the recipient agrees not to export, re-export, use, distribute,
transfer, transmit, or otherwise release this document in contravention of applicable Export
Regulations.

If requested by Alcatel-Lucent, recipient shall sign written assurances and other export-related
documents as may be required for Alcatel-Lucent to comply with Export Regulations.

Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All
other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no

responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.

Copyright © 2007 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Contents
Page 3

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Overview of sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

SS7 network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
SS7 network overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Communications paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Network hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Database overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Databases and forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Database dependencies and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Figure 1. Order of input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Network administration tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Self-identity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Logical networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
5070 SSG identity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Local node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Node parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Signaling point restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Link sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Link set function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Link set procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Point code mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
MOPC with super link set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Special link set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Contents
Page 4

Processors and links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Signaling links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Processor provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Link span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Low-speed E1 link parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Table A. E1 level 2 default timer parameters for signaling rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Table B. LSL common link parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Low-speed T1 link parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Table C. T1 level 2 default timer parameters for signaling rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Table D. LSL common link parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
HSL parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Table E. HSL common link parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Table F. HSL congestion level parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Table G. HSL timer parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Table H. HSL level 2 default timer parameters for signaling rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Table I. HSL traffic measurement marginal threshold parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
ATM over E1 high-speed links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Table J. ATM parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... ........... 189
Table K. Congestion level parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... ........... 190
Table L. ATM timer parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... ........... 191
Table M. Traffic measurement marginal threshold parameters . . . ... ........... 192
Table N. SAAL parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... ........... 192

SS7-IP interworking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Figure 2. SS7-IP interworking order of input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Provision IPLK or IPUA processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
SS7 over IP using M2PA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
SS7 over IP using M3UA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Route set master. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Assign a link set/application server to a route set master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Change a link set/application server in a route set master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Delete a link set/application server from a route set master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Display a route set master. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Contents
Page 5

Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Routing procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Destination point code route sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

SCCP subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

SCCP signaling functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Subsystem name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

GTT for SCCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

GTT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Figure 3. GTT process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
GTT tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Supported GTTs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
TT definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
GTT destination definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
GTM definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Regular GTT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

SCCP applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

Assign a mated application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Change a mated application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Display a mated application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Delete a mated subsystem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Concerned signaling points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

CSP tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
CSP groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
CSPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Gateway screening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Screening features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Gateway screening supporting tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Gateway screening MMI commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Gateway link set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Allowed/blocked OPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Contents
Page 6

Allowed SIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Allowed/blocked DPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Allowed affected destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Allowed CGPA global title address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Allowed calling party address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Allowed CDPA global title address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Allowed called party address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Allowed affected point code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Gateway screening threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Gateway screening throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

Appendix. Database engineering forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Table O. Database configuration forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Logical network form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Figure 4. Logical network form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Local node form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Figure 5. Local node form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Alias for local node form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Figure 6. Alias for local node form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
CCS parameters form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Figure 7. CCS parameters form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Signaling point restart form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Figure 8. Signaling point restart form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Link set form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Figure 9. Link set form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
PCMAP form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Figure 10. PCMAP form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
MOPC form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Figure 11. MOPC form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Super link set form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Contents
Page 7

Figure 12. Super link set form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

Special link set form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Figure 13. Special link set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
AE1LK, CTDLK, CELK, CEDLK, and HELK form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Figure 14. AE1LK, CTDLK, CELK, CEDLK, and HELK form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Default link span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Figure 15. Default link span form for AE1LK, CELK, CEDLK, and HELK . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Figure 16. Default link span form for CTDLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Link span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Figure 17. Link span form for AE1LK, CTDLK, CEDLK, CELK, and HELK . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Figure 18. Link span form for AE1LK, CTDLK, CEDLK, CELK, and HELK, part 2 . . . . . . . 489
Figure 19. Link span form for AE1LK, CTDLK, CEDLK, CELK, and HELK, part 3 . . . . . . . 490
Link span loopback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Figure 20. Link span loopback form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
AE1LK, CELK, HELK, and IPLK link form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Figure 21. AE1LK, CELK, HELK, and IPLK link form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
CEDLK, CELK, and CTDLK link form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Figure 22. CEDLK, CELK, and CTDLK link form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
LSL parameters form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Figure 23. Low-speed E1 link parameters form, part 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Figure 24. Low-speed E1 link parameters form, part 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Figure 25. Low-speed T1 link parameters form, part1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Figure 26. Low-speed T1 link parameters form, part 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
ATM over E1 high-speed links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Figure 27. ATM over E1 high-speed link parameters form, part 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Figure 28. ATM over E1 high-speed link parameters form, part 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Figure 29. ATM over E1 high-speed link parameters form, part 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
HSL parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Figure 30. HSL parameters form, part1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Figure 31. HSL parameters form, part 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
IPLK and IPUA form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Figure 32. IPLK and IPUA form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Hosts file parameters form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Figure 33. Hosts file parameters form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Contents
Page 8

IP connection parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521

Figure 34. IP connection parameters form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
IPLK parameters form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Figure 35. IPLK parameters form, part 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Figure 36. IPLK parameters form, part 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Figure 37. IPLK parameters form, part 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
IP system parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Figure 38. IP system parameters form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Application server form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Figure 39. Application server form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Application server process form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Figure 40. Application server process form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
UIP parameters form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Figure 41. UIP parameters form, part 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Figure 42. UIP parameters form, part 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
UIP system parameters form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Figure 43. UIP system parameters form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
UIP timer parameters form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Figure 44. UIP timer parameters form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Route set master form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Figure 45. Route set master form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
DPC route set form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Figure 46. DPC route set form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Subsystem name form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Figure 47. Subsystem name form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
TT form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Figure 48. TT form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
GTM definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Figure 49. GTM definition form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
GTT destination form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Figure 50. GTT destination form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Regular GTT form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Figure 51. Regular GTT form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Contents
Page 9

SCCP MAP form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555

Figure 52. SCCP MAP form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
CSP group form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Figure 53. CSP group form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
CSP assignment form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Figure 54. CSP assignment form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Gateway screening GTWYLS form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Figure 55. Gateway screening GTWYLS form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Gateway screening OPC form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Figure 56. Gateway screening OPC form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Gateway screening GWSCR SIO form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Figure 57. Gateway screening GWSCR SIO form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Gateway screening GWSCR DPC form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Figure 58. Gateway screening GWSCR DPC form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Gateway screening AFTDES form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Figure 59. Gateway screening AFTDES form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Gateway screening CGGTA form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Figure 60. Gateway screening CGGTA form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Gateway screening CGPA form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Figure 61. Gateway screening CGPA form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Gateway screening CDGTA form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Figure 62. Gateway screening CDGTA form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Gateway screening CDPA form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Figure 63. Gateway screening CDPA form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Gateway screening APCSSN form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Figure 64. Gateway screening APCSSN form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Gateway screening threshold form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Figure 65. Gateway screening threshold form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Gateway screening throttle form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Figure 66. Gateway screening throttle form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
CCS timers form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
Figure 67. CCS timers form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Contents
Page 10

Appendix. SCCP and MTP timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583

MTP timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Table P. MTP timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
SCCP timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Table Q. SCCP timers ranges and defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Change timer values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Display timer values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587

Appendix. Transport audit tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589

Audit fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
CCS audit status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Introduction
Page 11

Introduction

Purpose
This document provides SS7 database provisioning procedures for the Alcatel-Lucent 5070
Signaling Server Global (5070 SSG). This document is for personnel who provision the SS7
database.

Scope
This document covers the MMI commands to provision the SS7 database.

The commands in this document are for use with the MMI Terminal option. This option is
available on the System Manager Desktop (the primary window of the 5070 SSG) and is
associated with the Launcher Tree tab. This option enables you to enter MMI commands with a
command line interface.

Overview of sections
This document contains the following sections:

The Introduction section introduces the document and provides an overview of the sections in
the document.

The SS7 network section describes the SS7 network in general terms and shows how the
components of the network operate together.

The Database overview section describes the database and shows the order for creating and
deleting database elements.

The Self-identity section describes how to define the 5070 SSG as a local node, define the local
node and LNP alias, change node parameters, define the logical networks, and enable SP
restart.

The Link sets section describes how to define link sets. This section also describes multiple
originating point code with super link set, special link sets, and point code mapping.

The Processors and links section describes how to add physical processors to the system to
support both LSLs and HSLs. In addition, this section describes how to define these links and
the related parameters.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Introduction
Page 12

The SS7-IP interworking section describes the steps to provision IP links, M2PA, and M3UA
functionality.

The Route set master section describes how to create a route set master and add link sets to
it.

The Routing section lists MTP routing types and describes how to define DPCs to be used for
routing.

The SCCP subsystem section describes the SCCP software, which performs signaling functions
for specialized routing and management services.

The GTT for SCCP section describes how to define a subsystem name and manage the SCCP
subsystem database.

The SCCP applications section describes how to set up mated applications for a duplicated
subsystem.

The Concerned signaling points section describes concerned signaling point groups and
concerned signaling points.

The Gateway screening section describes how to create and manage gateway screening
parameters.

The Terms section lists the terms used in this document.

Appendix. Database engineering forms contains the database engineering forms required to
configure the 5070 SSG database.

Appendix. SCCP and MTP timers describes how to configure MTP and SCCP timers for special
purposes and testing.

Appendix. Transport audit tasks provides procedures for verifying interprocessor

communication.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7 network
Page 13

SS7 network

The following topics describe the SS7 network at a high level:

• SS7 network overview

• Communications paths
• Network hierarchy
• Applications

SS7 network overview

The SS7 network transfers information between network nodes using the message types in the
following list.

Type of information Action

Signaling Perform call setup functions
User Provide transaction-based services, such as authorization code validation,
800 service, and calling card service
Network management Provide concerned nodes with status information for network
administration management and maintenance

The signaling network includes the following features:

• Signal point
• Logical network
• Point codes
• MOPC with super link set

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7 network
Page 14

Signal point
A signaling network consists of nodes interconnected by signaling links. All nodes that
originate, route, or receive messages using the SS7 protocol are called SPs. An SS7 network
contains three types of SPs:

Type of system System function

Service switching point An SP that connects and disconnects calls on the voice network and
interfaces to the SS7 network for call signaling
Signal transfer point An SP that serves as a network hub to route messages to and from
other SPs
Service control point A database access system that provides information needed for
transaction-based services, such as authorization code validation

Logical network
A logical network is an internal distinction of networks having the same or different
characteristics. Each logical network contains the full range of signaling point codes, thus
allowing signaling point codes to overlap into any number of logical networks. Routing inside a
logical network is possible on the MTP or SCCP level.

Point codes
A unique signaling point code identifies each node in the network. Messages originate at an
origination node and are sent to a destination node. For message routing, the originating node
is identified by its point code, called the OPC. The destination node is identified by its point
code, called the DPC. The routing label for the message contains the OPC and the DPC.

Point code mapping

The point code mapping feature supports network expansion and traffic redistribution to both
end office and tandem switches by introducing a new switch into the network without
requiring changes at the offices connected to the expanded office. Point code mapping
changes the DPC or OPC of call-processing messages and sends the changed messages to a
different switch.

The DPC of the messages received in the 5070 SSG from the distant end node to the old point
code is replaced with the new point code and sent to the new point code as per the point code
mapping table. The OPC of the messages received from the new point code to the distant end
node is replaced with the old point code and sent to the distant end node as per the point code
mapping table.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7 network
Page 15

Synthetic routing

The synthetic routing feature enhances the point code mapping feature and provides a phased
approach for switch consolidation. The 5070 SSG can either replace the DPC or retain the
original DPC. If the DPC is replaced, then the point code mapping feature is in effect. If the
DPC is not replaced, then the synthetic routing feature is in effect. When synthetic routing is
in effect, the DPC message remains intact.

The DPC of the messages received in the 5070 SSG from the distant end node to the old point
code is not replaced with the new point code and sent to the new point code as per the point
code mapping table. The OPC of the messages received from the new point code to distant end
node is not replaced with the old point code and sent to the distant end node as per the point
code mapping table.

MOPC with super link set

Only one link set between two adjacent nodes is allowed, and the number of links in a link set
is restricted to a maximum of 16. An MOPC is identified internally on the 5070 SSG by a
common point code format that is composed of a logical network ID and a point code defined
by a specific protocol. An MOPC is used to create a super node or an MOPC node.

A normal link set assigned with an MOPC is called an MOPC link set. An MOPC link set maintains
a unique adjacent point code and so it is not a part of a super link set.

A super link set is a collection of 2 of 16 link sets with the same adjacent node that is treated
as a single link set.

A master link set is a link set in a super link set whose MOPC is unassigned.

A non-master link set is any link set in a super link set that is not the master link set.

A member link set is a link set that is either a master or a non-master link set.

A normal link set is a link set consisting of up to 16 links to an adjacent node.

A uniform parameter is any link set parameter that must be identical between two link sets.
The following are the uniform parameters:

• Link set type

• SRTM compatibility
• Link set restoration period
• SLS conversion
• TFP broadcasting
• Signaling point restart (SPR) enabling

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7 network
Page 16

• Preventive TFP
• SS7 accounting parameters
– Remuneration flag
– Remuneration origination operator ID flag
– Remuneration SI indicator
– Remuneration SI bit map
– Remuneration verification flag
– Remuneration verification origination operator ID flag
– Remuneration verification SI indicator
– Remuneration verification SI bit map

Communications paths
The following topics provide information about communication paths:

• Links
• Link sets
• Signaling link code
• Combined link sets
• Signaling link selection code
• Traffic distribution recommendations
• Route sets
• Ordered route sets

Links
A signaling link is a transmission facility that connects two nodes. In the 5070 SSG, link
interface processors perform these signaling link functions.

Links are associated with call routing and link processors in the link interface. The 5070 SSG
supports both odd-numbered and even-numbered links.

The 5070 SSG supports channelized E1/T1 simplex/duplex processors. Both CEDLK and CTDLK
processors support 32 channels across all four spans and support both 56 kb/s and 64 kb/s.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7 network
Page 17

Link sets
The links that directly connect two nodes are grouped into one or more link sets. A link set can
contain as many as 16 signaling links.

Signaling link code

An SLC identifies each link in the link set. The SLC has a number from 0 to 15. The same SLC is
used at each node to identify a particular link. Physical link port numbers do not have to match
at both ends.

Combined link sets

A pair of link sets originating at one node and terminating at mated nodes (such as 5070 SSG
pair) is usually grouped into a combined link set.

Signaling link selection code

An SLS code determines the link and link set used to route a message. When one or more links
fail in an active link set, the SLS codes are redistributed, and messages are load-shared over
the remaining links until the failed links are returned to service.

Traffic distribution recommendations

The following recommendations are provided at three different levels to get a better traffic
distribution for through switched traffic. The first two recommendations are related to link
sets and SLS code. The third is related to super link sets and is applied when traffic is routed
between two super link sets and the nodes involved are limited.

Link sets: Recommendation 1

An originating node should use combined link sets to equally distribute traffic between two
SSGs that are going to the same DPC.

SLS code: Recommendation 2

• When two originating nodes route traffic to the same DPC, the originating nodes should
distribute the SLS codes to complement each other. The first originating node uses SLS
codes 0-7 and the second originating node uses SLS codes 8-15 for traffic to one SSG. Then
the first originating node uses SLS codes 8-15 and the second originating node uses SLS
codes 0-7 for traffic to other SSG. This allows each outbound link on the SSG to be used for
traffic.
• For two different DPCs, the originating node should distribute the SLS codes to
complement each other to constitute a full range of SLS codes so that every link in the
inbound link set can be used for traffic.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7 network
Page 18

Inbound routing processor: Recommendation 3

In a 16-link link set, each SLS code contains exactly the same links so there is no difference
how each link is connected to the inbound processor. In a super link set that contains more
than 16 links, each SLS segment can use different links so there is a difference how inbound
processors are assigned to each link set or how originating nodes are connected to each
inbound processor.

Following are the recommendations for the link set to routing processor assignment. All
processor IDs of the routing processors are consecutive:

• The first link set of each originating node should be sequentially assigned to the routing
processor on a node group basis and the first assigned routing processor should use SLS
prefix zero.
The link sets after the first link set should be assigned in the same manner as assigned for
the first link set.
• If there is a limited number of routing processors, the second link set in each node group
should be assigned with the routing processor that uses the first segment in the next
segment cycle.
• If the node group has some traffic from the nodes in its own node group and some of the
traffic from the previous node group, then the first routing processor to be assigned should
start from the next routing processor that had not been assigned in the previous node
group.
• Each paired link sets should be assigned to the routing processors that has the same SLS
prefix.
• The links in the same link set should be assigned to the routing processors that has the
same SLS prefix.
• If a segment cycle is incomplete at the end of the array, then any segment that has the
equivalent SLS prefix can be used to make the segment cycle complete.

Route sets
One or more link sets that carry message traffic to a destination are called a route set. The
5070 SSG can send messages to a distant node over a direct link set that originates at the 5070
SSG and terminates at the distant node, or it can send messages by way of an intermediate
node. In a mated 5070 SSG pair, the mate 5070 SSG can forward messages to a node when the
direct link set cannot be used; therefore, the link set to the mate 5070 SSG is included in the
route set.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7 network
Page 19

Ordered route sets

Ordered route sets identify groups of link sets that originate at the 5070 SSG and terminate at
a distant node or an intermediate node. Each ordered route set is assigned a route set master
number, and the link sets are assigned routing selection priorities.

Network hierarchy
The following topics describe the network hierarchy:

• 5070 SSG replication

• Alias addresses
• Link types

5070 SSG replication

In a national signaling network, 5070 SSG systems are installed in geographically separated
pairs. Installing 5070 SSG systems in pairs provides the high reliability required by signaling
functions. The 5070 SSG systems are connected at different levels to create a network
hierarchy.

Several 5070 SSG pairs can be interconnected at the same level to form a backbone 5070 SSG
network. These 5070 SSG pairs are called primary pairs. When a network handles a heavy
traffic load, a primary 5070 SSG pair can also be connected to a secondary 5070 SSG pair to
form a multilevel network. The secondary 5070 SSG pair is always homed to a particular
primary 5070 SSG pair. A primary 5070 SSG pair can support multiple secondary 5070 SSG pairs.

An SCP can also be replicated within a network; that is, the network can include two SCPs at
different locations with identical databases. Transactions can then be load-shared between
the two SCPs.

Alias addresses
A group of related nodes, such as a 5070 SSG or SCP pair, can be identified by a single point
code, called an alias. The alias address is used by nodes sending messages to the related nodes
over combined link sets. The nodes are assigned the alias point code in addition to their
individual point codes.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7 network
Page 20

Link types
The links that interconnect network nodes are identified by the letters A-F, which indicate the
relationship of the nodes being connected. The following list defines the link types used in a
national signaling network.

Type of link Description

A Access link: an SP to a 5070 SSG pair. A links are normally installed in pairs; each
link connects an SP to one 5070 SSG.
B Bridge link: a primary 5070 SSG pair with all other primary 5070 SSG pairs in the
same network.
C Cross link: two 5070 SSG systems to form a mated pair.
D Diagonal link: secondary 5070 SSG pair to a primary 5070 SSG pair.
E Extended link: an SP to an 5070 SSG pair other than the SP's home 5070 SSG pair.
E links are usually installed in pairs.
F Fully associated link: connects two SPs.

Applications
• User functions
• Subsystems
• Global titles
• Global title translation
• Gateway screening

User functions
The primary function of the 5070 SSG is to route messages accurately to their destinations. In
certain cases, the destination of the message is not defined by point code alone. Certain
network services require additional processing to route the message (for example, 800 service
and calling card service).

Subsystems
The network provides its users with additional message processing in the form of application
software, called subsystems, residing in SSPs and SCPs. Each subsystem is assigned a number.

A node that requires data for a user function sends a message to the appropriate subsystem.
The message includes the point code of the node where the subsystem resides and the

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7 network
Page 21

subsystem number. The subsystem performs the function and returns the data to the node that
requested it.

Global titles
Messages can also indirectly identify network destinations. A message that indirectly identifies
its destination does not contain a point code and subsystem number in its message routing
label. Instead, it contains a global title. The global title has the following parameters:

• It is an address that does not explicitly identify a network destination.

• It must be translated at the 5070 SSG to determine the node and subsystem to which the
message should be sent.

Global title translation

The GTT process translates dialed digits into a network address composed of the following
elements:

• Point code
• Subsystem number

The SCCP software portion of the 5070 SSG performs GTT functions. The following list shows
the system responsible for, and the GTT process used, to complete an 800-service call.

Type of system Process

SP Receives a message signal unit requiring data to complete an 800-service call
SP Sends the dialed digits to the 5070 SSG
5070 SSG Translates the dialed digits to the network address of the application that
handles the query
5070 SSG Inserts the address into the message
5070 SSG Routes the message to the new address

Gateway screening
The gateway screening feature provides the 5070 SSG capabilities to screen incoming MTP and
SCCP message traffic received on link sets designated as gateway link sets. This feature
provides protection against unauthorized traffic or traffic sent in error to a network.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Database overview
Page 22

Database overview

The following topics provides an overview of the database:

• Databases and forms

• Database dependencies and capacities
• Network administration tasks

Databases and forms

The SS7 database contains the following databases required by the 5070 SSG:

• Message routing database

• Network management database
• GTT database
• Subsystem management database

Data tables organize this information into data elements and their parameters.

This document includes samples of generic database forms and explains the rules and
guidelines for completing each form. Appendix. Database engineering forms contains all
regular database provisioning forms. Copy and complete the forms to create or change
database elements.

Database dependencies and capacities

Database elements must be added and deleted in an orderly fashion because of the dependent
relationships of these elements. In each section, the dependencies for deleting database
elements are listed in the “Constraints” subsection.

Figure 1 shows the order of input for database elements. To delete database elements, start at
the appropriate point in the chart and work up. The following blocks are the starting points for
deletion:

• CCS cluster
• SCCP concerned signaling point
• SCCP mated applications
• Global translation

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Database overview
Page 23

Figure 1. Order of input

LOGNET parameters

CCS parameters

CCS local node

Self-identity
CCS alias

Signaling point restart

CCS link set

Point code
Link sets mapping/synthetic
routing

MPC

Processor

Link span
Processors and links
CCS link

CCS link parameters

CCS route set master Route set master

Member routing
CCS member routing

SCCP subsystem SCCP subsystem

TT mapping SCCP mated Concerned signaling

applications point group
SCCP translation
SCCP concerned
GTT destination SCCP mated signaling point
applications
Global translation
Concerned signaling
points
GTT for SCCP

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Database overview
Page 24

Network administration tasks

Network administration tasks consist of adding, changing, displaying, and deleting SS7 data
elements and parameters to reflect changes in the network configuration. The network
administration tasks in this document are described in a procedural format. Each procedure
has an introduction that lists the procedure's constraints and the associated data tables by
name and number.

The 5070 SSG stores the database as data tables. The 5070 SSG maintains two or more images
of each table in the SS7 database:

• A copy of each table stored on each system disk

• A copy of each table downloaded to processor memory where the table is used

Data tables are downloaded to processor memory during IPL. Data tables are built and updated
by database editor commands. Each command operates on a set of tables to change, delete, or
display data elements. When a command executes, the system updates the affected data
tables. Data tables are identified by five- or six-character names assigned to the disk files
containing the tables.

Note: Back up the SS7 database after making any changes to the routing and GTT tables.

The system accesses the following data tables to perform database changes:

Table name Description

M01 Processor equipage date
MA35 CEDLK span alarm threshold
MB35 CELK span alarm threshold
MD35 HELK span alarm threshold
ME35 CTDLK span alarm threshold
MH35 AE1LK span alarm threshold
MA45 CEDLK span equipage
MB45 CELK span equipage
MD45 HELK span equipage
ME45 CTDLK span equipage
MH45 AE1LK span equipage
S27 Adjacent node name
S28 MTP link set name
S60 Gateway screening reference
S61 Gateway screening OPC

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Database overview
Page 25

Table name Description

S62 Gateway screening DPC
S63 Gateway screening SIO
S64 Gateway screening CGPA
S65 Gateway screening CDPA
S66 Gateway screening CGGTA/CDGTA
S67 Gateway affected destination
S68 Gateway screening APCSSN
S69 Gateway throttling parameters
S80 PCM
S89 CSP group
U1C M3UA UIP system parameter
U31 M3UA UIP timer
U34 Application server process
U45 Application server
V34 Application server process name
V45 Application server name
V49 M3UA UIP parameter
W13 GTT multiple PC and SSN name table
W32 Gateway link set/network ID table
W33 Gateway network table
W49 Marginal link performance threshold
W53 GTT multiple PC and SSN table
W62 Node restart parameters table
W67 Alias point code
W70 Gateway link set
W80 Gateway billing originating client point code
W83 SCCP concerned point code
W85 Translation type mapping
W86 GTT
W89 CSP code
W8C Pre_GTT GTM criteria table
X57 CEDLK processor entries
X58 HELK processor entries

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Database overview
Page 26

Table name Description

X60 CELK processor entries
X61 CTDLK processor entries
X64 AE1LK processor entries
X65 IPUA processor entries
Y1C IP system parameters
Y33 Local node configuration data
Y34 Link data
Y45 MTP link set number
Y48 Combined link set table
Y49 Link configuration data
Y51 Route set master
Y52 MTP destination
Y53 Logical network parameter
Y54 Logical network name
Y55 MTP node name table
Y79 SCCP node
Y81 LNP GTT multiple PC/SSN name table
Y83 SCCP subsystem table
Y84 SCCP subsystem name
Y85 GTT type
Y86 SCCP timer parameters

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Self-identity
Page 27

Self-identity

The following topics provide information about self-identity:

• Logical networks
• 5070 SSG identity
• Local node
• Alias
• Node parameters
• Signaling point restart

Logical networks
The logical network overcomes the limitation of the maximum number of networks imposed by
the network indicator field of the MTP protocol. The logical network concept allows for
multiple, logically separated networks to exist within the same network indicator. Routing
inside a logical network is possible on the MTP or SCCP level. Routing between different logical
networks requires use of SCCP GTT functionality. The logical network is uniquely determined
by the link set on which the message arrives. The 5070 SSG has self-identity in each logical
network that is configured.

You can perform the following logical networks procedures:

• Assign a logical network

• Change a logical network
• Delete a logical network
• Display a logical network

Assign a logical network

Use this procedure to provision attributes for a logical network.

Constraints

The following constraint apply to creating a logical network:

• The SSG can configure up to 32 logical networks only.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Self-identity
Page 28

Data tables

The following data tables are changed when logical network parameters are assigned:

• Logical network parameter (Y53)

• Logical network name (Y54)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: ASSIGN CCS LOGNET

2 Prompt: LN*NAME=
Enter: logical network name or number
Enter the logical network name of 1-16 characters or a number between the range of
0-31.
The default value is none.

3 Prompt: NI*INDICATOR=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
0 or 1 (international network indicator); go to Step 11.
2 or 3 (national network indicator); continue.
This entry defines the network indicator.
The default value is none.

4 Prompt: PROT*CLASS=
Enter: [A, ANSI, I, ITU, C, or CHINA]
This entry defines the protocol class.
If you enter A or ANSI, the system shows the logical network parameters; go to Step 13.
If you enter C or CHINA, go to Step 6; otherwise, continue.

5 Prompt: PC*FORMAT=
Enter: point code format
The point code valid range [1-255]-[0-255]-[0-255].
The default value is none.
The system shows the parameters associated with the local node.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Self-identity
Page 29

6 Prompt: SPARE*BITS=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
0-3 (full range); go to Step 7.
0, 1, 2, 3 (single value); go to Step 9.
The system shows the logical network parameters.
This entry defines the spare bits.

7 Prompt: CONG*PROCDR=
Enter: [A or B]
A (congestion with priority)
B (congestion with level); go to Step 10.
This entry defines the congestion procedures.
The default value is congestion with level.

8 Prompt: RCT*SUPPORT=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y, or N]
This entry defines the RCT support.

9 Prompt: CONG*ASP=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y, or N]
The entry defines congestion applied to application servers.
The default value is YES.

10 Prompt: TFR*SUPPORT=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y, or N]
This entry defines the TFR support.
The system shows the logical network parameters.

11 Prompt: SND*TFPINV=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y, or N]
This entry defines the send TFP for invalid point codes.
The default value is NO.

12 Prompt: ROT*SLS=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y, or N]
This entry defines the rotate SLS for outgoing messages.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Self-identity
Page 30

The default value is NO.

The system shows the logical network parameters.

13 Prompt: DEST*LN=
Enter: destination logical network
This entry defines the destination logical network.
The default value is NO.
The system shows the logical network parameters.

14 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT<^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt named (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute changes and exit to the command prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Change a logical network

Use this procedure to change the attributes of a existing logical network.

Constraints

The following constraints apply to changing a logical network:

• The logical network name must be unique.

• The logical network attributes NI INDICATOR, PROTOCOL, POINT CODE FORMAT,
SPAREBITS, and CONGESTION cannot be changed if any link set of the logical network is
not manually out of service.

Data tables

The following data tables are changed when logical network parameters are changed:

• Logical network parameter (Y53)

• Logical network name (Y54)
• MTP link set (Y45)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Self-identity
Page 31

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE CCS LOGNET

2 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number
The default value is none.

3 Prompt: NLN*NAME=
Enter: new logical network name
The default value is the old logical network name.

4 Prompt: NI*INDICATOR=
Enter: (one of the following name)
0 or 1 (international network indicator); go to Step 6.
2 or 3 (national network indicator); continue.
This entry defines the network indicator.
The default value is the old network indicator value.

5 Prompt: PROT*CLASS=
Enter: [A, ANSI, I, ITU, C, or CHINA]
This entry defines the protocol class.
If you enter A or ANSI, go to Step 13.
If you enter C or CHINA, go to Step 7; otherwise, continue.
The default is the old protocol class value.

6 Prompt: PC*FORMAT=
Enter: point code format
The point code valid range is [1-255]-[0-255]-[0-255].
The default value is none.
The system shows the parameters associated with the local node.
If you entered 0 or 1 in Step 4, go to Step 11; otherwise, continue.
The default value is old point code format.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Self-identity
Page 32

7 Prompt: SPARE*BITS=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
0-3 (full-range); go to Step 8.
0,1, 2, 3 (single value); go to Step 10.
The system shows the logical network parameters.
This entry defines the spare bits.

8 Prompt: CONG*PROCDR=
Enter: [A or B]
A (congestion with priority)
B (congestion with level); go to Step 10.
This entry defines the congestion procedures.
The default is the old congestion procedures value.

9 Prompt: RCT*SUPPORT=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y, or N]
This entry defines the RCT support.
The default is the old RCT support value.

10 Prompt: TFR*SUPPORT=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y, or N]
This entry defines the TFR support.

11 Prompt: SND*TFPINV=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y, or N]
This entry defines the send TFP for invalid point codes
The default value if NO.

12 Prompt: ROT*SLS=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y, or N]
This entry defines the rotate SLS for outgoing messages.
The default value is NO.

13 Prompt: SCR*LS=
Enter: screening link set name or number

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Self-identity
Page 33

Note: To disable the logical network screening, enter 0. However, the screening link
set name or number must be already assigned so you can change it here.

14 Prompt: DEST*LN=
Enter: logical network
This entry defines the destination logical network.
The system shows the changed logical network parameters.

15 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT<^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute changes and exit to the command prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Delete a logical network

Use this procedure to delete a logical network.

Constraint

The following constraint apply to deleting a logical network:

• The logical network cannot be deleted if any node belonging to this logical network exists
in the MTP destination table (Y52).
• The logical network cannot be deleted if a subsystem already exists for the logical
network.

Data tables

The following data tables are changed when logical network parameters are deleted:

• Logical network parameter (Y53)

• Logical network name (Y54)
• MTP link set (Y45)
• MTP local node (Y32)
• SPR (W62)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Self-identity
Page 34

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DELETE CCS LOGNET

2 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number
The default value is none.

3 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT<^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute changes and exit to the command prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display a logical network

Use this procedure to display logical networks.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying the logical network parameters.

Data tables

No data tables are affected by this command.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLA CCS LOGNET

2 Prompt: DLOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name, number, or ALL
The default value is none.

3 To display another logical network, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Self-identity
Page 35

4 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

5070 SSG identity

The 5070 SSG must have an identity for itself (called a self-identity) in all the logical networks
that are configured as well as an image of the rest of the network. The 5070 SSG uses
self-identity to route traffic. Self-identity includes a node name and a point code in the logical
network. The node may also be part of an alias that includes other nodes.

Establishing self-identity requires the following tasks:

• Change node parameters

• Define the local node
• Create aliases for the local node
• Configure SPR

The following changes can be made to the local node after its self-identity is established:

• Change node parameters

• Change the local node name
• Change the point code

Local node
A node is any SP that handles SS7 message traffic. The 5070 SSG is called the local node.
Distant nodes are linked to the local node.

This subsection describes procedures for configuring the local node. The route set master
procedures identify distant nodes and the route sets from the local node to the distant nodes.

The local node procedures define the characteristics and capabilities of the local node. The
local node has a node name and a point code. The local node may also have one or more alias
point codes.

You can perform the following local node procedures:

• Assign the local node

• Change the local node
• Display the local node

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Self-identity
Page 36

Assign the local node

Use this procedure to define local nodes.

Constraints

The following constraints apply to adding the local node:

• The 5070 SSG must have a different node name in each network. In single ID mode, assign
only one node name. In multiple ID mode, assign the same node name to the multiple
point codes defining the 5070 SSG.
• This procedure defines the primary point code.
• The database is limited to 4096 point codes.

Data tables

The following MTP data tables are changed when a new network is added to the SS7 database:

• Network (Y33)
• MTP destination (Y52)
• Node name (Y55)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

Note: In this procedure, only the primary point codes may be defined.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: ASSIGN CCS NODE

2 Prompt: ANO*DE=
Enter: new node name
The node name can be 1-11 characters.
The node name must start with an alphabetic character with the remaining characters
A-Z or 0-9.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Self-identity
Page 37

The default value is none.

3 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number
Enter the logical network name of 1-16 characters or a number between the range of
0-31.
The default value is none.

4 Prompt: PNT*COD=
Enter: point code
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.
The default value is none.
The system shows the parameters associated with the local node.

5 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Change the local node

Use this procedure to change the name or point code of a local node.

Constraints

The following constraints apply to changing the local node and the point code:

• Assigning a new name to the point code for the node changes the node name.
• Point codes are changed in different ways depending on the purpose:
– Change the point code to correct a database error: assign a different point code to
the node name.
– Change the point code to alter routing: delete the current node and add a new node
with the same name and a different point code.
• Change the point code only to correct the database, not to assign a new location to the
local node.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Self-identity
Page 38

• If the primary point code is changed, the new primary point code is written to the
database entry marked as the self-identity.

Data tables

The following data tables are changed when node parameters are changed:

• Network (Y33)
• MTP link set (Y45)
• MTP destination (Y52)
• Node name (Y55)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

Note: See Display the local node in this section to show the parameters of the local
node name before making a change.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE CCS NODE

2 Prompt: NODE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
A node name; go to Step 5.
<RETURN>; continue.

3 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number
The default value is none.

4 Prompt: PNT*COD=
Enter: point code
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Self-identity
Page 39

The default value is none.

The system shows the parameters assigned to the node.

5 Prompt: CPNODE=
Enter: A new node name
<RETURN> (current name)

6 Prompt: CPNT*COD=
Enter: new point code

7 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display the local node

Use this procedure to show one or all of the local node definitions. Use the node name or the
point code to select the node. The system can show as many as 32 alias point codes.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying the local node parameters.

Data tables

The system retrieves local node parameters from these data tables:

• Network (Y33)
• Node name (Y55)
• Alias point code (W67)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLA CCS NODE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Self-identity
Page 40

2 Prompt: DNODE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
A node name; go to Step 5.
ALL; go to Step 5.
<RETURN>; continue.

3 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number
The default value is none.

4 Prompt: PNT*COD=
Enter: point code string
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.
The default value is none.
The system shows the local node parameters.

5 To display another node, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

6 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Alias
An alias is a point code that identifies a group of related nodes. The alias allows other nodes to
address the related nodes as a unit. Messages are sent over combined link sets from the
originating node to the destination nodes. The alias is assigned to the related nodes as well as
to their individual point codes.

To add an alias for the 5070 SSG, assign an alias address to be used by distant nodes with
combined link sets to the two 5070 SSG systems. The procedure consists of assigning up to 32
point codes and alias node names to the 5070 SSG.

For the local node, an alias point code supports full broadcast for TFA or TCA messages about
the alias when the resources to support the processor are limited or not available.

The same alias point codes are assigned to the local 5070 SSG and the mate 5070 SSG. Distant
nodes use the alias to route messages to the 5070 SSG pair.

When the signaling network (level 3) software receives a message, it compares the destination
address with both the primary point code and alias point code assigned to the 5070 SSG. If the
addresses match, the message is handled by the 5070 SSG.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Self-identity
Page 41

Note: The alias network numbers cannot differ from the primary (local) node.

You can perform the following alias procedures:

• Assign an alias
• Change an alias
• Delete an alias
• Display an alias

Assign an alias
Use this procedure to assign multiple alias node names and alias point codes for the local node.
The system provisions the alias point codes in the alias point code table (W67).

Constraints

The following constraints apply to adding an alias for the local node:

• The alias node name must be different than the name assigned to the 5070 SSG when the
network configuration is defined.
• If the node name does not exist in the database, the MMI prompts for a new alias point
code.
• If the alias point code does not exist, this procedure adds the new alias node name and
point code to the database.

Data tables

The system accesses these data tables to add an alias:

• MTP destination (Y52)

• Node name (Y55)
• Alias point code (W67)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Self-identity
Page 42

1 Prompt: >
Enter: ASSIGN CCS ALIAS

2 Prompt: ALNO*DE=
Enter: alias node name
The alias node name can be 1-11 characters.
The alias node name must start with an alphabetic character with the remaining
characters A-Z or 0-9.

3 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number
Enter the logical network name of 1-16 characters or a number between the range of
0-31.
The default value is none.

4 Prompt: PNT*COD=
Enter: point code
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.
The default value is none.
The system shows the alias and local node parameters.

5 Prompt: DSS*AL=
Enter: [Y or N]
Y (designate as DSS alias)
N (do not designate as DSS alias - default)
The system shows the alias and local node parameters.

6 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Self-identity
Page 43

Change an alias
Use this procedure to change an alias node name and alias point code assigned to the local
node.

Constraints

The following constraints apply to changing an alias:

• The alias node name must be different from the name assigned to the 5070 SSG when the
network configuration was established.
• The alias point code should not be changed while the system is handling live traffic.
• If the alias node name or the point code exists in the database as an alias self-identity, the
system prompts for a new alias node name.

Data tables

The system accesses these tables to change an assigned alias:

• MTP networks (Y33)

• MTP destination (Y52)
• Node name (Y55)
• Alias point code (W67)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE CCS ALIAS

2 Prompt: OALNO*DE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
An alias node name; go to Step 5. The system shows currently assigned local
node information.
<RETURN>; continue.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Self-identity
Page 44

3 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number
The default value is none.

4 Prompt: PNT*COD=
Enter: point code
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.
The default value is none.
The system shows the alias and local node parameters.

5 Prompt: CALNO*DE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
A new alias node name
<RETURN> (current value)

6 Prompt: CPNT*COD=
Enter: point code

7 Prompt: CDSS*AL=
Enter: [Y or N]
Y (designate as DSS alias)
N (do not designate as DSS alias)
<RETURN> (current value)

8 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Delete an alias
Use this procedure to delete the alias node names and alias point codes assigned to the local
node.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Self-identity
Page 45

Constraints

Notify distant nodes using the alias address before the alias is deleted. Delete the alias from
the local 5070 SSG database.

Data tables

The system accesses these data tables when an alias is deleted:

• MTP destination (Y52)

• Node name (Y55)
• Alias point code (W67)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: DELETE CCS ALIAS

2 Prompt: OALNO*DE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
An alias node name; go to Step 5. The system shows currently assigned local
node information.
<RETURN>; continue.

3 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number
The default value is none.

4 Prompt: PNT*COD=
Enter: point code
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.
The default value is none.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Self-identity
Page 46

The system shows the alias and local node parameters.

WARNING: VERIFY THAT NO TRAFFIC IS DESTINED FOR THIS ALIAS POINT
CODE BEFORE DELETING.

5 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display an alias
Use this procedure to show alias node names and alias point codes assigned to the local node.
The system also shows the local primary node name and primary point code.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying an alias.

Data tables

No data tables are affected by this command.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLA CCS ALIAS

2 Prompt: DLOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name, number, or ALL

3 To display another node, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

4 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Self-identity
Page 47

Node parameters
The node parameters commands control the following data:

• Maximum number of dynamic status records

• Node role for the local node (5070 SSG with transfer)

Note: Hop counting is not enabled in the current release.

You can perform the following node parameters procedures:

• Change the node parameters

• Display the node parameters

Change the node parameters

Use this procedure to change the node role for the local node and the hop counter for SCCP
routing. If the automatic hourly off-normal status reporting feature is available, the feature
status (enabled or disabled) may also be changed.

Constraints

If the local node is assigned before the node role, use the ASSIGN CCS NODE command to assign
the node role to the 5070 SSG.

Data tables

The system accesses the local node configuration data table (Y33) when the node role or the
number of dynamic status records is changed.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE CCS PARAME

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Self-identity
Page 48

2 Prompt: SYSTEM*PAR=
Enter: [S or L]
S (system parameter - default)
L (logical network paramter)
If you enter L, go to Step 4; otherwise, continue.

3 Prompt: NODER*OLE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1 (STP or SSP with transfer)
2 (SSP without transfer)
3 (SCP without transfer)
4 (SCP with transfer)
<RETURN>, (current value)
Enter 1; the entry selects 5070 SSG with transfer capability. Go to Step 9.

4 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number
The default value is none.

5 Prompt: OFF*NDIS=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
E or ENABLE (enable the auto hourly off-normal status reporting feature)
D or DISABLE (disable the auto hourly off-normal status reporting feature)
<RETURN> (current value)

6 Prompt: HOP*COUNT=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
0-255 (hop counter for SCCP routing)
<RETURN> (current value)

7 Prompt: P*COMP=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
FULL or F (full response to all P_COMP requests)
TRUN or T (truncated response to all P_COMP requests)
CURR or C (full response to the P_COMP request for the current period only.
Truncated response to all previous P_COMP requests)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Self-identity
Page 49

8 Prompt: NO_SERVICE_IMPACT_LINK_REMOVAL=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
E or ENABLE (enable service impact link removal feature)
D or DISABLE (disable service impact link removal feature)
<RETURN> (current value)
Go to Step 10.

9 Prompt: MTP_READY_WAIT_FOR_FLEXIBLE_ROUTING_DOWNLOAD=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
E or ENABLE (enable the processor to wait for flexible routing data to
complete download prior to setting the processor ready to route)
D or DISABLE (disable the processor to wait for flexible routing data
download)
<RETURN> (current value)

10 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display the node parameters

Use this procedure to show the node role for the local node and the hop counter for SCCP
routing. If the automatic hourly off-normal status reporting feature is available, the system
shows the feature status (enabled or disabled).

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying the node parameters.

Data tables

The system accesses the local node configuration data table (Y33) to show this information.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Self-identity
Page 50

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLA CCS PARAME

2 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number

3 To display another parameter, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

4 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Signaling point restart

SPR prevents loss of messages or potential traffic congestion. The CCS SPR commands set up
the network to perform these functions:

• Restart a node that has no available signaling links (resulting from a link failure, processor
outage, or management inhibition)
• Bring up a sufficient number of links for operation
• Update the routing tables for the node before signaling traffic resumes

You can perform the following SPR parameters procedures:

• Change SPR parameters

• Display SPR parameters

Change SPR parameters

Use this procedure to enable or disable SPR parameters. This procedure has these options:

• Enable the MRSP on the local node

• Enable the DPC-activated information and IPRs on the CCM
• Enable full broadcast for TFA and TCA messages during CCM restoration after a duplex
CCM failure

Constraints

No constraints apply to changing SPR parameters.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Self-identity
Page 51

Data tables

The signaling point restart table (W62) is accessed when SPR parameters are changed.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE CCS SPR

2 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number

3 Prompt: SPR*FLG=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
E (enable the MRSP on the local node)
D (disable the MRSP on the local node)
<RETURN> (current value)

4 Prompt: IPR*FLG=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
E (enable DPC activated IPRs on the CCM restore after a duplex CCM failure)
D (disable DPC activated IPRs on the CCM restore after a duplex CCM failure)
<RETURN> (current value)

5 Prompt: BRDCST*FLG=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
E (enable full broadcast of TFA or TCA messages on the CCM restoral after the
duplex CCM failure)
D (disable full broadcast of TFA or TCA messages on the CCM restoral after
the duplex CCM failure)
<RETURN> (current value)
The system shows the enable and disable flags.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Self-identity
Page 52

6 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display SPR parameters

Use this procedure to show the parameters for the SPR feature.

Data tables

The signaling point restart table (W62) is accessed when SPR parameters are changed.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLA CCS SPR
Verify that the SPR parameters are correct.
END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Link sets
Page 53

Link sets

The following topics provide information about the link set related procedures:

• Link set function

• Link set procedures
• Point code mapping
• MOPC with super link set
• Special link set

Link set function

A link set is a group of links that connects two nodes. When a new node is added to the
network, the link sets must be defined. Adding a new link set consists of defining link set
operation.

The Processors and links section describes links and link parameters.

You can perform the following procedures to manage link sets and links:

• Add link and link set

• Delete link and link set
• Delete link from link set

Add link and link set

Use this procedure to create link sets and their links.

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Add a link set.

2 Equip a call routing and link processor for each link to be assigned to the link set.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Link sets
Page 54

3 Remove the call routing and link processors that support the links in the link set from
service.

4 Restore the call routing and link processors that support the links in the link set to
service.

5 Add the links to the link set.

6 Test each link.

7 Change the link parameters.

8 Deactivate the links in the link set.

9 Activate the links in the link set.

END PROCEDURE

Delete link and link set

Use this procedure to delete a link set from the database and from associated links.

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Remove the gateway link set definition, if applicable.

2 Remove the route set master from the ordered route. This task is required only if the
link set to be deleted is the last link set in the route.

3 Change the route set master to delete the link set.

4 Remove the links from the link set.

5 Remove the link set definition.

END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Link sets
Page 55

Delete link from link set

Use this procedure to delete a link from a link set and to remove the call routing and link
processor.

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

Note: You do not have to remove the call routing and link processor to delete a link
from a link set.

1 Deactivate the link.

2 Delete the link from the link set.

3 Unequip the call routing and link processor.

4 Remove the call routing and link processor card from the slot.

5 Reset any hardware alarms if needed.

END PROCEDURE

Link set procedures

The links connected to an adjacent node are grouped into one or more link sets. Each link has
a physical link (port) number and a link set name to identify its function.

Link sets to a pair of mated nodes (such as another 5070 SSG pair) are usually grouped into
combined link sets. Combined link sets contain links that terminate at both the mated nodes.
The combined link sets can be used with the alias feature to send messages to either node.

Link sets are defined on the link set form. The link set form defines the link sets that terminate
at each adjacent node and contains information about link availability and network
management messages. A super link set may consist of 2 to 16 link sets.

You can perform the following link sets procedures:

• Assign link set

• Change link set

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Link sets
Page 56

• Delete link set

• Display link set
• Activate/deactivate link set

Assign link set

Use this procedure to create a new link set.

Constraints

These constraints apply to assigning a link set to the SS7 database:

• Do not activate the link sets in a combined link set until both link sets are defined.
• All link sets originate at the 5070 SSG. Do not enter the local node name of the 5070 SSG
as the link set destination. A link set that terminates at the 5070 SSG cannot be defined.
• The adjacent node must be unique for each link set in a given logical network.
• Combined link sets must be assigned the same link set type.
• While a combined link set is assigned, the SLS value assigned to each link in the combined
link set should be unique.
• Only one C-type link set can be defined per logical network.

Data tables

When a new link set is added to the database, these data tables are changed:

• Adjacent node name (S27)

• Link set name (S28)
• Network (Y33)
• MTP link set (Y45)
• Combined link set
• MTP destination (Y52)
• Node name (Y55)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Link sets
Page 57

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: ASSIGN CCS LINKSE

2 Prompt: LSNAME=
Enter: link set name
Enter a link set name of 1-8 alphanumeric characters. The first character in the link set
name must be alphabetic.

3 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number
Enter the logical network name of 1-16 characters or a number between the range of
0-31.
The default value is none.

4 Prompt: ADJN*ODE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
The name or point code for the adjacent node; go to Step 5.
<RETURN>; continue.

Note: The prompt in Step 5 is displayed if the adjacent node name does not exist in the
node name table.

5 Prompt: ADDN*ODE=
Enter: [Y or N]
Y (add the node)
N (bypass adding the node)

6 Prompt: PNT*COD=
Enter: point code
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Link sets
Page 58

The default value is none.

Note: If the TFR*SUPPORT and SND*TFPINV parameters for the logical network are
assigned the value N or No, then the prompt in Step 7 is not displayed.

7 Prompt: SEND*PTFP=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y, or N]

Note: The system deactivates the second link set in a combined link set when the assign
command is confirmed.

8 Prompt: COMBINE=
Enter: the name or number of the link set
Press <RETURN> (current value)

9 Prompt: LSTYPE=
Enter: (a link set type)
A (access link)
B (bridge link)
C (cross link)
D (diagonal link)
E (extended link)
F (connects two SPs)
<RETURN> (current value)

10 Prompt: TFP*BROAD=
Enter: [Y or N]
Y (send TFP messages on the link set)
N (eliminate TFP messages)
<RETURN> (current value)

11 Prompt: LSPRIOR=
Enter: [1-16]
Enter the link set restoration priority. There is no default value.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Link sets
Page 59

12 Prompt: SPR*ENA=
Enter: [Y or N]
Y (enable the adjacent node restart support flag - default)
N (disable the adjacent node restart support flag)
<RETURN> (current value)

13 Prompt: REQ*ACT=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y, or N]
Y (activates the link set)
N (leave the link set in the deactivated state)
<RETURN> (current value)
The system shows the parameters.

Note: If you enter Y in Step 10, then the following caution message is displayed.

CAUTION: Sending of preventive TFP/TCP is enabled on a type A- or

E-link set.

14 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Change link set

Use this procedure to change one or more of these parameters for an existing link set:

• Link set name

• Adjacent node name
• Preventive TFP status
• SRTM compatibility
• Combined link set name and status
• SLS conversion
• TFP broadcast
• Link set restoration priority

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Link sets
Page 60

• Link set activation status

• Minimum number of links required for unrestricted use

Constraints

These constraints apply to changing link set parameters:

• To combine two link sets, the 5- to 8-bit SLS conversion values must be the same.
• Do not activate the link sets in a combined link set until both link sets are defined.

Data tables

When parameters associated with an existing link set are changed, these data tables are
changed:

• Adjacent node name (S27)

• Link set name (S28)
• Network (Y33)
• MTP link set (Y45)
• Combined link set
• MTP destination (Y52)
• Node name (Y55)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE CCS LINKSE

2 Prompt: LINKS*ET=
Enter: link set name or number
Enter a link set name of 1-8 alphanumeric characters.
The system shows the links and other values associated with the link set.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Link sets
Page 61

3 Prompt: NLSN*AME=
Enter: new link set name
Enter a new link set name of 1-8 alphanumeric characters.
Press <RETURN> (current value).

4 Prompt: ADJN*ODE=
Enter: adjacent node name
<RETURN>; continue.

Note: The prompt in Step 5 is displayed if the adjacent node name does not exist in the
node name table.

5 Prompt: ADDN*ODE=
Enter: [Y or N]
Y (add the node)
N (bypass adding the node)

6 Prompt: CPNT*COD=
Enter: point code
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.
The default value is none.

7 Prompt: SENT*PTFP=
Enter: [Y or N]
Y (send preventive TFP)
N (do not send preventive TFP)

Note: The system deactivates the second link set in a combined link set when the assign
command is confirmed.

8 Prompt: COMB*INED=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
(A combined link set name or number)
D (to delete the combination)
<RETURN> (current value)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Link sets
Page 62

9 Prompt: LSTYPE=
Enter: (a link set type from one of the following choices)
A (access link)
B (bridge link)
C (cross link)
D (diagonal link)
E (extended link)
F (connects two SPs)
<RETURN> (current value)

10 Prompt: MINLINK=
Enter: [1-16]
Enter the minimum number of active links. Press <RETURN> (current value).

11 Prompt: SLS*CONV=
Enter: [Y or N]
Y (apply 5- to 8-bit conversion on an outgoing link set)
N (bypass conversion)
<RETURN> (current value)

12 Prompt: TFP*BROAD=
Enter: [Y or N]
Y (send TFP messages on the link set)
N (bypass sending TFP messages)
<RETURN> (current value)

13 Prompt: LSPRIOR=
Enter: [1-16]
Enter the link set restoration priority. Press <RETURN> (current value).

14 Prompt: CSPR*ENA=
Enter: [Y or N]
Y (enable the signaling point restart flag - default)
N (disable the signaling point restart flag)
<RETURN> (current value)
This entry defines the signaling point restart supports for the adjacent end node.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Link sets
Page 63

15 Prompt: REQ*ACT=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y, or N]
Y (activate the requested link set)
N (leave the link set in the deactivated state)
<RETURN> (current value)
The system shows the parameters.

Note: If you enter Y in Step 7, then the following caution message is displayed.

CAUTION: Sending of preventive TFP/TCP is enabled on a type A- or

E-link set.

16 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Delete link set

Use this procedure to delete a link set.

Identify the link set to be deleted by link set name. To verify the identity of the link set before
deleting it, use the DISPLA CCS LINKSE command to show the link set.

Constraints

The link set cannot be deleted if it is assigned to a route set master.

Deleting a link set disassociates the links from the link set. Links are still defined in the
database until they are deleted. The correct procedure for deleting a link set is the following:

• Remove the ordered route definition from the database if required.

• Delete the link sets from the route.
• Deactivate the link set.
• Delete the link set assignment.

The link set name can be reassigned to another group of links.

The link set cannot be deleted if links are assigned to it.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Link sets
Page 64

Data tables

When an existing link set is deleted, these data tables are changed:

• Adjacent node name (S27)

• Link set name (S28)
• Network (Y33)
• MTP link set (Y45)
• Combined link set
• MTP destination (Y52)
• Node name (Y55)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

Note: Delete the point code associated with the link set before performing this
procedure. Use the Delete PCMAP procedure to delete the point code associated with
the link set.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: DELETE CCS LINKSE

2 Prompt: LINKS*ET=
Enter: link set name or number
Enter the link set name of 1-8 alphanumeric characters to be deleted.
The system shows the parameters.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Link sets
Page 65

3 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display link set

Use this procedure to show the parameters of a link set and its assigned links.

Constraints

The SLS-to-link mapping assignments for a combined link set is displayed only if the link set is
provisioned as a combined link set.

Data tables

The system retrieves data from these data tables:

• Adjacent node name (S27)

• Link set name (S28)
• MTP link set (Y45)
• Combined link set
• Node name (Y55)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLA CCS LINKSE

2 Prompt: LSDISP=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
A link set name or number; go to Step 4.
ALL; continue.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Link sets
Page 66

3 Prompt: DIS*ORD=
Enter: [L or R]
L (show all link sets in ascending link set order - default)
R (show the link sets in restoration priority order)
<RETURN> (current value)

4 Prompt: FORM*AT=
Enter: [B or D]
B (show the brief format without link data)
D (show the detailed format with link data)
<RETURN> (current value)
The system shows the parameters.

5 To display another link set, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

6 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Activate/deactivate link set

Activating a link forces the link to go through the SS7 alignment procedure. Deactivating a link
removes it from active service.

Activate link set

Use this procedure to activate a link set.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: ACTIVA CCS LINKSE

2 Prompt: LINK*SET=
Enter: link set name or number

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Link sets
Page 67

Enter a link set name of 1-8 alphanumeric characters.

The following message appears when the link set is activated:
DISK ENTRY AND PROCESSOR(S) UPDATED

3 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

4 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Deactivate link set

Use this procedure to deactivate a link set.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: DEACTI CCS LINKSE

2 Prompt: LINK*SET=
Enter: link set name or number
Enter a link set name of 1-8 alphanumeric characters.
The following message appears when the link set is deactivated:
DISK ENTRY AND PROCESSOR(S) UPDATED

3 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

4 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Point code mapping

The PCMAP feature allows changing the DPC or OPC of call processing messages and sending
the changed messages to a different switch.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Link sets
Page 68

PCMAP is based on the contents of the SS7 point code mapping table (S80). This table contains
parameters that allow the call processing message point codes of one switch (both DPC and
OPC) to be mapped to a second switch's point code. The PCMAP feature supports movement of
trunk groups from one switch to another, while keeping the movement hidden from one of the
switches.

PCMAP performs these functions:

• Intercepts outgoing messages and maps them to the correct secondary destination
• Changes the DPC or OPC of call processing messages and forwards them to another switch

You can perform the following PCMAP procedures:

• Display PCMAP
• Assign PCMAP
• Change PCMAP
• Delete PCMAP

Display PCMAP
Use this procedure to show a single PCMAP entry, a range of entries, or all the entries from the
PCMAP entry table.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying a PCMAP entry.

Data tables

The PCMAP entries are in the SS7 point code mapping table (S80).

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLA CCS PCMAP

2 Prompt: ENTNO*RNG=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
A single entry number
A range of entry numbers
ALL

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Link sets
Page 69

The system shows the data for the entry number or numbers.

3 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

4 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Assign PCMAP
Use this procedure to assign entries in the database for PCMAP.

Constraints

No constraints apply to assigning a PCMAP entry.

Data tables

The PCMAP entries are assigned to the point code mapping table (S80).

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: ASSIGN CCS PCMAP

2 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number
Enter the logical network name of 1-16 characters or a number between the range of
0-31.
The default value is none.

3 Prompt: REP*DPC=
Enter: [Y or N]
If you enter Y in Step 3, the point code mapping function is performed; otherwise,
synthetic routing function is performed. The default value is No.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Link sets
Page 70

Note: Node should be adjacent and of link set type A or E.

4 Prompt: OLDPNT*COD=
Enter: old point code
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

5 Prompt: NEWPNT*COD=
Enter: new point code
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

6 Prompt: DENPNT*COD=
Enter: destination point code

7 Prompt: LOW*CIC=
Enter: [0-16383]
Enter the low circuit identification code. The default is the current value.

Note: The HIGH*CIC value should be greater than the LOW*CIC value.

8 Prompt: HIGH*CIC=
Enter: [0-16383]
Enter the high circuit identification code. The default is the current value.
The system shows the entry number assigned.

9 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Change PCMAP
Use this procedure to change a PCMAP entry.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Link sets
Page 71

Constraints

No constraints apply to changing a PCMAP entry.

Data tables

The PCMAP entries to be changed are retrieved from the point code mapping table (S80).

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE CCS PCMAP

2 Prompt: ENT*NO=
Enter: entry number

3 Prompt: NLOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number
The default value is none.

4 Prompt: CREP*DPC=
Enter: [Y or N]
If you enter Y in Step 4, the point code mapping function is performed; otherwise,
synthetic routing function is performed. The default retains current value.

5 Prompt: COLDPNT*COD=
Enter: change old point code
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

6 Prompt: CNEWPNT*COD=
Enter: new point code
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Link sets
Page 72

7 Prompt: CDESPNT*COD=
Enter: destination point code

8 Prompt: CLOW*CIC=
Enter: [0-16383]
Enter the low circuit identification code. The default is the current value.

Note: The HIGH*CIC value should be greater than the LOW*CIC value.

9 Prompt: CHIGH*CIC=
Enter: [0-16383]
Enter the high circuit identification code. The default is the current value.

10 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Delete PCMAP
Use this procedure to delete a PCMAP entry from the database.

Constraints

No constraints apply to deleting a PCMAP entry.

Data tables

The system deletes the PCMAP entry from the point code mapping table (S80).

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Link sets
Page 73

1 Prompt: >
Enter: DELETE CCS PCMAP

2 Prompt: ENT*NO=
Enter: single entry number
The system shows the entry number.

3 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

MOPC with super link set

The MOPC with super link set feature uses MOPC to increase the number of link sets that can
be connected to an end node. MOPCs can be assigned to several link sets connected to a single
end node.

In a 5070 SSG, the multiple link sets to a single end node are called a super link set. A super
link set may consist of 2 to 16 link sets. Each link set in the super link set has the same
adjacent point code. The sets differ in their link ID numbers and their MOPC values.

A maximum of eight different multiple point codes are allowed on an MPC 5070 SSG.

MOPC retrieves data from the MTP link set table (Y45).

MOPC performs these functions:

• Combines several 5070 SSG systems into one 5070 SSG with multiple addresses
• Combines the routing and global title functions into one 5070 SSG

These functions are transparent to the adjacent end nodes in the network.

The following constraints apply to the MOPC feature:

• There is no CHANGE CCS MPCFEA MMI to enable the MOPC feature; it is always enabled.
• Use ASSIGN CCS MPCPAR to assign an MOPC.
• Use CHANGE CCS MPCPAR to delete the assigned normal MOPC to a link set.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Link sets
Page 74

• Use CHANGE CCS MPCPAR with H option in the OPC prompt to modify MOPC link set to
normal link set.
• Use DELETE CCS LINKSE or DELETE CCS MPCPAR MMI to delete the MOPC link set.

You can perform the following MOPC procedures:

• Assign MPCPAR
• Change MPCPAR
• Display MPCPAR
• Delete MPCPAR
• Display super link set
• Audit MPC database

Assign MPCPAR
Use this procedure to assign an adjacent and/or originating point code for a specified link set,
thereby creating either an MOPC link set or a super link set.

Constraints

These constraints apply to assigning an adjacent and/or originating point code:

• A link set with the same adjacent point code should exist without any assigned MOPC.
• The link set should be an A type link set.
• There should be no duplication of the MOPC in the super link set. (For future use.)
• The MOPC that is same as another node in the network cannot be assigned.

Note: When a link set is created, the uniform parameters and the non-uniform parameters
should be automatically propagated from its master link set.

Data tables

The MOPC entries are in the MTP link set table (Y45).

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: ASSIGN CCS MPCPAR

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Link sets
Page 75

2 Prompt: LINKS*ET=
Enter: link set name or number
Enter a link set name of 1-8 alphanumeric characters.
If you enter an existing link set name or number, go to Step 4; otherwise, continue.

3 Prompt: ADJN*ODE=
Enter: adjacent node name
Enter adjacent node name of 1-11 characters.

4 Prompt: OPC*PROMPT=
Enter: originating point code
The system shows the values assigned to each field associated with the link set.

5 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Change MPCPAR
Use this procedure to change the MOPC of a link set.

Constraints

These constraints apply to changing multiple point code parameters:

• The MOPC should be an existing MOPC, or the MOPC to be created should not exceed the
maximum number of MOPC allowed.
• An MOPC cannot be defined as a destination point code.
• The adjacent point code to an unassigned value cannot be changed.
• A non-master link set cannot be changed to a normal link set if the adjacent point code of
the resultant normal link set is in a member super link set or in another normal link set.
(For future use.)
• If the link set is a non-master link set, the MOPC should not be in any other non-master
link set of the super link set.
• The MOPC that is same as another node in the network cannot be changed.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Link sets
Page 76

Data tables

The MOPC entries are in the MTP link set table (Y45).

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE CCS MPCPAR

2 Prompt: LINKS*ET=
Enter: link set name or number
Enter a link set name of 1-8 alphanumeric characters.
The system shows the originating point code values associated with the link set.

3 Prompt: ADJN*ODE=
Enter: adjacent node name
Enter adjacent node name of 1-11 characters.

4 Prompt: COPC*PROMPT=
Enter: originating point code
The system shows the changed originating point code values associated with the link
set.

5 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Link sets
Page 77

Display MPCPAR
Use this procedure to show the MOPCs associated with a link set in the MOPC data table.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying a MOPC entry.

Data tables

The MOPC entries are in the MTP link set table (Y45).

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLA CCS MPCPAR

2 Prompt: LS*CAT=
Enter: [S, M, or ALL]
S (Super link set); go to Step 3.
M (MOPC link set); go to Step 4.
ALL

3 Prompt: SUPERLS*NUM=
Enter: super link set number or ALL
The system displays the parameters for the category. Go to Step 5.

4 Prompt: LSDISP=
Enter: link set name, number or ALL
Enter a link set name of 1-8 alphanumeric characters.
The system displays the parameters for the category.

5 To display another link set category, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

6 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Delete MPCPAR
Use this procedure to delete a non-master link set or an MOPC link set.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Link sets
Page 78

Constraints

The following constraints apply to deleting a link set:

• A master/normal link set cannot be deleted.

• All the assigned links should be removed before the link set is deleted.
• A non-master link set or an MOPC link set can be deleted.
• The last non-master link set of a super link set can be deleted only if the super link set is
not contained in any route set master.
• When the last non-master link set is deleted, the super link set ID is automatically deleted
from the master link set.

Data tables

The MOPC entries are in the MTP link set table (Y45).

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DELETE CCS MPCPAR

2 Prompt: LINKS*ET=
Enter: link set name or number
The system shows the parameters and the following message:
WARNING: ALL ASSIGNED LINKS MUST FIRST BE REMOVED FROM THE LINK
SET

3 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display super link set

Use this procedure to display the parameters of a super link set and its assigned links.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Link sets
Page 79

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying a super link set entry.

Data tables

The MOPC entries are in the MTP link set table (Y45).

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLA CCS SUPERL

2 Prompt: SUPERLSNUM=
Enter: super link set number
ALL to display all super link sets
The default value is none.

3 Prompt: FORM*AT
Enter: [B or D]
B (display link set data without assigned links - default)
D (display lint set data with any assigned links)

4 To display another super link set number, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

5 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Audit MPC database

Use this procedure to audit the MPC database.

Constraints

No constraints apply to auditing the MPC database.

Data tables

The system displays the audit processing messages during audit execution and an execution
summary at the end of the audit. The audit is performed on the information from the link set
table (Y45).

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Link sets
Page 80

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: AUDIT CCS MPC

2 Verify that the following message appears:

SS7 MPC DATABASE AUDIT

INITIALIZING STATISTICS
AUDIT CCS MULTIPLE POINT CODE IS IN PROGRESS
CHECKING LINK SET TABLE

The system shows the statistical summary.

3 Verify that the following message appears:

COMMAND COMPLETED
END PROCEDURE

Special link set

This subsection describes the features of the special link set. The changes for this feature
cause the C link set to also be defined as a super link set.

You can perform the following special link set procedures:

• Assign CCS special link set

• Change CCS special link set
• Delete CCS special link set
• Display CCS special link set

Assign CCS special link set

Use this procedure to provision the attributes for creating a special C link set.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Link sets
Page 81

The attributes are link set name, link set type, logical network, VOPC, and request link set
activation status.

Constraints

No constraints apply to assigning a CCS special link set.

Data tables

The system receives the parameters showing the link data table (Y45).

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: ASSIGN CCS SLKS

2 Prompt: LSNAME=
Enter: link set name

3 Prompt: LSTYPE=
Enter: link set type C

4 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number
Enter the logical network name of 1-16 characters or a number between the range of
0-31.
The default value is none.

5 Prompt: VOPC*PROMPT=
Enter: originating point code

6 Prompt: REQ*ACT=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y, or N]
YES or Y (activate a link set request)
NO or N (do not activate a link set request)
Displays the status of the assigned link set.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Link sets
Page 82

7 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT<^A>

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute changes and exit to the command prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Change CCS special link set

User this procedure to change the parameters for a non master link set of a special C link set
name.

Constraints

No constraints apply to changing a CCS special link set.

Data tables

The system receives the parameters showing the link data table (Y45).

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE CCS SLKS

2 Prompt: LINKS*ET=
Enter: link set name or number
Displays the status of the current link set.

3 Prompt: NLSN*AME=
Enter: new link set name

4 Prompt: MINLINK=
Enter: minimum number of available links to consider route not restricted

5 Prompt: REQ*ACT=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y, or N]
YES or N (activate a link set request)
NO or N (do not activate link set request); go to Step 2.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Link sets
Page 83

6 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT<^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute changes and exit to the command prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Delete CCS special link set

Use this procedure to delete a non master C link set.

Constraints

No constraints apply to deleting a CCS special link set.

Data tables

The system receives the parameters showing the link data table (Y45)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DELETE CCS SLKS

2 Prompt: LINKS*ET=
Enter: link set name or number

3 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT<^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute changes and exit to the command prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display CCS special link set

Use this procedure to display the parameters of a non master C link set and its assigned links.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Link sets
Page 84

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying a CCS special link set.

Data tables

The system receives the parameters showing the link data table (Y45).

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLAY CCS SLKS

2 Prompt: LSDISP=
Enter: link set name or number

3 Prompt: FORM*AT=
Enter: [B or D]
B (shows the brief format without special link set data)
D (shows the detailed format with special link set data)

4 To display another link set, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

5 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 85

Processors and links

The following topics provide information about processors and links:

• Signaling links
• Processor provisioning
• Link span
• Links
• Low-speed E1 link parameters
• HSL parameters
• ATM over E1 high-speed links

For information on monitoring links, see Integrated link monitoring

For information on provisioning of IP links, M2PA, and M3UA, see the SS7-IP interworking
section.

Signaling links
Signaling links are the only elements in the SS7 database directly supported by a hardware
device. The system defines links in two places:

• In the SS7 configuration database - Links are equipped and assigned to a link set and a call
routing and link processor.
• In the hardware configuration database - Links are identified by the location of the call
routing and link processor that supports the link.

Add link
To add a new link, be sure that there is a call routing and link processor to support the link. If
necessary, install a processor card in the next available slot in the frame before starting these
procedures.

When the link is assigned to a link set, it can be tested. The link test verifies that the link
transmits and receives data without errors.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 86

Processors
This topic describes processor provisioning and is aimed at provisioning these processors that
support a link.

The following is the list of processors.

• AE1LK
• CEDLK
• CELK
• CTDLK
• HELK
• IPLK (described in the SS7-IP interworking section)
• IPUA (described in the SS7-IP interworking section)

In addition, the system uses these additional processors for various operations:

• Admin
• CCM
• DSS
• TMM
• TNC-x

Processors can be added to handle the signaling load expected from the signaling links. After
the hardware is installed, a processor must be equipped in the database before it can execute
software functions.

The DSS processor hosts all flexible routing service handlers. The TMM processor controls
administration functions when the LNP application is installed.

Processor provisioning
This topic describes the procedures to provision processors, by equipping them, unequipping
them, removing them, and restoring them. This topic describes provisioning for the processors
directly related to links and for the admin processor.

You can perform the following processor procedures:

• Equip processor
• Unequip processor

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 87

• Remove processor
• Restore processor
• Display processor configuration
• Display routing processor
• Display routing processor status

Equip processor
Use this procedure to equip the AE1LK, CEDLK, CELK, HELK, and CTDLK processors.

The AE1LK, CEDLK, CELK, HELK, and CTDLK processors provide these functions:

• MTP and SCCP routing functions

• MTP network management
• SCCP management
• Statistics gathering
• Link alignment
• Interface to ANPD
• Congestion flow control

The CEDLK and CTDLK processor are duplicated for reliability and must be equipped before any
audits can be performed.

Constraints

The processor must reside in a slot designated by the prompts in the command sequence.

Data tables

The system accesses the hardware database tables to add an AE1LK, CEDLK, CELK, HELK, and
CTDLK processor to the system. However, the system does not access the SS7 network data
tables.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 88

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE PROCES EQUIP

2 Prompt: SUBTYP*E=
Enter: [AE1LK, CEDLK, CELK, HELK, or CTDLK]

3 Prompt: SUNIT=
Enter: unit number of the processor being changed
0-127 (unit number for AE1LK and HELK)
0-119 (unit number for CELK)
0-99 (unit number for CEDLK)
0-63 (unit number for CTDLK and IPLK)
0-47 (unit number for IPUA)
If you enter AE1LK, CELK, HELK, IPLK, or IPUA in Step 2; go to Step 5.
If you enter CEDLK or CTDLK in Step 2; continue.

4 Prompt: PAIR=
Enter: [A or B]

5 Prompt: EQU*IP=
Enter: [UNEQD or EQD]
Enter EQD to equip the processor.

Note: The default value in the following prompts differs for each processors.

6 Prompt: BOARD*TYPE=
Enter: board type
Enter the board type that contains the device.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 89

Enter CP1 for AE1LK, HELK, CTDLK, CEDLK and CELK.

7 Prompt: FRNAME=
Enter: [ALF or LEF]

8 Prompt: FRNUM=
Enter: [0-0]
The default value is 0.

9 Prompt: VERT*ICAL=
Enter: [4, 10, 16, 22, 28, 34, 40, 46, 52, 58, or 64]
Enter the physical location of the device according to the number of vertical units from
the floor.

10 Prompt: HORIZ*ONTAL=
Enter: [1-21]
Enter the physical location of the device according to the slot number.
The system shows the configuration data entered for the processor.

11 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Unequip processor
Use this procedure to unequip the processor.

Constraints

No constraints apply to unequipping a processor.

Data tables

The system accesses hardware database tables to unequip a processor. However, the system
does not access SS7 network data tables.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 90

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE PROCES EQUIP

2 Prompt: SUBTYP*E=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
ADMIN; go to Step 4.
AE1LK; go to Step 3.
CCM; go to Step 4.
CEDLK; go to Step 3.
CELK; go to Step 3.
CTDLK; go to Step 3.
HELK; go to Step 3.
IPLK; go to Step 3.
IPUA; go to Step 3.

3 Prompt: SUNIT=
Enter: processor number
0-127 (unit number for AE1LK and HELK)
0-119 (unit number for CELK)
0-99 (unit number for CEDLK)
0-63 (unit number for CTDLK and IPLK)
0-47 (unit number for IPUA)
If you enter AE1LK, CELK, HELK, IPLK, or IPUA in Step 2, go to Step 5.
If you enter CEDLK or CTDLK in Step 2, continue.

4 Prompt: PAIR=
Enter: [A or B]

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 91

5 Prompt: EQU*IP=
Enter: [EQD or UNEQD]
Enter UNEQD to unequip the processor.
The system shows the configuration data entered for the processor.

6 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Remove processor
Use this procedure to take a processor out of service so it can be reset and reloaded with
software. These options are available when a processor is removed from service:

• BOOT to reset the processor, load the operating system, and leave the processor in a
usable state
• NOBOOT to reset the processor
• RESTART to reset the processor and restart existing programs

Constraints

The processor must be unequipped to be removed.

Data tables

The system accesses hardware database tables to remove a processor. However, the system
does not access SS7 network data tables.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 92

ALERT
ALERT! Do not remove the mate processor in a CCM, CTDLK, CEDLK, or TMM pair until the
COMM 88 IPR and the COMM 548 IPR (for 5070 SSG systems with flexible routing enabled) with
dataword 1=00FF% and dataword 2=0002% are received for the processor just restored. Failure
to wait for these IPRs may result in SS7 message loss. A CTDLK or TMM processor is not fully
restored until the system sends the SS7 “RECOVERY COMPLETED” IPR (COMM 88) and the
“FLEXIBLE ROUTING APPLICATION downloading status completed” IPR (COMM 548 with
dataword 1=00FF% and dataword 2=0002%) for 5070 SSG systems with flexible routing enabled.
The COMM 88 IPR indicates that the recovery process to rebuild and resynchronize the
database tables has started. The COMM 548 with dataword 1=00FF% and dataword 2=0002%
indicates that downloading of the flexible routing database tables has completed.

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: REMOVE PROCES

2 Prompt: PROC=
Enter: [ADMIN, ALARM, AE1LK, CCM, CTDLK, CEDLK, CELK, HELK, DSS, FLXMGR,
IPLK, IPUA, LTD, MTNC, SM, TERMLK, TMM, TNC]
If you enter ADMIN, CCM, FLXMGR, MTNC, SM, TMM, or TNC, go to Step 4.
If you enter AE1LK, CEDLK, CELK, HELK, CTDLK, DSS, IPLK, IPUA, LTD, or TERMLK, go to
Step 3.
If you enter ALARM, go to Step 5.

3 Prompt: DEVNO=
Enter: processor unit number
ALL or 0-127 (unit number for AE1LK and HELK)
ALL or 0-119 (unit number for CELK)
ALL or 0-99 (unit number for CEDLK)
ALL or 0-15 (unit number for DSS)
ALL or 0-63 (unit number for IPLK and CTDLK)
ALL or 0-47 (unit number for IPUA)
ALL or 0-13 (unit number for LTD)
ALL or 0-3 (unit number for TERMLK)
If you enter AE1LK, CELK, HELK, DSS, IPLK, IPUA, or TERMLK in Step 2; go to Step 5.
If you enter CTDLK, LTD, or CEDLK in Step 2; continue.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 93

4 Prompt: DEVID=
Enter: [A or B]

5 Prompt: REMOVE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
BOOT or B (select the boot option)
NOBOOT or N (select the no boot option)
RESTAR or R (select the restart option)

6 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

7 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Restore processor
Use this procedure to restore a specific processor to service. This command performs these
actions:

• Loads all resident programs into the processor

• Places all devices associated with the processor into the appropriate state
• Notifies all processors surrounding the processor being restored that it is available for
system use

The restore procedure places a processor back in service. These options are available when a
processor is restored to service:

• COLD to reload specific data tables in simplex mode

• WARM to leave all external memory intact (wherever applicable)
• IPL to reload all external memory in simplex mode

The processor LED remains red until all resident programs are loaded into the processor, and
then the light changes to green.

Constraints

No constraints apply to restoring a processor.

Data tables

The system accesses hardware database tables to restore a processor. However, the system
does not access SS7 network data tables.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 94

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: RESTORE PROCES

2 Prompt: PROC=
Enter: [ADMIN, ALARM, AE1LK, CCM, CTDLK, CELK, CEDLK, HELK, DSS, FLXMGR,
IPLK, IPUA, LTD, MTNC, SM, TERMLK, TMM, TNC]
If you enter ADMIN, CCM, FLXMGR, MTNC, TMM, or TNC; go to Step 4.
If you enter AE1LK, CEDLK, HELK, CTDLK, CELK, DSS, IPLK, IPUA, LTD, or TERMLK; go to
Step 3.
If you enter ALARM, go to Step 5.

3 Prompt: DEVNO=
Enter: processor unit number
ALL or 0-127 (unit number for AE1LK and HELK)
ALL or 0-119 (unit number for CELK)
ALL or 0-99 (unit number for CEDLK)
ALL or 0-15 (unit number for DSS)
ALL or 0-63 (unit number for IPLK and CTDLK)
ALL or 0-47 (unit number for IPUA)
ALL or 0-13 (unit number for LTD)
ALL or 0-3 (unit number for TERMLK)
If you enter AE1LK, CELK, HELK, DSS, IPLK, or IPUA in Step 2, go to Step 5.
If you enter CTDLK, LTD, or CEDLK in Step 2, continue.

4 Prompt: DEVID=
Enter: [A or B]

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 95

5 Prompt: RESTOR=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
COLD or C (cold restart option)
WARM or W (warm restart option)
IPL or I (IPL option)
The system performs the restore process and issues the COMM 88 IPR.

6 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

7 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Display processor configuration

Use this procedure to show the configuration for a selected processor.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying the processor configuration.

Data tables

The system reads hardware configuration and status tables to show the configuration of a
processor. However, the system does not read SS7 data tables.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLA PROCES EQUIP

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 96

2 Prompt: SUBTYP*E=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
ADMIN; go to Step 4.
AE1LK; go to Step 3.
CCM; go to Step 4.
CEDLK; go to Step 3.
CELK; go to Step 3.
CTDLK; go to Step 3.
HELK; go to Step 3.
DSS; go to Step 3.
FLXMGR; go to Step 4.
IPLK; go to Step 3.
IPUA; go to Step 3.

3 Prompt: UNIT=
Enter: processor unit number
ALL or 0-127 (unit number for AE1LK and HELK)
ALL or 0-119 (unit number for CELK)
ALL or 0-99 (unit number for CEDLK)
ALL or 0-15 (unit number for DSS)
ALL or 0-63 (unit number for IPLK and CTDLK)
ALL or 0-47 (unit number for IPUA)
This entry defines the device unit number.
If you enter AE1LK, CELK, HELK, DSS, IPLK, or IPUA in Step 2, the system displays the
configuration data; go to Step 5.
If you enter CEDLK or CTDLK in Step 2, continue.

4 Prompt: PAIR=
Enter: [A or B]
The system displays the configuration data.

5 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

6 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 97

Display routing processor

Use this procedure to show the routing processor identity. Use the routing processor-pair
number or link number to specify the routing processor.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying the routing processor.

Data tables

The system receives the parameters showing the link data table (Y34).

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLA CCS LINKRT

2 Prompt: PSU*BTYP=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
AE1LK (routing processor subtype); go to Step 3.
CEDLK (routing processor pair subtype); go to Step 4.
CTDLK (routing processor pair subtype); go to Step 5.
HELK (routing processor subtype); go to Step 6.
IPLK (routing processor subtype); go to Step 7.
CELK (routing processor pair subtype); go to Step 8.
ALL, the system displays the link table; go to Step 10.
<RETURN> (for link number prompt); go to Step 9.

3 Prompt: APRO*NUM=
Enter: [0-127]
Enter a single number, list of numbers, range of numbers, or ALL for all processor
numbers.
The system displays the link table; go to Step 10.

4 Prompt: PAIR*NUM=
Enter: [0-99]

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 98

Enter a single number, list of numbers, range of numbers, or ALL for all processor
numbers.
The system displays the link table; go to Step 10.

5 Prompt: CTDPRO*NUM=
Enter: [0-63]
Enter a single number, list of numbers, range of numbers, or ALL for all processor
numbers.
The system displays the link table; go to Step 10.

6 Prompt: HE*NUM=
Enter: [0-127]
Enter a single number, list of numbers, range of numbers, or ALL for all processor
numbers.
The system displays the link table; go to Step 10.

7 Prompt: IP*NUM=
Enter: [0-63]
Enter a single number, list of numbers, range of numbers, or ALL for all processor
numbers.
The system displays the link table; go to Step 10.

8 Prompt: CELK*PRNUM=
Enter: [0-119]
Enter a single number, list of numbers, range of numbers, or ALL for all processor
numbers.
The system displays the link table; go to Step 10.

9 Prompt: DL*INK=
Enter: [0-3071]
Enter a single number, list of numbers, range of numbers, or ALL for all link numbers.
The system displays the link table.

10 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

11 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 99

Display routing processor status

Use this procedure to display the service, blocked, inhibit and link status, for one or more
equipped SS7 links.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying the status routing processor.

Data tables

The following database tables are accessed when the status of a routing processor is displayed:

• MTP link set name (S28)

• Link data (Y34)
• MTP link set number (Y45)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: STATUS CCS LINKRT

2 Prompt: PSU*BTYP=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
AE1LK (routing processor subtype); go to Step 3.
CEDLK (routing processor pair subtype); go to Step 4.
CTDLK (routing processor pair subtype); go to Step 5.
HELK (routing processor subtype); go to Step 6.
IPLK (routing processor subtype); go to Step 7.
CELK (routing processor subtype); go to Step 8.
ALL; go to Step 10.
<RETURN>; go to Step 9.

3 Prompt: AE*NUM=
Enter: [0-127]
Enter a single number, list of numbers, range of numbers, or ALL for all processor
numbers.
Go to Step 10.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 100

4 Prompt: CEDPRO*NUM=
Enter: [0-99]
Enter a single number, list of numbers, range of numbers, or ALL for all processor
numbers.
Go to Step 10.

5 Prompt: CTDRO*NUM=
Enter: [0-63]
Enter a single number, list of numbers, range of numbers, or ALL for all processor
numbers.
Go to Step 10.

6 Prompt: HEPRO*NUM=
Enter: [0-127]
Enter a single number, list of numbers, range of numbers, or ALL for all processor
numbers.
Go to Step 10.

7 Prompt: IPRO*NUM=
Enter: [0-63]
Enter a single number, list of numbers, range of numbers, or ALL for all processor
numbers.
Go to Step 10.

8 Prompt: CEPRO*NUM=
Enter: [0-119]
Enter a single number, list of numbers, range of numbers, or ALL for all link numbers.
Go to Step 10.

9 Prompt: DL*INK=
Enter: [0-3071]
Enter a single number, list of numbers, range of numbers, or ALL for all link numbers.
The system displays the link table.

10 Prompt: REF*RESH=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y, N, R, or NR]
If you enter N, NO, or NR, the system displays the status table, go to Step 12;
otherwise, continue.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 101

11 Prompt: FREQ*UENC=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
5-255 (refresh frequency in seconds)
<RETURN> (5 seconds - the default value)
The system displays the status table.
The status table is refreshed for the frequency entered in Step 11.

12 To repeat the process, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

13 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Link span
Span performance monitoring detects error conditions on the span and reports IPRs and
alarms. Measurements are collected to facilitate network engineering and analysis of
equipment performance.

You can perform the following link span procedures:

• Change default link span parameters

• Display default link span parameters
• Change link span parameters
• Display link span parameters
• Remove link span
• Restore link span
• Display link span status
• Enable link span loopback
• Disable link span loopback

Change default link span parameters

Use this procedure to change link span equipage, characteristics, and link span error alarm
thresholds of the default link span parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to changing the default link span parameters.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 102

Data tables

When parameters associated with an existing link span are changed, these data tables are
changed:

• AE1LK processor entries (X64)

• CEDLK processor entries (X57)
• CELK processor entries (X60)
• CTDLK processor entries (X61)
• HELK processor entries (X58)
• Processor equipage data (M01)
• AE1LK span alarm threshold (MH35)
• CEDLK span alarm threshold (MA35)
• CELK span alarm threshold (MB35)
• CTDLK span alarm threshold (ME35)
• HELK span alarm threshold (MD35)
• AE1LK span equipage (MH45)
• CEDLK span equipage (MA45)
• CELK span equipage (MB45)
• CTDLK span equipage (ME45)
• HELK span equipage (MD45)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE MAINT LKSPDF

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 103

2 Prompt: SUBTYPE=
Enter: AE1LK, CEDLK, CELK, or HELK; go to E1 link span.
CTDLK; go to T1 link span.

E1 link span

3 Prompt: CRC4*-Monitoring=
Enter: cyclic redundancy check error monitoring
Y (enable the error monitoring)
N (disable the error monitoring - default); go to Step 5.

4 Prompt: EBIT*-Monitoring=
Enter: EBIT error monitoring
Y (enable the error monitoring)
N (disable the error monitoring - default)

5 Prompt: CAS*-Monitoring=
Enter: channel associated signaling alarm monitoring on time slot 16
Y (enable the error monitoring - default)
N (disable the error monitoring)
If you entered AE1LK in Step 2; continue, otherwise go to Step 7.

6 Prompt: SLOT16-FOR-SS7SIGNALING=
Enter: time slot 16 for SS7 signaling
Y (enable the error monitoring)
N (disable the error monitoring - default)

7 Prompt: AIS*16-Monitoring=
Enter: AIS 16 error alarm monitoring
Y (enable the error monitoring)
N (disable the error monitoring - default)

8 Prompt: LINE*CODE=
Enter: line code for the link span
AMI (alternate mark inversion)
HDB3 (high density bipolar three - default)
If you entered CEDLK or CELK in Step 2, go to Step 10; otherwise, continue.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 104

9 Prompt: TIMI*NG-SOURCE=
Enter: timing source for the link span
SYSTEM - default
LINE

10 Prompt: E1*IDLE-CODE=
Enter: [0-FF]
The idle channel codes for a link span. Default is 54.
The system shows the selection menu:

+------------------------MENU---------------------------+
| CHANGE VALUES FOR THE INDICATED ALARM TYPE |
|-------------------------------------------------------|
| 1 = AIS ERROR 2 = LOSS ERROR |
| 3 = FRAME LOSS ERROR 4 = LCA ERROR |
| 5 = AIS16 ERROR 6 = REMOTE ALARM ERROR |
| 7 = MULTIFRAME ERROR 8 = REMOTE MULTIFRAME ERROR |
| 9 = BI POLAR ERROR 10 = FRAME SLIP ERROR |
|11 = FAS ERROR 12 = CRC4 ERROR |
|13 = EBIT ERROR 14 = ES ERROR |
|15 = SES ERROR 16 = UAS ERROR |
+-------------------------------------------------------+
| 99 = EXIT AND UPDATE DISK IF ANY CHANGE MADE |
+-------------------------------------------------------+

11 Prompt: SELEC*TION=
Enter: (one of the choices mentioned in the menu)
1, 2, 4, or 5, go to Step 15.
3, 6, 7, or 8, go to Step 12.
9, 10, 11, 14, or 15, go to Step 23.
12, go to Step 34.
13, go to Step 35.
16, go to Step 36.
99, the system shows equipage, characteristics, and alarm thresholds for link
span. go to Step 37.

12 Prompt: CON*INUOUS-INTEGRATION-PERIOD=
Enter: the number of 100-millisecond scans allowed

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 105

13 Prompt: CONT*INUOUS-CLEAR-PERIOD=
Enter: the number of seconds to monitor for the clear threshold

14 Prompt: CONTI*NUOUS-CLEAR-THRESHOLD=
Enter: the maximum continuous response violations allowed during the clear period

15 Prompt: LIN*K-SPAN-REMOVAL=
Enter: [Y or N]
Enter Y if the 1-second alarm threshold is reached and the link span is to be removed.
If you entered 1 or 2 in Step 11, the system displays the selection menu; go to Step 11.
If you entered 6 or 8 in Step 11, go to Step 17.
Otherwise, continue.

16 Prompt: XM*IT-REMOTE-ALARM=
Enter: [Y or N]
Enter Y if a remote alarm is to be transmitted to the far-end switch when the OS
threshold is reached and when the link span is removed.
If you entered 4 or 5 in Step 11, the system displays the selection menu; go to Step 11.
If you entered 3, 7, 12, 13, or 16 in Step 11, go to Step 23.
Otherwise, continue.

17 Prompt: L*ONG-INTEGRATION-PERIOD=
Enter: the number of hours over which errors are accumulated

18 Prompt: LO*NG-MINOR-THRESHOLD=
Enter: the long period alarm minor threshold

19 Prompt: LON*G-MAJOR-THRESHOLD=
Enter: the long period alarm OS threshold

20 Prompt: LONG*OS-THRESHOLD=
Enter: the long period alarm OS threshold

21 Prompt: CL*EAR-LONG-PERIOD=
Enter: the number of hours to monitor for the clear threshold

22 Prompt: CLE*AR-LONG-THRESHOLD
Enter: the maximum long period violations allowed during the clear period

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 106

If you entered 3, 7, 9, 11, 12, or 13 in Step 11, enter the link span removal value and
the XMIT remote alarm value. The system displays the selection menu; go to Step 11.
If you entered 6 or 8 in Step 11, enter the link span removal value. The system displays
the selection menu; go to Step 11.
If you entered 14, 15, or 16 in Step 11, the system displays the selection menu; go to
Step 11.
Otherwise, continue.

23 Prompt: SH*ORT-INTEGRATION-PERIOD=
Enter: the number of seconds over which errors are accumulated
If you entered 10 in Step 11, go to Step 29; otherwise, continue.

24 Prompt: SHO*RT-MINOR-THRESHOLD=
Enter: the short period alarm minor threshold

25 Prompt: SHOR*T-MAJOR-THRESHOLD=
Enter: the short period alarm major threshold

26 Prompt: SHORT*OS-THRESHOLD=
Enter: the short period alarm OS threshold

27 Prompt: SHORT-*CLEAR-PERIOD=
Enter: the number of seconds to monitor for the clear threshold

28 Prompt: C*LEAR-SHORT-THRESHOLD=
Enter: the maximum short period violations allowed during the clear period
If you entered 3, 7, 9, 11, 12, or 13 in Step 11, enter the link span removal value and
the XMIT remote alarm value; go to Step 17.
If you entered 14, 15, or 16 in Step 11, go to Step 17.
Otherwise, continue.

29 Prompt: FRAME*-SLIP-SHORT-MINOR-THRESHOLD=
Enter: the period for frame slip error alarm minor threshold

30 Prompt: FRAM*E-SLIP-SHORT-MAJOR-THRESHOLD=
Enter: the period for frame slip error alarm major threshold

31 Prompt: FRA*ME-SLIP-SHORT-OS-THRESHOLD=
Enter: the period for frame slip error alarm OS threshold

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 107

32 Prompt: FR*AME-SLIP-SHORT-CLEAR-PERIOD=
Enter: the number of seconds to monitor for the clear threshold

33 Prompt: F*RAME-SLIP-SHORT-CLEAR-THRESHOLD=
Enter: the number of seconds to monitor for the clear error threshold
If you entered 10 in Step 11, enter the link span removal value and the XMIT remote
alarm value; go to Step 17; otherwise, continue.

34 Prompt: CRC*4-OS-ONE-SEC-THRESHOLD=
Enter: the number of CRC4 error counts per second
If you entered 12 in Step 11, go to Step 15; otherwise, continue.

35 Prompt: EB*IT-OS-ONE-SEC-THRESHOLD=
Enter: the number of EBIT error counts per second allowable
If you entered 13 in Step 11, go to Step 15; otherwise, continue.

36 Prompt: UAS*-OS-ONE-SEC-THRESHOLD=
Enter: the number of consecutive unavailable seconds allowable
If you have entered 16 in Step 11, go to Step 15; otherwise, continue.

37 Prompt: CONFIRM=
Enter: [Y, N, or M]
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes)
M (multiple update)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the command prompt)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 108

T1 link span

38 Prompt: LINE-*LENGTH=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
0 (0-99 ft)
1 (100-199 ft)
2 (200-299 ft)
3 (300-399 ft)
4 (400-499 ft)
5 (500-599 ft)
6 (600-655 ft)
<RETURN> (0 - the default value)

39 Prompt: T1*IDLE-CODE=
Enter: idle code
The system shows the following selection menu:

+------------------------MENU---------------------------+
| CHANGE VALUES FOR THE INDICATED ALARM TYPE |
|-------------------------------------------------------|
| 1 = RAI ERROR 2 = FRAME LOSS ERROR |
| 3 = BI-POLAR ERROR 4 = FRAME SLIP ERROR |
| 5 = CRC6 ERROR 6 = ES ERROR |
| 7 = SES ERROR 8 = UAS ERROR |
| 9 = DM ERROR 10 = CRC6 PER DM ERROR |
|11 = AIS ERROR 12 = LOS ERROR |
+-------------------------------------------------------+
| 99 = EXIT AND UPDATE DISK IF ANY CHANGE MADE |
+-------------------------------------------------------+

40 Prompt: SELEC*TION=
Enter: (one of the choices mentioned in the menu)
If you enter 1, 11, or 12, go to Step 61.
If you enter 2, go to Step 41.
If you enter 3, go to Step 43.
If you enter 4, go to Step 46.
If you enter 5, go to Step 48.
If you enter 6, go to Step 51.
If you enter 7, go to Step 53.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 109

If you enter 8, go to Step 55.

If you enter 9, go to Step 58.
If you enter 10, go to Step 60.
If you enter 99, the system shows equipage, characteristics, and alarm thresholds for a
defaulted link span. Go to Step 63.

41 Prompt: FRM*-LOSS-HOURLY-THRESHOLD=
Enter: number of frame losses allowed per hour

42 Prompt: FRM-*LOSS-DAILY-THRESHOLD=
Enter: number of frame losses allowed per day
The system displays the selection menu; go to Step 40.

43 Prompt: BI*POLAR-1-SECOND-THRESHOLD=
Enter: number of bipolar violations allowed per second

44 Prompt: BIPO*LAR-HOURLY-THRESHOLD=
Enter: number of bipolar violations allowed per hour

45 Prompt: BIP*OLAR-DAILY-THRESHOLD=
Enter: number of bipolar violations allowed per day
Go to Step 61.

46 Prompt: FRM-S*LIP-HOURLY-THRESHOLD=
Enter: number of frame slip events allowed per hour

47 Prompt: FRM-SL*IP-DAILY-THRESHOLD=
Enter: number of frame slip events allowed per day
The system displays the selection menu; go to Step 40.

48 Prompt: CRC6*-1-SECOND-THRESHOLD=
Enter: number of CRC6 errors allowed per second

49 Prompt: CRC6-*HOURLY-THRESHOLD=
Enter: number of CRC6 errors allowed per hour

50 Prompt: CRC6-D*AILY-THRESHOLD=
Enter: number of CRC6 errors allowed per day
Go to Step 61.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 110

51 Prompt: ES-H*OURLY-THRESHOLD=
Enter: number of errored seconds allowed per hour

52 Prompt: ES*-DAILY-THRESHOLD=
Enter: number of errored seconds allowed per day
The system displays the selection menu; go to Step 40.

53 Prompt: SES*-HOURLY-THRESHOLD=
Enter: number of severely errored seconds allowed per hour

54 Prompt: SE*-S-DAILY-THRESHOLD=
Enter: number of severely errored seconds allowed per day
The system displays the selection menu; go to Step 40.

55 Prompt: U*AS-1-SECOND-THRESHOLD=
Enter: number of consecutive unavailable seconds allowed per second

56 Prompt: UA*S-HOURLY-THRESHOLD=
Enter: number of unavailable seconds allowed per hour

57 Prompt: UAS-*DAILY-THRESHOLD=
Enter: number of consecutive unavailable seconds allowed per day
Go to Step 61.

58 Prompt: DM*-HOURLY-THRESHOLD=
Enter: number of degraded minutes allowed per hour

59 Prompt: DM-*DAILY-THRESHOLD=
Enter: number of degraded minutes allowed per day
The system displays the selection menu; go to Step 40.

60 Prompt: CRC6-E*RRORS-PER-DEGRADED-MINUTES=
Enter: number of CRC6 errors allowable within a minute before declaring a
degraded minute
The system displays the selection menu; go to Step 40.

61 Prompt: LINK-S*PAN-REMOVAL=
Enter: [Y or N]
If you enter 1, 11, or 12, the system displays the selection menu. Go to Step 40.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 111

If you enter 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 in Step 40, continue.

62 Prompt: XM*IT-REMOTE-ALARM=
Enter: [Y or N]
Enter Y if a remote alarm is to be transmitted to the far-end switch when the OS
threshold is reached and when the link is removed.
The system displays the selection menu; go to Step 40.

63 Prompt: CONF*IRM=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and re-prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the command prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display default link span parameters

Use this procedure to display the default link span parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying the default link span parameters.

Data tables

The system receives the parameters showing the default link span tables.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLAY MAINT LKSPDF

2 Prompt: SUBTYPE=
Enter: [AE1LK, CEDLK, CELK, CTDLK, or HELK]
The system shows the equipage, characteristics, and error alarm thresholds for a
default link processor subtype.

3 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 112

4 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Change link span parameters

Use this procedure to change link span equipage, characteristics, and link span error alarm
thresholds of a specified link subtype and link processor.

Constraints

Link span characteristics cannot be changed when a link span is in the ACTM/OOSA state. Use
the Remove link span procedure to place the link span in an OOSM state.

Data tables

When parameters associated with an existing link span are changed, these data tables are
changed:

• AE1LK processor entries (X64)

• CEDLK processor entries (X57)
• CELK processor entries (X60)
• CTDLK processor entries (X61)
• HELK processor entries (X58)
• Processor equipage data (M01)
• AE1LK span alarm threshold (MH35)
• CEDLK span alarm threshold (MA35)
• CELK span alarm threshold (MB35)
• CTDLK span alarm threshold (ME35)
• HELK span alarm threshold (MD35)
• AE1LK span equipage (MH45)
• CEDLK span equipage (MA45)
• CELK span equipage (MB45)
• CTDLK span equipage (ME45)
• HELK span equipage (MD45)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 113

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE MAINT LKSPAN

Note: Link span characteristics cannot be changed when a link span is in the
ACTM/OOSA state. Use the Remove link span procedure to place the link span in an
OOSM state.

2 Prompt: CHAN*GE-OPTION(A,B,C)=
Enter: [A, B, or C]
A (link span equipage and characteristics only)
B (link span error alarm threshold data only)
C (change both)

3 Prompt: SUBTYPE=
Enter: [AE1LK, CELK, CEDLK, or HELK]; go to E1 link span.
CTDLK; go to T1 link span.

E1 link span

4 Prompt: UNIT*NUMBER=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
0-127 (unit number for AE1LK and HELK)
0-119 (unit number for CELK)
0-99 (unit number for CEDLK)
0-63 (unit number for CTDLK)
If you entered AE1LK or HELK in Step 3, go to Step 6; otherwise, continue.

5 Prompt: LI*NK-SPAN-NUMBER=
Enter: [ALL or 0-3]

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 114

If the processor controlling the link span is unequipped, go to Step 7.

If the link span is ACTM/OOSA, go to the note before Step 2.
If you enter A or C in Step 2, and the link span is OOSM or unequipped, go to Step 8.
If you enter B in Step 2, and the link span is OOSM or unequipped, the system displays
the selection menu. Go to Step 18.

6 Prompt: LINKS*PAN-NUMBER=
Enter: [0-3]
If the processor controlling the link span is unequipped, go to Step 7.
If the link span is ACTM/OOSA, go to the note before Step 2.
If you enter A or C in Step 2, and the link span is OOSM or unequipped, go to Step 8.
If you enter B in Step 2, and the link span is OOSM or unequipped, the system displays
the selection menu. Go to Step 18.

Note: Step 7 is used to confirm whether you want to continue to configure the link span
when the controlling processor is unequipped.

7 Prompt: CONF*IRM=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (continue link span configuration)
N (do not continue link span configuration)
<CTRL+A> (do not continue link span configuration and exit to the command
prompt)
If you enter N, go to Step 2.
If you enter Y and A or C in Step 2, go to Step 8.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 115

If you enter Y and B in Step 2, the system shows the following selection menu:

+------------------------MENU---------------------------+
| 0 = APPLY DEFAULT SPAN ERROR ALARM VALUE FOR CHANGE |
+-------------------------------------------------------+
| CHANGE VALUES FOR THE INDICATED ALARM TYPE |
|-------------------------------------------------------|
| 1 = AIS ERROR 2 = LOS ERROR |
| 3 = FRAME LOSS ERROR 4 = LCA ERROR |
| 5 = AIS16 ERROR 6 = REMOTE ALARM ERROR |
| 7 = MULTIFRAME ERROR 8 = REMOTE MULTIFRAME ERROR |
| 9 = BI POLAR ERROR 10 = FRAME SLIP ERROR |
|11 = FAS ERROR 12 = CRC4 ERROR |
|13 = EBIT ERROR 14 = ES ERROR |
|15 = SES ERROR 16 = UAS ERROR |
+-------------------------------------------------------+
| 99 = EXIT AND UPDATE DISK IF ANY CHANGE MADE |
+-------------------------------------------------------+

Go to Step 18.

8 Prompt: EQUIPPED*STATUS=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
EQD (equip the link span); continue
UNEQD(unequip the link span); the system displays the parameters, go to
Step 44.

Note: Step 9 is used to set up the default link span data.

9 Prompt: CONF*IRM=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (use default data)
N (do not use default data)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute changes and exit to the command prompt)
If you enter N, continue.
If you enter Y and you entered A in Step 2, the system shows link span equipage and
characteristics. Go to Step 44.
If you enter Y and C in Step 2, the system shows link span equipage, characteristics,
and alarm thresholds. Go to Step 44.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 116

10 Prompt: CRC4*-Monitoring=
Enter: cyclic redundancy check error monitoring
Y (enable the error monitoring)
N (disable the error monitoring - default); go to Step 12.

11 Prompt: EBIT*-Monitoring=
Enter: EBIT error monitoring
Y (enable the error monitoring)
N (disable the error monitoring - default)

12 Prompt: CAS*-Monitoring=
Enter: channel associated signaling alarm monitoring on time slot 16
Y (enable the error monitoring - default)
N (disable the error monitoring)
If you entered AE1LK in Step 2; continue, otherwise go to Step 14.

13 Prompt: SLOT16-FOR-SS7SIGNALING=
Enter: time slot 16 for SS7 signaling

14 Prompt: AIS*16-Monitoring=
Enter: AIS 16 error alarm monitoring
Y (enable the error monitoring)
N (disable the error monitoring-default)

15 Prompt: LINE*CODE=
Enter: line code for the link span
AMI (alternate mark inversion)
HDB3 (high density bipolar three - default)
If you entered CEDLK or CELK in Step 2, go to Step 17; otherwise, continue.

16 Prompt: TIMI*NG-SOURCE=
Enter: timing source for the link span
SYSTEM -default
LINE

17 Prompt: E1*IDLE-CODE=
Enter: [0-FF]
The idle channel codes for a link span. Default is 54. Go to Step 44.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 117

18 Prompt: SELEC*TION=
Enter: (one of the choices mentioned in the menu)
0; the system displays the default span error value, go to Step 44.
1, 2, 4, or 5, go to Step 22.
3, 6, 7, or 8, go to Step 19.
9, 10, 11, 14, or 15, go to Step 30.
12, go to Step 41.
13, go to Step 42.
16, go to Step 43.
99, the system shows equipage, characteristics, and alarm thresholds for link
span. Go to Step 44.

19 Prompt: CON*TINUOUS-INTEGRATION-PERIOD=
Enter: the number of 100-millisecond scans allowed

20 Prompt: CONT*INUOUS-CLEAR-PERIOD=
Enter: the number of seconds to monitor for the clear threshold

21 Prompt: CONTI*NUOUS-CLEAR-THRESHOLD=
Enter: the maximum continuous response violations allowed

22 Prompt: LIN*K-SPAN-REMOVAL=
Enter: [Y or N]
Enter Y if the 1-second alarm threshold is reached and the link span is to be removed.
If you entered 1 or 2 in Step 18, the system displays the selection menu; go to Step 18.
If you entered 6 or 8 in Step 18, go to Step 24.
Otherwise, continue.

23 Prompt: XM*IT-REMOTE-ALARM=
Enter: [Y or N]
Enter Y if a remote alarm is to be transmitted to the far-end switch when the OS
threshold is reached and when the link is removed.
If you entered 4 or 5 in Step 18, the system displays the selection menu; go to Step 18.
If you entered 3, 7, 12, 13, or 16 in Step 18, go to Step 30.
Otherwise, continue.

24 Prompt: L*ONG-INTEGRATION-PERIOD=
Enter: the number of hours over which errors are accumulated

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 118

25 Prompt: LO*NG-MINOR-THRESHOLD=
Enter: the long period alarm minor threshold

26 Prompt: LON*G-MAJOR-THRESHOLD=
Enter: the long period alarm major threshold

27 Prompt: LONG*OS-THRESHOLD=
Enter: the long period alarm OS threshold

28 Prompt: CL*EAR-LONG-PERIOD=
Enter: the number of hours to monitor for the clear threshold

29 Prompt: CLE*AR-LONG-THRESHOLD=
Enter: the maximum long period violations allowed during the clear period
If you entered 3, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, or 13 in Step 18, enter the link span removal value
and the XMIT remote alarm value. The system displays the selection menu; go to
Step 18.
If you entered 6 or 8 in Step 18, enter the link span removal value. The system displays
the selection menu; go to Step 18.
If you entered 14, 15, or 16 in Step 18, the system displays the selection menu; go to
Step 18.
Otherwise, continue.

30 Prompt: SH*ORT-INTEGRATION-PERIOD=
Enter: the number of seconds over which errors are accumulated
If you entered 10 in Step 18, go to Step 36; otherwise, continue.

31 Prompt: SHO*RT-MINOR-THRESHOLD=
Enter: the short period alarm minor threshold

32 Prompt: SHOR*T-MAJOR-THRESHOLD=
Enter: the short period alarm major threshold

33 Prompt: SHORT*OS-THRESHOLD=
Enter: the short period alarm OS threshold

34 Prompt: SHORT-*CLEAR-PERIOD=
Enter: the number of seconds to monitor for the clear threshold

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 119

35 Prompt: C*LEAR-SHORT-THRESHOLD=
Enter: the maximum short period violations allowed during the clear period
If you entered 3, 7, 9, 11, 12, or 13 in Step 18, enter the link span removal value and
the XMIT remote alarm value, then go to Step 24.
If you entered 14, 15, or 16 in Step 18, go to Step 24.
Otherwise, continue.

36 Prompt: FRAME*-SLIP-SHORT-MINOR-THRESHOLD=
Enter: the period for frame slip error alarm minor threshold

37 Prompt: FRAM*E-SLIP-SHORT-MAJOR-THRESHOLD=
Enter: the period for frame slip error alarm major threshold

38 Prompt: FRA*ME-SLIP-SHORT-OS-THRESHOLD=
Enter: the period for frame slip error alarm OS threshold

39 Prompt: FR*AME-SLIP-SHORT-CLEAR-PERIOD=
Enter: the number of seconds to monitor for the clear threshold

40 Prompt: F*RAME-SLIP-SHORT-CLEAR-THRESHOLD=
Enter: the number of seconds to monitor for the clear error threshold
If you entered 10 in Step 18, enter the link span removal value and the XMIT remote
alarm value; go to Step 24.
Otherwise, continue.

41 Prompt: CRC*4-OS-ONE-SEC-THRESHOLD=
Enter: the number of CRC4 error counts per second
If you entered 12 in Step 18, go to Step 22; otherwise, continue.

42 Prompt: EB*IT-OS-ONE-SEC-THRESHOLD=
Enter: the number of EBIT error counts per second allowable
If you entered 13 in Step 18, go to Step 22; otherwise, continue.

43 Prompt: UAS*-OS-ONE-SEC-THRESHOLD=
Enter: the number of consecutive unavailable seconds allowable
If you entered 16 in Step 18, go to Step 22; otherwise, continue.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 120

44 Prompt: CONFIRM=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes)
M (multiple update)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the command).

T1 link span

45 Prompt: UNIT*NUMBER=
Enter: device unit number, range of unit numbers, or ALL

46 Prompt: LI*NK-SPAN-NUMBER=
Enter: relative link span to be accessed
If the processor controlling the link span is unequipped, go to Step 47.
If the link span is ACTM/OOSA, go to the note before Step 2.
If you enter A or C in Step 2, and the link span is OOSM or unequipped, go to Step 48.
If you enter B in Step 2, and the link span is OOSM or unequipped, the system displays
the selection menu. Go to Step 53.

Note: Step 47 is used to confirm whether you want to continue to configure the link
span when the controlling processor is unequipped.

47 Prompt: CONF*IRM=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (continue link span configuration)
N (do not continue link span configuration)
<CTRL+A> (do not continue link span configuration and exit to the command
prompt)
If you enter N, go to Step 2.
If you enter Y and A or C in Step 2, go to Step 48.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 121

If you enter Y and B in Step 2, the system shows the following selection menu:

+------------------------MENU---------------------------+
| 0 = APPLY DEFAULT SPAN ERROR ALARM VALUE FOR CHANGE |
+------------------------MENU---------------------------+
| CHANGE VALUES FOR THE INDICATED ALARM TYPE |
|-------------------------------------------------------|
| 1 = RAI ERROR 2 = FRAME LOSS ERROR |
| 3 = BI-POLAR ERROR 4 = FRAME SLIP ERROR |
| 5 = CRC6 ERROR 6 = ES ERROR |
| 7 = SES ERROR 8 = UAS ERROR |
| 9 = DM ERROR 10 = CRC6 PER DM ERROR |
|11 = AIS ERROR 12 = LOS ERROR |
+-------------------------------------------------------+
| 99 = EXIT AND UPDATE DISK IF ANY CHANGE MADE |
+-------------------------------------------------------+

Go to Step 53.

48 Prompt: EQUIPPED*STATUS=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
EQD (equip the link span); continue.
UNEQD (unequip the link span); go to Step 77.

Note: Step 49 is used to set up the default link span data.

49 Prompt: CONF*IRM=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (use default data)
N (do not use default data)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute changes and exit to the command prompt)
If you enter N, go to Step 50.
If you enter Y and A in Step 2, the system shows link span equipage and characteristics.
Go to Step 77.
If you enter Y and C in Step 2, the system shows link span equipage, characteristics and
alarm thresholds. Go to Step 77.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 122

50 Prompt: LINE-*LENGTH=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
0 (0-99 ft)
1 (100-199 ft)
2 (200-299 ft)
3 (300-399 ft)
4 (400-499 ft)
5 (500-599 ft)
6 (600-655 ft)
<RETURN> (0 - the default value)

51 Prompt: TIMI*NG-SOURCE=
Enter: system or line timing source

52 Prompt: T1*IDLE-CODE=
Enter: idle code
The system shows the link span equipage and characteristics; go to Step 77.

53 Prompt: SELEC*TION=
Enter: (one of the choices)
If you enter 0, the system displays the default span error value; go to Step 77.
If you enter 1, 11, or 12, go to Step 74.
If you enter 2, go to Step 54.
If you enter 3, go to Step 56.
If you enter 4, go to Step 59.
If you enter 5, go to Step 61.
If you enter 6, go to Step 64.
If you enter 7, go to Step 66.
If you enter 8, go to Step 68.
If you enter 9, go to Step 71.
If you enter 10, go to Step 73.
If you enter 99, the system shows equipage, characteristics, and alarm thresholds for
link span. Go to Step 77.

54 Prompt: FRM*-LOSS-HOURLY-THRESHOLD=
Enter: number of frame loss allowed per hour

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 123

55 Prompt: FRM-*LOSS-DAILY-THRESHOLD=
Enter: number of frame loss allowed per day
The system displays the selection menu; go to Step 53.

56 Prompt: BI*POLAR-1-SECOND-THRESHOLD=
Enter: number of bipolar violation allowed per second

57 Prompt: BIPO*LAR-HOURLY-THRESHOLD=
Enter: number of bipolar violation allowed per hour

58 Prompt: BIP*OLAR-DAILY-THRESHOLD=
Enter: number of bipolar violation allowed per day
Go to Step 75.

59 Prompt: FRM-S*LIP-HOURLY-THRESHOLD=
Enter: number of frame slip events allowed per hour

60 Prompt: FRM-SL*IP-DAILY-THRESHOLD=
Enter: number of frame slip events allowed per day
The system displays the selection menu; go to Step 53.

61 Prompt: CRC6*-1-SECOND-THRESHOLD=
Enter: number of CRC6 errors allowed per second

62 Prompt: CRC6-*HOURLY-THRESHOLD=
Enter: number of CRC6 errors allowed per hour

63 Prompt: CRC6-D*AILY-THRESHOLD=
Enter: number of CRC6 errors allowed per day
Go to Step 75.

64 Prompt: ES-H*OURLY-THRESHOLD=
Enter: number of errored seconds allowed per hour

65 Prompt: ES*-DAILY-THRESHOLD=
Enter: number of errored seconds allowed per day
The system displays the selection menu; go to Step 53.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 124

66 Prompt: SES*-HOURLY-THRESHOLD=
Enter: number of severely errored seconds allowed per hour

67 Prompt: SE*-S-DAILY-THRESHOLD=
Enter: number of severely errored seconds allowed per day
The system displays the selection menu; go to Step 53.

68 Prompt: U*AS-1-SECOND-THRESHOLD=
Enter: number of consecutive unavailable seconds allowed per second

69 Prompt: UA*S-HOURLY-THRESHOLD=
Enter: number of unavailable seconds allowed per hour

70 Prompt: UAS-*DAILY-THRESHOLD=
Enter: number of consecutive unavailable seconds allowed per day
Go to Step 75.

71 Prompt: DM*-HOURLY-THRESHOLD=
Enter: number of degraded minutes allowed per hour

72 Prompt: DM-*DAILY-THRESHOLD=
Enter: number of degraded minutes allowed per day
The system displays the selection menu; go to Step 53.

73 Prompt: CRC6-E*RRORS-PER-DEGRADED-MINUTES=
Enter: number of CRC6 errors allowed within a minute before declaring a degraded
minute
The system displays the selection menu; go to Step 53.

74 Prompt: LINK*-SPAN-REMOVAL=
Enter: [Y or N]
Enter Y if the link span is to be removed when an alarm condition is present.
The system displays the selection menu; go to Step 53.

75 Prompt: LINK-S*PAN-REMOVAL=
Enter: [Y or N]
Enter Y if 1-second alarm threshold is reached and the link span is to be removed.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 125

76 Prompt: XM*IT-REMOTE-ALARM=
Enter: [Y or N]
Enter Y if a remote alarm is to be transmitted to the far-end switch when the OS
threshold is reached and when the link is removed.
The system displays the selection menu; go to Step 53.

77 Prompt: CONF*IRM=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes)
M (multiple update)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the command prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display link span parameters

Use this procedure to show the parameters of a link span and its error alarm thresholds.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying the link span parameters.

Data tables

The system receives the parameters showing the default link span tables.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLAY MAINT LKSPAN

2 Prompt: DISP*LAY-OPTION(A,B)=
Enter: [A or B]
A (display link span equipage and characteristics)
B (display link span equipage, characteristics, and link span error alarm data)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 126

3 Prompt: SUBTYPE=
Enter: [AE1LK, CEDLK, CELK, CTDLK, or HELK]

4 Prompt: UNIT*NUMBER=
Enter: device unit number
ALL or 0-127 (unit number for AE1LK and HELK)
ALL or 0-119 (unit number for CELK)
ALL or 0-99 (unit number for CEDLK)
ALL or 0-63 (unit number for CTDLK)

5 Prompt: LI*NK-SPAN-NUMBER=
Enter: relative link span to be accessed
The system shows the link span parameters.

6 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

7 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Remove link span

Use this procedure to place in-service link spans out of service.

Constraints

No constraints apply to removing a link span.

Data tables

The system accesses hardware database tables to remove a link span. However, the system
does not access SS7 network data tables.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 127

1 Prompt: >
Enter: REMOVE LKSPAN

2 Prompt: SUB*TYPE=
Enter: [AE1LK, CEDLK, CELK, CTDLK, or HELK]

3 Prompt: UNIT=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
ALL or 0-127 (unit number for AE1LK and HELK); go to Step 6.
ALL or 0-119 (unit number for CELK)
ALL or 0-99 (unit number for CEDLK)
ALL or 0-63 (unit number for CTDLK)

4 Prompt: LI*NK-SPAN=
Enter: [ALL or 0-3]
The system performs the remove link span process.

Note: The prompt in Step 5 is displayed if the span has any active links.

5 Prompt: CONT*INUE=
Enter: [YES, Y, NO, or N]
If you enter N or NO, go to Step 7; otherwise, continue

6 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

7 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Restore link span

Use this procedure to restore a link span.

Constraints

No constraints apply to restoring a link span.

Data tables

The system accesses hardware database tables to restore a link span. However, the system
does not access SS7 network data tables.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 128

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: RESTORE LKSPAN

2 Prompt: SUB*TYPE=
Enter: [AE1LK, CEDLK, CELK, CTDLK, or HELK]

3 Prompt: UNIT=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
ALL or 0-127 (unit number for AE1LK and HELK); go to Step 5.
ALL or 0-119 (unit number for CELK)
ALL or 0-99 (unit number for CEDLK)
ALL or 0-63 (unit number for CTDLK)

4 Prompt: LI*NK-SPAN=
Enter: [ALL or 0-3]
The system performs the restore link span process.

5 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

6 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Display link span status

Use this procedure to display the status of a link span.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying the status of a link span.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 129

Data tables

The following database tables are accessed when the status of a link span is checked:

• AE1LK processor entries (X64)

• CEDLK processor entries (X57)
• CELK processor entries (X60)
• CTDLK processor entries (X61)
• HELK processor entries (X58)
• Processor equipage data (M01)
• AE1LK span alarm threshold (MH35)
• CEDLK span alarm threshold (MA35)
• CELK span alarm threshold (MB35)
• CTDLK span alarm threshold (ME35)
• HELK span alarm threshold (MD35)
• AE1LK span equipage (MH45)
• CEDLK span equipage (MA45)
• CELK span equipage (MB45)
• CTDLK span equipage (ME45)
• HELK span equipage (MD45)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: STATUS LKSPAN

2 Prompt: STAT*US-OPTION=
Enter: [A, B, or C]
A (span configuration status)
B (out-of-service spans only)
C (span error alarm information - default)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 130

3 Prompt: SUB*TYPE=
Enter: [AE1LK, CEDLK, CELK, CTDLK, or HELK]
If you enter B in Step 2, go to Step 7; otherwise, continue.

4 Prompt: UNIT*-NUMBER=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
ALL or 0-127 (unit number for AE1LK and HELK)
ALL or 0-119 (unit number for CELK)
ALL or 0-99 (unit number for CEDLK)
ALL or 0-63 (unit number for CTDLK)

5 Prompt: SPAN=
Enter: the span number

Note: The prompt in Step 6 is displayed only for CTDLK processor subtype.

6 Prompt: STANDBY*-PROC-STAT=
Enter: link span error alarms data for standby processor

7 Prompt: MON*ITOR=
Enter: [Y, YES, N, or NO]
Y or YES (status report to be monitored periodically); continue.
N or NO (status report not to be monitored periodically - default); the system
displays the status of the link span; go to Step 9.

8 Prompt: FREQ*UENCY=
Enter: monitor frequency in seconds
The system displays the status of the link span.

9 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

10 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Enable link span loopback

Use this procedure to place a link span in local or remote loopback mode for error diagnostics
or error isolation.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 131

Constraints

Loopback requires the link span to be manually out of service.

Data tables

The system accesses hardware database tables to enable a link span loopback.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: ENABLE LKSPAN LOOPBK

2 Prompt: SU*BTYPE=
Enter: CTDLK

3 Prompt: U*NIT=
Enter: [0-63]

4 Prompt: LI*NK-SPAN=
Enter: [ALL or 0-3]

5 Prompt: LOOPBK*TYPE=
Enter: setting link span to loopback state
The system shows the enabled link span parameters.

6 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

7 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 132

Disable link span loopback

Use this procedure to remove a link span from loopback mode.

Data tables

The system accesses hardware database tables to disable a link span loopback.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISABLE LKSPAN LOOPBK

2 Prompt: SU*BTYPE=
Enter: CTDLK

3 Prompt: U*NIT=
Enter: [0-63]

4 Prompt: LI*NK-SPAN=
Enter: [ALL or 0-3]
The system shows the disabled link span parameters.

5 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

6 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Links
Each link associated with an equipped call routing and link processor is assigned to a link set so
that the link can carry traffic.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 133

Enhanced traffic distribution

The enhanced traffic distribution feature provides the ability to explicitly map SLS values to
specific links within a link set or a combined link set. It provides the following functions:

• The ability to route traffic based on SLS-to-link mapping assignments.

• The ability to reroute traffic for outgoing links that are associated with provisioned
SLS-to-link mapping assignments when these links become inactive.
• Only 16 of the 128 possible values can be assigned while mapping SLS values to links for a
linkset, and only 32 of the 128 possible SLS values can be assigned for a combined link set.

SLS rotation
The SLS rotation is done prior to transmission on all the link sets except C links. The SLS
rotation is used for load-sharing methods that use the least-significant bit for selecting a link
set from a combined link set. The SLS rotation is also used to ensure that the information used
to load-share at any subsequent 5070 SSG is independent of the information used at the
previous 5070 SSG.

If the 5070 SSG uses a link set for routing and the SLS value is mapped to a link set SLS-to-link
assignment and the SLS rotation is OFF, then the 5070 SSG routes the traffic to that link as long
as the link is active. If the SLS rotation is ON, then the SLS value is rotated and the 5070 SSG
routes the traffic to the link to which the rotated SLS value was assigned. Only the four
least-significant bits of the 8-bit SLS code are rotated. Shifting the four least-significant bits of
the SLS code one position to the right and placing the first bit into the fourth bit position does
the rotation.

You can perform the following link procedures:

• Assign link
• Change link
• Display link
• Delete link
• Activate link
• Deactivate link
• Display span link
• Display CCS link status
• Display CCS link set status
• Display CCS destination status

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 134

Assign link
Use this procedure to create a signaling link and assign it to a link set. This procedure
provisions these parameters:

• SLC
• Routing processor pair
• Activation status

The system updates the link set parameters such as the number of links in the link set and the
number of active links required to stay unrestricted when the command is executed.

Constraints

These constraints apply to assigning a link:

• When a new link is added to an A, B, D, or E link set, the link set data must be updated to
increase the number of active links required to stay unrestricted. This parameter is
determined according to these restrictions:
– The number of active links must equal half the total number of links in a link set
containing an even number of links.
– The number of active links must equal half the total number of links plus one in a link
set containing an odd number of links.
• When a new link is added to a C link set, the number of active links required to stay
unrestricted is set to zero.
• The call routing and link processor supporting the new link should be equipped before
adding a link to a link set.
• The link set must be defined before adding links.
• Links in each link set should be distributed between two or more backplanes and across
ethernet switches. This configuration produces the most optimal distribution to handle
failure cases and prevents a backplane failure from failing more than half the links in a
link set.
• Links in multiple-link link sets should each be assigned to a different processor. If the
number of processors in the system is insufficient to support this rule, links must be
distributed such that no more than half the links in a link set are assigned to a single card.
Otherwise, a single card failure or SPLIT SYSTEM command may not leave a sufficient
number of links in service to support the traffic on that link set.
• For multiple-link link sets, half the links in each link set must be assigned to a split
processor and the other half to either a combine or activate processor. This configuration
splits the links in each link set evenly between the active and inactive sides during the
upgrade.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 135

Data tables

When a new link set is added to the database, these data tables are changed:

• Link set name (S28)

• Link data (Y34)
• MTP link set (Y45)
• Combined link set (Y48)
• Route set master (Y51)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: ASSIGN CCS LINK

2 Prompt: LS*NAMNUM=
Enter: the linkset name or number
The system shows the links in the link set.

3 Prompt: SLC=
Enter: [0-15]

4 Prompt: L*INK=
Enter: [0-3071]
If the issued link set is not a combined one, go to Step 6; otherwise, continue.

5 Prompt: CSLS=
Enter: [0-31]

6 Prompt: PSLS=
Enter: [0-15]

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 136

7 Prompt: RPSUB=
Enter: [AE1LK, CEDLK, CELK, CTDLK, HELK, or IPLK]
If you enter AE1LK, CELK, HELK, or IPLK, go to Step 9; otherwise, continue.

8 Prompt: PA*IR=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
0-99 (unit number for CEDLK)
0-63 (unit number for CTDLK)
Go to Step 10.

9 Prompt: RPNUM=
Enter: routing processor number
0-127 (unit number for AE1LK and HELK)
0-119 (unit number for CELK)
0-63 (unit number for IPLK)
If you enter AE1LK, HELK, or IPLK in Step 7, go to Step 12; otherwise, continue.

10 Prompt: SPAN*NUM=
Enter: [0-3]

11 Prompt: CHAN*NELNUM=
Enter: [1-31]

12 Prompt: ACT*IVATE=
Enter: [Y or N]
Y (request link to be activated)
N (request link to be deactivated)
The system shows the parameters of a assigned link.

13 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 137

Change link
Use this procedure to change the link parameters of an SLC, change routing processor-pair
parameters, request a change in activation status, and move a link from one link set to
another. Moving a link from one set to another using the CHANGE CCS LINK command preserves
previously set link parameters. Specify the link being changed by using the link set name or
number, or make the change using the SLC and link number.

Constraints

These constraints apply to changing a link:

• When the number of links is changed in an A, B, D, or E link set, the link set data must be
updated to increase the number of active links required to stay unrestricted. This
parameter is determined according to these restrictions:
– The number of active links must equal half the total number of links in a link set
containing an even number of links.
– The number of active links must equal half the total number of links plus one in a link
set containing an odd number of links.
• When a new link is changed in a C link set, the number of active links required to stay
unrestricted is set to zero.
• The link set must be defined before changing links.

Data tables

The system changes the SS7 link data table (ATY34) when a link is changed in the database.

When an existing link is changed, these data tables are changed:

• Link set name (S28)

• SS7 link data (Y34)
• MTP link set (Y45)
• Combined link set (Y48)
• Route set master (Y51)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 138

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE CCS LINK

2 Prompt: LS*NAMNUM=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
<RETURN>; go to Step 3.
A link set name or number; the system shows the links in the link set; go to
Step 4.

3 Prompt: L*INK=
Enter: [0-3071]
The system shows the links in the link set.

4 Prompt: SLC=
Enter: [0-15]

5 Prompt: CS*LC=
Enter: [0-15]

6 Prompt: SLSM*ENU=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1 (assign a new SLS to a link); go to Step 12.
2 (change an SLS for a link to another SLS); go to Step 9.
3 (delete an SLS from a link); go to Step 12.
<RETURN>; go to Step 13.

Note: The prompts Step 7 and Step 8 are displayed only if you enter a combined link set
in the change option in Step 6.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 139

7 Prompt: OLDCOMBSLS=
Enter: old signaling service code

8 Prompt: NEWCOMBSLS=
Enter: new signaling link service code

9 Prompt: OLDSLS=
Enter: [0-15]
Enter a single number, list of numbers, or range of numbers.
The system displays an old signaling link service code; go to Step 10.
<RETURN>; go to Step 13.

10 Prompt: NEWSLS=
Enter: new signaling link service code
Go to Step 13.

Note: Step 11 is displayed only if you enter a combined link set in the assign or delete
option in Step 6.

11 Prompt: COMBSLS=
Enter: [0-31]

12 Prompt: SLS=
Enter: [0-31]

13 Prompt: CRPSUB=
Enter: [AE1LK, CELK, HELK, CEDLK, CTDLK, or IPLK]
This entry defines the new routing processor subtype.
If you enter AE1LK, CELK, HELK, or IPLK, go to Step 15; otherwise, continue.

14 Prompt: CPA*IR=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
0-99 (unit number for CEDLK)
0-63 (unit number for CTDLK)
Go to Step 16.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 140

15 Prompt: CRPNUM=
Enter: new routing processor number
0-127 (unit number for AE1LK and HELK)
0-119 (unit number for CELK)
0-63 (unit number for IPLK)
If you enter AE1LK, HELK, or IPLK in Step 13, go to Step 18.
Otherwise, continue.

16 Prompt: CSPAN*NUM=
Enter: span number

17 Prompt: CCHAN*NELNUM=
Enter: new channel number

18 Prompt: CAC*TIVATE=
Enter: [Y or N]
Y (activate the link)
N (do not activate the link)
The system shows the links in the link set, including changed information. An asterisk
(*) appears by the SLC for the changed link.

19 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display link
Use this procedure to show the parameters for a link.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying a link.

Data tables

The system retrieves link parameters from these data tables:

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 141

• Link set name (S28)

• Link data (Y34)
• MTP link set (Y45)
• Combined link set (Y48)
• Route set master (Y51)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLA CCS LINK

2 Prompt: LSD*ISP=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
The link set name or number; go to Step 3.
ALL; the system shows the link sets; go to Step 5.
<RETURN>; go to Step 4.

3 Prompt: DPS*LC=
Enter: SLC assigned to the link or ALL
The system shows the requested link sets and associated SLCs; go to Step 5.

4 Prompt: DL*INK=
Enter: [0-3071]
Enter the link set number.
The system shows the requested link sets and associated SLCs.

5 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

6 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Delete link
Use this procedure to delete one link or all links from a link set. The system updates the
parameters of the link set to change the number of links in a link set and the number of links
required to remain unrestricted.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 142

Constraints

These constraints apply to deleting a link:

• When a link is deleted from an A, B, D, or E link set, the number of active links required to
stay unrestricted must be updated for the link set according to these restrictions:
– Half of the total number of links in a link set containing an even number of links
– Half of the total number of links plus one in a link set containing an odd number of
links
• When a new link is deleted from a C link set, the number of active links required to stay
unrestricted is set to zero.
• The number of links in a link set field in the database for a given link set is updated with
the total number of links when a link is deleted from the link set.
• When a link selected for deletion is a M2PA IP link (assigned to IPLK processor), the
corresponding entry in IPCONN (ATY1A) is deleted.

Data tables

When an existing link is deleted, these data tables are changed:

• Link set name (S28)

• Link data (Y34)
• MTP link set (Y45)
• Combined link set (Y48)
• Route set master (Y51)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not use the DELETE CCS LINK command to move a link from one link set to another
because previously set link parameters will be lost and the link will assume default
parameters. Use the CHANGE CCS LINK command instead.

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 143

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

Note: An in-service or active link cannot be deleted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: DELETE CCS LINK

2 Prompt: LS*NAMNUM=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
The link set name or number; go to Step 4.
<RETURN>; continue.

3 Prompt: L*INK=
Enter: [0-3071]
The system shows the links in the link set; go to Step 5.

4 Prompt: DSL*C=
Enter: signaling link code
SLC assigned to the link
ALL
The system shows the parameters.

5 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Activate link
Use this procedure to bring the link online by initiating the SS7 alignment procedure.

Constraints

The link must be configured but deactivated.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 144

Data tables

The system sends link status to these data tables:

• Link data (Y34)

• MTP link set (Y45)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: ACTIVA CCS LINK

2 Prompt: LINK=
Enter: [0-3071]
Enter the link ID.

3 Prompt: DIST*RIB=
Enter: YES
This entry defines whether or not to distribute link parameters.
The following message appears when the link set is activated:
DISK ENTRY AND PROCESSOR(S) UPDATED

4 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

5 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Deactivate link
Use this procedure to remove the link from active service.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 145

Constraints

The link must be configured.

Data tables

The system sends link status to these data tables:

• Link data (Y34)

• MTP link set (Y45)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: DEACTI CCS LINK

2 Prompt: LINK=
Enter: [0-3071]
Enter the link ID.
The following message appears when the link set is deactivated:
DISK ENTRY AND PROCESSOR(S) UPDATED

3 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

4 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 146

Display span link

Use this procedure to display the routing link identity and channel number from the CCS link
table (Y34).

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying span links.

Data tables

The system retrieves the span link information from the following database tables:

• AE1LK processor entries (X64)

• CEDLK processor entries (X57)
• CELK processor entries (X60)
• Processor equipage data (M01)
• CTDLK processor entries (X61)
• HELK processor entries (X58)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLAY CCS SPLINK

2 Prompt: PROCS*UB=
Enter: [AE1LK, CEDLK, CELK, HELK, or CTDLK]
If you enter AE1LK; go to Step 3.
If you enter CEDLK; go to Step 4.
If you enter CELK; go to Step 5.
If you enter CTDLK; go to Step 6.
If you enter HELK; go to Step 7.

3 Prompt: AE1LK*RPNUM=
Enter: [0-127]
Go to Step 8.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 147

4 Prompt: CEDPROC*UM=
Enter: [0-99]
Go to Step 8.

5 Prompt: CELK*RPNUM=
Enter: [0-119]
Go to Step 8.

6 Prompt: CTPROC*NUM=
Enter: [0-63]
Go to Step 8.

7 Prompt: HEPROC*UM=
Enter: [0-127]
Go to Step 8.

8 Prompt: SPA*N=
Enter: [0-3]
The system shows the routing link identity and channel number.

9 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

10 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Display CCS link status

Use this procedure to display the service, blocked, inhibit, and link status for one or more
equipped links.

Constraints

The links must be configured.

Data tables

The system retrieves data from (Y45) table.

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: STATUS CCS LINK

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 148

2 Prompt: L*INK=
Enter: [0-3071]
Enter a single number, list of number, or ALL for all link numbers.

3 Prompt: REF*RESH=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y, N, R, or NR]
If you enter N, NO, or NR, go to Step 5; otherwise, continue.
The default is NO.

4 Prompt: FREQ*UENC=
Enter: [5-255]
The default is 5 seconds.

5 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

6 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Display CCS link set status

Use this procedure to display the service and blocked status of one or more link sets with the
status of the subordinate links.

Constraints

The links and the link sets must be configured.

Data tables

The system retrieves data from the MTP link set number (Y45) table.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: STATUS CCS LINKSE

2 Prompt: LINKS*ET=
Enter: link set name or number
Enter a single number, list of number, or ALL for all link numbers.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 149

3 Prompt: REF*RESH=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y, N, R, or NR]
If you enter N, NO, or NR, go to Step 5; otherwise, continue.
The default is NO.

4 Prompt: FREQ*UENC=
Enter: [5-255]
The default is 5 seconds.

5 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

6 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Display CCS destination status

Use this procedure to display the current status for one or more specified destinations and link
sets and the links used for routing to them.

Constraints

The links and the link sets must be configured.

Data tables

The system retrieves data from the MTP link set number (Y45) table.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: STATUS CCS DEST

2 Prompt: NODE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
A node name; go to Step 5.
<RETURN>; continue.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 150

3 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
Logical network number or ALL; go to Step 5.
Logical network name; continue.

4 Prompt: PNT*COD=
Enter: point code
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for a
lognet.
The default value is none.
The system shows the parameters associated with the local node.

5 Prompt: DEST*TYPE=
Enter: [SM, DM, or ALL]
SM (static members)
DM (dynamic members)
ALL
The default value is ALL.

6 Prompt: ACT*IVE=
Enter: [Y, YES, N, or NO]
The default value is NO.

7 Prompt: FOR*MAT=
Enter: [B, S, or D]
B (Brief display)
S (Standard display - default)
D (Detailed display)

8 Prompt: REF*RESH=
Enter: [Y, YES, N, NO, R, or NR]
If you enter N, NO, or NR, go to Step 10; otherwise, continue.
The default value is NO.

9 Prompt: FREQ*UENC=
Enter: [5-255]
The default is 5 seconds.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 151

10 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

11 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Low-speed E1 link parameters

Physical link parameters define the physical operation of the LSL. Generally, physical
parameters are established when the initial database is created; they are seldom changed.
When a new LSL is added, the physical parameters assigned to an LSL are usually copied for the
new LSL.

However, special circumstances may require that some parameters be changed in operation.
The physical LSL parameters fall into five groups:

• Congestion level - defines congestion levels for messages being received and transmitted
• Timer - defines 5070 SSG MTP level 2 timer parameters
• Marginal threshold - defines hourly thresholds used to determine the marginal
performance of the LSL
• Common link - defines error-correction method, error-rate monitor, and octet threshold

Special system operation or a specific upgrade may require changes to one of these groups:

• Group 1: Congestion level parameters

• Group 2: Timer parameters
• Group 3: Traffic measurement marginal threshold parameters
• Group 4: Common link parameters

You can perform the following E1 link parameter procedures:

• Change low-speed E1 link parameters

• Copy low-speed E1 link parameters
• Display low-speed E1 link parameters

Group 1: Congestion level parameters

Congestion level parameters define link congestion thresholds for RX and TX messages.
Congestion levels are measured in terms of buffers, where one buffer stores one message.

Received message congestion thresholds determine when a node sends link busy status
messages to an adjacent node and discards received messages. Transmitted message

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 152

congestion thresholds determine when a node invokes signaling traffic management procedure
to divert traffic from a congested link.

Note: For transmitted messages, separate congestion thresholds exist for each message
priority (L1, L2, and L3). There is an onset threshold, an abatement threshold, and a discard
threshold for each priority level.

Congestion level
attribute Identifies
RXONS Number of message buffers that contain received and untransmitted
messages - When the parameter exceeds the threshold, the node sends
retransmit messages.
RXABA Number of message buffers that contain received and untransmitted
messages - When the parameter falls below the threshold, the node resumes
normal operation.
RXDISC Number of message buffers containing received and untransmitted
messages - When the parameter exceeds the threshold, the node discards
further messages.
TXL1ONS, TXL2ONS, Number of message buffers containing received and untransmitted messages
TXL3ONS of a specific priority level (1, 2, or 3) - When the parameter exceeds the
threshold, the system is congested; the node instructs other nodes to send
lower priority messages away from the concerned destination.
TXL1ABA, TXL2ABA, Number of message buffers containing received and untransmitted messages
TXL3ABA of a specific priority level - When the parameter falls below the congestion
level, the node instructs other nodes to send all messages.
TXL1DISC, TXL2DISC, Number of message buffers containing untransmitted and unacknowledged
TXL3DISC messages - When the parameter exceeds the discard level, the node begins
deleting messages with lower priority than the priority level where congestion
is taking place.
TXONSET Number of message buffers to transmit congestion onset
TXABAT Number of message buffers to transmit congestion abatement
Note: The TXLONSET, TXLABAT, and TXLDISC prompts are issued only if the congestion parameter for
the logical network is set to “CONGESTION WITH PRIORITY”. The TXONSET and TXAABT prompts are
issued only if the congestion parameter for the logical network is set to “CONGESTION WITH LEVELS”.

Group 2: Timer parameters

Group 2 parameters define timer parameters for these features:

• Initial alignment procedure (timers T1-T4)

• Signaling link (level 2) flow control (timers T5-T9, T97, and T98)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 153

Note: T97 and T98 are predefined for the SS7 protocol.

Timer parameter Identifies

Timer definition Selection of default parameters or user-defined parameters initial
alignment
T2 timer selection Timer parameter (short or long) used when automatic allocation of
signaling links is implemented
T1: aligned and ready Elapsed time when a link remains in the aligned/ready state before the
link enters the in-service state. Initiated by a successful proving attempt
T2: not aligned Elapsed time when a link remains out of alignment before entering one of
these states:
Normal alignment
Emergency alignment
Out-of-service
T3: aligned Elapsed time when a link remains in one of these states:
Aligned
Normal
Emergency
T4: normal proving Elapsed time when a link remains in the proving state for normal
alignment
T4: emergency proving Elapsed time when a link remains in the proving state for emergency
alignment
T5: sending status Interval for sending SIB messages to a distant node when a link exceeds
indication busy the received message congestion onset threshold
T6: remote congestion Elapsed time between receiving a SIB message from the distant node and
the time when a positive or negative acknowledgment is received from
the distant node
T7: acknowledgment Elapsed time between sending a message to a distant node and receiving
delay a SIB message
T88: level 2 idle link Elapsed time that a link can remain idle before being removed from
service (assumed out of service)
T9: false congestion Elapsed time for false congestion before being removed from service

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 154

Timer parameters are defined for the initial alignment procedure and signaling link (level 2)
flow control. The default parameter for each timer depends on the speed of the link. Table A
lists the default timer rate for each signaling speed in seconds except for T9 in seconds:
Table A. E1 level 2 default timer parameters for signaling rates
Timer Default value (in seconds)

T1 45

T2S 15

T2L 90

T3 1.5

T4N 8.2

T4E 0.5

T5 0.12

T6 6

T7 1.0

T88 0.5

Group 3: Traffic measurement marginal threshold parameters

Group 3 parameters define hourly thresholds that set the marginal performance for the
specified signaling links. When the number of errors, negative acknowledgments, or
changeovers on the link exceeds the corresponding marginal performance threshold, an alarm
is issued to identify the link and the threshold.

Marginal threshold attribute Identifies

Signal unit errors A limit on the number of signal units received with errors per
hour of operation
Negative acknowledgments received A limit on the number of negative acknowledgments received
in an hour
Automatic changeovers A limit on the number of times the link performs automatic
changeover to divert traffic from the link

Group 4: Common link parameters

Common link parameters define parameters common to all signaling low-speed E1 links. The
two different forward error correction method that exists for MTP are:

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 155

• BEC (basic error correction method)

• PCR (preventive cyclic retransmission method)

Table B lists these parameters.

Table B. LSL common link parameters
Common attribute Identifies Parameters and notes

Error correction Method of retransmitting Basic error correction

method unacknowledged or negatively Preventive cyclic retransmission correction
acknowledged signal units

N2 octet Number of octets available for 2000-20000

retransmissions

Note: N2 octet applies only if the forward error-correction mechanism is selected.

Change low-speed E1 link parameters

Use this procedure to change low-speed E1 link parameters.

Constraints

These constraints are associated with changing physical low-speed E1 link parameters:

• The RX abatement level must be greater than 29 and less than the RX onset level plus 9.
• The RX onset level plus 9 must be less than the RX discard level.
• The RX discard level plus 9 must be less than 156.
• The TXL1 abatement level must be less than the TXL1 onset level plus 9.
• The TXL1 onset level must be greater than 49; the TXL1 onset level plus 9 must be less
than the TXL1 discard level.
• The discard level plus 9 for TXL1, TXL2, and TXL3 messages must be less than 140.
• The abatement level for TXL1, TXL2, and TXL3 messages must be greater than 9.
• The TXL2 onset level must be greater than TXL1 onset plus 9. The TXL2 onset level must
be greater than TXL2 abatement plus 9. TXL onset plus 9 must be less than the TXL2
discard level.
• The TXL3 onset level must be greater than the TXL3 abatement level plus 9. The TXL3
onset level must be greater than the TXL2 onset level plus 9.
• After physical parameters are changed for an active link, the link must be deactivated and
then reactivated with distribution to activate the new parameters.
• Parameters for T1–T7 must be multiples of 10.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 156

Data tables

When physical link parameters are changed, these data tables are changed:

• Link parameters (Y49)

• Link threshold (W49)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

Note: The link has to be assigned to CEDLK and CELK. To assign a link, use the Assign
link procedure.

12 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE CCS CELKPA

13 Prompt: L*INK=
Enter: [0-3071]

14 Prompt: PARM*GP=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1 (congestion level); perform this subsection: Change congestion level
parameters.
2 (timers); perform this subsection: Change timer parameters.
3 (traffic measurement marginal thresholds); perform this subsection:
Change marginal threshold parameters.
4 (common link); perform this subsection: Change common link parameters.

Change congestion level parameters

15 Prompt: RXONS=
Enter: maximum buffers to receive congestion onset

16 Prompt: RXABA=
Enter: maximum buffers to receive congestion abatement

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 157

17 Prompt: RXDISC=
Enter: maximum buffers to receive message discard
The system displays the prompts in Step 18 through Step 26 only if the congestion
parameter for the logical network is set to congestion with priorities; otherwise, go to
Step 27.

18 Prompt: TXL1ONS=
Enter: maximum L1 buffers to transmit congestion onset

19 Prompt: TXL1ABA=
Enter: maximum L1 buffers to transmit congestion abatement

20 Prompt: TXL1DISC=
Enter: maximum L1 buffers to transmit congestion discard

21 Prompt: TXL2ONS=
Enter: maximum L2 buffers to transmit congestion onset

22 Prompt: TXL2ABA=
Enter: maximum L2 buffers to transmit congestion abatement

23 Prompt: TXL2DISC=
Enter: maximum L2 buffers to transmit congestion discard

24 Prompt: TXL3ONS=
Enter: maximum L3 buffers to transmit congestion onset

25 Prompt: TXL3ABA=
Enter: maximum L3 buffers to transmit congestion abatement

26 Prompt: TXL3DISC=
Enter: maximum L3 buffers to transmit congestion discard
The system shows the congestion level parameters assigned to the low-speed E1 link; go
to Step 29.

27 Prompt: TXONSET=
Enter: maximum buffers to transmit congestion onset

28 Prompt: TXABAT=
Enter: maximum buffers to transmit congestion abatement

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 158

The system shows the congestion level parameters assigned to the low-speed E1 link.

29 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the command prompt)
This subsection is complete; exit the procedure.

Change timer parameters

Note: Defaults for each timer depend on the link speed (see Table A).

Note: Enter parameters in multiples of 10.

30 Prompt: TIMRDF=
Enter: [D or U]
D (select default timers T1-T7)
U (select user-defined timers T1-T7)

31 Prompt: T2TMER=
Enter: [L or H]
L (select low version of timer T2)
H (select high version of timer T2)
If you entered D in Step 30, go to Step 40; otherwise, continue.

32 Prompt: T1ALGN=
Enter: T1 timer parameter

33 Prompt: T2NALG=
Enter: T2 not aligned timer parameter

34 Prompt: T3ALGN=
Enter: T3 alignment timer parameter

35 Prompt: T4NORM=
Enter: T4 normal proving alignment state timer parameter

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 159

36 Prompt: T4EMERG=
Enter: T4 emergency proving alignment state timer parameter

37 Prompt: T5SIB=
Enter: T5 SIB timer parameter

38 Prompt: T6REM=
Enter: T6 high baud rate remote congestion timer parameter

39 Prompt: T7ACK=
Enter: T7 high baud rate acknowledgment delay timer parameter

40 Prompt: T88IDLE=
Enter: T8 low baud rate idle time

41 Prompt: T9FCT=
Enter: T9 false link congestion timer parameter
The system shows the timer parameters assigned to the low-speed E1 link.

42 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the command prompt)
This subsection is complete; exit the procedure.

Change marginal threshold parameters

43 Prompt: SUERR=
Enter: [1-65535]
This entry defines the hourly threshold for signal units received in error.

44 Prompt: NAKREC=
Enter: [1-65535]
This entry defines the hourly threshold for negative acknowledgments received.

45 Prompt: AUTOCHG=
Enter: [1-65535]

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 160

This entry defines the hourly threshold for automatic changeovers.

46 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the command prompt)
This subsection is complete; exit the procedure.

Change common link parameters

47 Prompt: ECM=
Enter: [B or P]
B (basic error correction)
P (preventive cyclic retransmission error correction); go to Step 48.

48 Prompt: N2OCT=
Enter: [2000-20000]
This entry defines the N2 SU octet forced retransmission threshold count.

49 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the command prompt)
This subsection is complete; exit the procedure.
END PROCEDURE

Copy low-speed E1 link parameters

Use this procedure to copy low-speed E1 link parameters.

Constraints

The link to be copied and the destination link must belong to the same logical network.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 161

Data tables

When low-speed E1 link parameters are copied, these data tables are changed:

• Link parameters (Y49)

• Link threshold (W49)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

Note: The link has to be assigned to CEDLK and CELK. To assign a link, use the Assign
link procedure.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: COPY CCS CELKPA

2 Prompt: L*INK=
Enter: [0-3071]

3 Prompt: DSTLNK=
Enter: [0-3071]
Enter a single number, list of numbers, range of numbers, or combination of numbers.
The system shows the copied parameters of a single link to one or more links.

4 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the command prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display low-speed E1 link parameters

Use this procedure to display low-speed E1 link parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying low-speed E1 link parameters.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 162

Data tables

The system retrieves low-speed E1 link parameters from these data tables:

• Link parameters (Y49)

• Link threshold (W49)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

Note: The link has to be assigned to CEDLK and CELK. To assign a link, use the Assign
link procedure.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLA CCS CELKPA

2 Prompt: L*INK=
Enter: [0-3071]

3 Prompt: DPARAM*GP=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
0 (all groups)
1 (congestion level)
2 (timers)
3 (traffic measurement marginal threshold)
4 (common link)
The system shows the parameters of the SLPE link configuration table (Y49) and the
hourly marginal threshold table (W49) for a single link.

4 To display another node, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

5 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Low-speed T1 link parameters

Physical link parameters define the physical operation of the LSL. Generally, physical
parameters are established when the initial database is created; they are seldom changed.
When a new LSL is added, the physical parameters assigned to an LSL are usually copied for the
new LSL.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 163

However, special circumstances may require that some parameters be changed in operation.
The physical LSL parameters fall into five groups:

• Congestion level - defines congestion levels for messages being received and transmitted
• Timer - defines 5070 SSG MTP level 2 timer parameters
• Marginal threshold - defines hourly thresholds used to determine the marginal
performance of the LSL
• Common link - defines error-correction method, error-rate monitor, and octet threshold

Special system operation or a specific upgrade may require changes to one of these groups:

• Group 1: Congestion level parameters

• Group 2: Timer parameters
• Group 3: Traffic measurement marginal threshold parameters
• Group 4: Common link parameters

You can perform the following T1 link parameter procedures:

• Change low-speed T1 link parameters

• Copy low-speed T1 link parameters
• Display low-speed T1 link parameters

Group 1: Congestion level parameters

Congestion level parameters define link congestion thresholds for RX and TX messages.
Congestion levels are measured in terms of buffers, where one buffer stores one message.

Received message congestion thresholds determine when a node sends link busy status
messages to an adjacent node and discards received messages. Transmitted message
congestion thresholds determine when a node invokes signaling traffic management procedure
to divert traffic from a congested link.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 164

Note: For transmitted messages, separate congestion thresholds exist for each message
priority (L1, L2, and L3). There is an onset threshold, an abatement threshold, and a discard
threshold for each priority level.

Congestion level
attribute Identifies
RXONS Number of message buffers that contain received and untransmitted
messages - When the parameter exceeds the threshold, the node sends
retransmit messages.
RXABA Number of message buffers that contain received and untransmitted
messages - When the parameter falls below the threshold, the node resumes
normal operation.
RXDISC Number of message buffers containing received and untransmitted
messages - When the parameter exceeds the threshold, the node discards
further messages.
TXL1ONS, TXL2ONS, Number of message buffers containing received and untransmitted messages
TXL3ONS of a specific priority level (1, 2, or 3) - When the parameter exceeds the
threshold, the system is congested; the node instructs other nodes to send
lower priority messages away from the concerned destination.
TXL1ABA, TXL2ABA, Number of message buffers containing received and untransmitted messages
TXL3ABA of a specific priority level - When the parameter falls below the congestion
level, the node instructs other nodes to send all messages.
TXL1DISC, TXL2DISC, Number of message buffers containing untransmitted and unacknowledged
TXL3DISC messages - When the parameter exceeds the discard level, the node begins
deleting messages with lower priority than the priority level where congestion
is taking place.
Level1 false Enables or disables the false congestion monitor flag.
congestion flag

The relationship between received message congestion levels is shown in the following list. RX
indicates received message.

The parameter . . . Must be at least 9 less than the . . .

20 RX abatement level
RX abatement level RX onset level
RX onset level RX discard level
156 RX discard level

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 165

The constraints associated with transmitted message congestion thresholds are shown in the
following list. TXL1 indicates transmitted message level 1 priority, TXL2 indicates transmitted
message level 2 priority, and TXL3 indicates transmitted message level 3 priority.

The parameter . . . Must be at least 9 less than the . . .

0 TXL1 abatement level
TXL1 abatement level TXL1 onset level
TXL1 onset level TXL1 discard level
140 TXL1 discard level
0 TXL2 abatement level
TXL2 abatement level TXL2 onset level
TXL2 onset level TXL2 discard level
TXL2 discard level 140
0 TXL3 abatement level
TXL3 abatement level TXL3 onset level
TXL3 onset level TXL3 discard level
TXL3 discard level 140
40 TXL1 onset level
TXL1 onset level TXL2 onset level
TXL2 onset level TXL3 onset level

Group 2: Timer parameters

Group 2 parameters define timer parameters for these features:

• Initial alignment procedure (timers T1-T4)

• Signaling link (level 2) flow control (timers T5-T9, T97, and T98)

Note: The range of the timer values for T1 links differs based on the logical network assigned
to the ANSI or ITU protocol.

Note: T97 and T98 are predefined for the SS7 protocol.

Timer parameter Identifies

Timer definition Selection of default parameters or user-defined parameters initial
alignment
T2 timer selection Timer parameter (short or long) used when automatic allocation of
signaling links is implemented

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 166

Timer parameter Identifies

T1: aligned and ready Elapsed time when a link remains in the aligned/ready state before the
link enters the in-service state. Initiated by a successful proving attempt
T2: not aligned Elapsed time when a link remains out of alignment before entering one of
these states:
Normal alignment
Emergency alignment
Out-of-service
T3: aligned Elapsed time when a link remains in one of these states:
Aligned
Normal
Emergency
T4: normal proving Elapsed time when a link remains in the proving state for normal
alignment
T4: emergency proving Elapsed time when a link remains in the proving state for emergency
alignment
T5: sending status Interval for sending SIB messages to a distant node when a link exceeds
indication busy the received message congestion onset threshold
T6: remote congestion Elapsed time between receiving a SIB message from the distant node and
the time when a positive or negative acknowledgment is received from
the distant node
T7: acknowledgment Elapsed time between sending a message to a distant node and receiving
delay a SIB message
T8: level 2 idle link Elapsed time that a link can remain idle before being removed from
service (assumed out of service)
T9: false congestion Elapsed time for false congestion before being removed from service

Timer parameters are defined for the initial alignment procedure and signaling link (level 2)
flow control. The default parameter for each timer depends on the speed of the link. Table C
lists the default timer rate for each signaling speed in seconds except for T9 in seconds.
Table C. T1 level 2 default timer parameters for signaling rates
Timer 4800 b/s 9600 b/s 19.2 kb/s 56 kb/s 64 kb/s

T1 139500 71500 37000 14500 14500

T2S 136500 68500 34000 11500 11500

T2L 273000 137000 68000 23000 23000

T3 136500 68500 34000 11500 11500

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 167

Table C. T1 level 2 default timer parameters for signaling rates, contd

Timer 4800 b/s 9600 b/s 19.2 kb/s 56 kb/s 64 kb/s

T4N 27300 13700 6800 2300 2300

T4E 6800 3400 1700 600 600

T5 120 120 120 120 120

T6 10000 10000 10000 6000 6000

T7 4000 4000 4000 1000 1000

T8 600 600 600 500 500

T9* 30 30 30 30 30

Note: * In seconds.
Note: By default the CTDLK links takes all the timer values corresponding to 56 K baud rate.
Note: The T2 timer does not have a short or long version for CTDLK or CTLK links. So T2 timer selection is not
required

Group 3: Traffic measurement marginal threshold parameters

Group 3 parameters define hourly thresholds that set the marginal performance for the
specified signaling links. When the number of errors, negative acknowledgments, or
changeovers on the link exceeds the corresponding marginal performance threshold, an alarm
is issued to identify the link and the threshold.

Marginal threshold attribute Identifies

Signal unit errors A limit on the number of signal units received with errors per
hour of operation
Negative acknowledgments received A limit on the number of negative acknowledgments received
in an hour
Automatic changeovers A limit on the number of times the link performs automatic
changeover to divert traffic from the link

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 168

Group 4: Common link parameters

Common link parameters define parameters common to all signaling low-speed T1 links
(CTDLK). Table D lists these parameters.
Table D. LSL common link parameters
Common attribute Identifies Parameters and notes

Error correction Method of retransmitting Basic error correction

method unacknowledged or negatively Preventive cyclic retransmission correction
acknowledged signal units

Signal unit error rate Error threshold for removing a link 20-1000
monitor from service

N2 octet Number of octets available for 2000-20000

retransmissions

Baud rate (only for Low-speed data transfer 4800 b/s

CTDLK and CTLK) 9600 b/s
19.2 kb/s

High-speed data transfer 56 kb/s

64 kb/s

Note: N2 octet applies only if the forward error-correction mechanism is selected.

Change low-speed T1 link parameters

Use this procedure to change low-speed T1 link parameters.

Constraints

These constraints are associated with changing physical low-speed T1 link parameters:

• The RX abatement level must be greater than 26 and less than the RX onset level plus 9.
• The RX onset level plus 9 must be less than the RX discard level.
• The RX discard level plus 9 must be less than 57.
• The TXL1 abatement level must be less than the TXL1 onset level plus 9.
• The TXL1 onset level must be greater than 62; the TXL1 onset level plus 9 must be less
than the TXL1 discard level.
• The discard level plus 9 for TXL1, TXL2, and TXL3 messages must be less than 140.
• The abatement level for TXL1, TXL2, and TXL3 messages must be greater than 9.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 169

• The TXL2 onset level must be greater than TXL1 onset plus 9. The TXL2 onset level must
be greater than TXL2 abatement plus 9. TXL onset plus 9 must be less than the TXL2
discard level.
• The TXL3 onset level must be greater than the TXL3 abatement level plus 9. The TXL3
onset level must be greater than the TXL2 onset level plus 9.
• After physical parameters are changed for an active link, the link must be deactivated and
then reactivated with distribution to activate the new parameters.
• Parameters for T1-T7 must be multiples of 10.

Data tables

When physical link parameters are changed, these data tables are changed:

• Link parameters (Y49)

• Link threshold (W49)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

Note: The link has to be assigned to CTDLK. To assign a link, use the Assign link
procedure.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE CCS T1LKPA
or
CHANGE CCS LINKPA

2 Prompt: L*INK=
Enter: [0-3071]
Enter the link ID.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 170

3 Prompt: PARM*GP=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1 (congestion level); perform the subsection Change congestion level
parameters.
2 (timers); perform the subsection Change timer parameters.
3 (traffic measurement marginal thresholds); perform the subsection Change
marginal threshold parameters.
4 (common link); perform the subsection Change common link parameters.

Change congestion level parameters

4 Prompt: RXONS=
Enter: maximum buffers to receive congestion onset

5 Prompt: RXABA=
Enter: maximum buffers to receive congestion abatement

6 Prompt: RXDISC=
Enter: maximum buffers to receive message discard

7 Prompt: TXL1ONS=
Enter: maximum L1 buffers to transmit congestion onset

8 Prompt: TXL1ABA=
Enter: maximum L1 buffers to transmit congestion abatement

9 Prompt: TXL1DISC=
Enter: maximum L1 buffers to transmit message discard

10 Prompt: LV1CON=
Enter: [YES, Y, NO, or N]
Y (enable the false congestion monitor flag)
N (disable the false congestion monitor flag)

11 Prompt: TXL2ONS=
Enter: maximum L2 buffers to transmit congestion onset

12 Prompt: TXL2ABA=
Enter: maximum L2 buffers to transmit congestion abatement

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 171

13 Prompt: TXL2DISC=
Enter: maximum L2 buffers to transmit message discard

14 Prompt: TXL3ONS=
Enter: maximum L3 buffers to transmit congestion onset

15 Prompt: TXL3ABA=
Enter: maximum L3 buffers to transmit congestion abatement

16 Prompt: TXL3DISC=
Enter: maximum L3 buffers to transmit message discard
The system shows the congestion level parameters assigned to the low-speed T1 link.

17 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
This subsection is complete; exit the procedure.

Change timer parameters

Note: The range of the timer values for T1 links differs based on the logical network
assigned to the ANSI or ITU protocol.

18 Prompt: TIMRDF=
Enter: [D or U]
D (select default timers T1-T7)
U (select user defined timers T1-T7)

19 Prompt: T2TMER=
Enter: [L or H]
L (select the low version of timer T2)
H (select the high version of timer T2)
If you enter D in Step 18, go to Step 28; otherwise, continue.

20 Prompt: T1ALGN=
Enter: T1 timer parameter

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 172

21 Prompt: T2NALG=
Enter: T2 not aligned timer parameter

22 Prompt: T3ALGN=
Enter: T3 alignment timer parameter

23 Prompt: T4NORM=
Enter: T4 normal proving alignment state timer parameter

24 Prompt: T4EMERG=
Enter: T4 emergency proving alignment state timer parameter

25 Prompt: T5SIB=
Enter: T5 SIB timer parameter

26 Prompt: T6REM=
Enter: T6 high baud rate remote congestion timer parameter

27 Prompt: T7ACK=
Enter: T7 high baud rate acknowledgment delay timer parameter

28 Prompt: T88IDLE=
Enter: T88 baud rate idle timer

29 Prompt: T9FCT=
Enter: T9 false link congestion timer parameter
The system shows the timer parameters assigned to the low-speed T1 link.

30 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
This subsection is complete; exit the procedure.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 173

Change marginal threshold parameters

31 Prompt: SUERR=
Enter: [1-65535]
This entry defines the hourly threshold for signal units received in error.

32 Prompt: NAKREC=
Enter: [1-65535]
This entry defines the hourly threshold for negative acknowledgments received.

33 Prompt: AUTOCHG=
Enter: [1-65535]
This entry defines the hourly threshold for automatic changeovers.

34 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
This subsection is complete; exit the procedure.

Change common link parameters

35 Prompt: ECM=
Enter: [N or P]
N (normal error correction)
P (preventive cyclic retransmission error correction)
If you enter N in Step 35, then go to Step 37; otherwise, continue.
The system shows the existing common link parameters assigned to the low-speed link.

36 Prompt: N2OCT=
Enter: number of octets available for retransmission

37 Prompt: SUERMHI=
Enter: signal unit error rate monitor

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 174

38 Prompt: BAUDRT=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1 (56 kb/s baud rate)
2 (64 kb/s baud rate)
The system shows the common link parameters assigned to the low-speed link.

39 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
This subsection is complete; exit the procedure.
END PROCEDURE

Copy low-speed T1 link parameters

Use this procedure to copy low-speed T1 link parameters.

Data tables

When low-speed T1 link parameters are copied, these data tables are changed:

• Link parameters (Y49)

• Threshold parameters (W49)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

Note: The link has to be assigned to CTDLK. To assign a link, use the Assign link
procedure.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: COPY CCS T1LKPA
or
COPY CCS LINKPA

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 175

2 Prompt: LNKCPY=
Enter: [0-3071]
Enter the link ID.

3 Prompt: DSTLNK=
Enter: [0-3071]
Enter a single number, list of numbers, range of numbers, or a combination of numbers.
The system shows the copied parameters of a single link to one or more links.

4 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display low-speed T1 link parameters

Use this procedure to display low-speed T1 link parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying low-speed T1 link parameters.

Data tables

The system retrieves low-speed T1 link parameters from these data tables:

• Link parameters (Y49)

• Link threshold (W49)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

Note: The link has to be assigned to CTDLK. To assign a link, use the Assign link
procedure.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 176

1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLA CCS T1LKPA
or
DISPLAY CCS LINKPA

2 Prompt: L*INK=
Enter: [0-3071]
Enter the link ID.

3 Prompt: DPARM*GP=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
0 (all groups)
1 (congestion level)
2 (timers)
3 (traffic measurement marginal threshold)
4 (common link)
The system shows the parameters of the SLPE link configuration table (Y49) and the
hourly marginal threshold table (W49) for a single link.

4 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

5 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

HSL parameters
Physical link parameters define the physical operation of the HSL. Generally, physical
parameters are established when the initial database is created; they are seldom changed.
When a new HSL is added, the physical parameters assigned to an HSL are usually copied for
the new HSL.

However, special circumstances may require that some parameters be changed in operation.
The physical HSL parameters fall into five groups:

• Common link - defines error-correction method, error-rate monitor, and octet threshold
• Congestion level - defines congestion levels for messages being received and transmitted
• Timer - defines 5070 SSG MTP level 2 timer parameters
• Marginal threshold - defines hourly thresholds used to determine the marginal
performance of the HSL

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 177

Special system operation or a specific upgrade may require changes to one of these groups:

• Group 1: Common link parameters

• Group 2: Congestion level parameters
• Group 3: Timer parameters
• Group 4: Traffic measurement marginal threshold parameters

You can perform the following E1 link parameter procedures:

• Change high-speed E1 link parameters

• Copy high-speed E1 link parameters
• Display high-speed E1 link parameters

Group 1: Common link parameters

Common link parameters define parameters common to all signaling HSLs. The different
forward error correction methods that exists for MTP are:

• BEC (basic error correction method)

• PCR (preventive cyclic retransmission method)

Table E. HSL common link parameters

Common attribute Identifies Parameters and notes

Error correction Method of retransmitting Basic error correction

method unacknowledged or negatively Preventive cyclic retransmission correction
acknowledged signal units

N2 octet Number of octets available for 20000-100000

retransmissions

Note: N2 octet applies only if the forward error-correction mechanism is selected.

Group 2: Congestion level parameters

Congestion level parameters define link congestion thresholds for RX and TX messages.
Congestion levels are measured in terms of buffers, where one buffer stores one message.

Received message congestion thresholds determine when a node sends link busy status
messages to an adjacent node and discards received messages. Transmitted message
congestion thresholds determine when a node invokes signaling traffic management procedure
to divert traffic from a congested link.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 178

Note: For transmitted messages, separate congestion thresholds exist for each message
priority (L1, L2, and L3). There is an onset threshold, an abatement threshold, and a discard
threshold for each priority level.

Table F. HSL congestion level parameters

Congestion level
attribute Identifies
RXONS Number of message buffers that contain received and untransmitted
messages - When the parameter exceeds the threshold, the node sends
retransmit messages.
RXABA Number of message buffers that contain received and untransmitted
messages - When the parameter falls below the threshold, the node resumes
normal operation.
RXDISC Number of message buffers containing received and untransmitted
messages - When the parameter exceeds the threshold, the node discards
further messages.
TXL1ONS, TXL2ONS, Number of message buffers containing received and untransmitted messages
TXL3ONS of a specific priority level (1, 2, or 3) - When the parameter exceeds the
threshold, the system is congested; the node instructs other nodes to send
lower priority messages away from the concerned destination.
TXL1ABA, TXL2ABA, Number of message buffers containing received and untransmitted messages
TXL3ABA of a specific priority level - When the parameter falls below the congestion
level, the node instructs other nodes to send all messages.
TXL1DISC, TXL2DISC, Number of message buffers containing untransmitted and unacknowledged
TXL3DISC messages - When the parameter exceeds the discard level, the node begins
deleting messages with lower priority than the priority level where congestion
is taking place.
TXONSET Number of message buffers to transmit congestion onset.
TNABAT Number of message buffers to transmit congestion abatement.

Note: The congestion parameters must be set with the following criteria: RXL1AB
<RXL1ON<RXL1DS and TXL1AB <TXL1ON <TXL1DS <TXL2AB <TX2ON <TXL2DS <TXL3AB <TXL3ON
<TXL3DS, with all parameters differing by at least nine messages.

Group 3: Timer parameters

Group 3 parameters define timer parameters for the HSLs.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 179

Table G. HSL timer parameters

Timer parameter Identifies

Timer definition Selection of default parameters or user-defined parameters initial
alignment
T2 timer selection Timer parameter (short or long) used when automatic allocation of
signaling links is implemented
T1: aligned and ready Elapsed time when a link remains in the aligned/ready state before the
link enters the in-service state. Initiated by a successful proving attempt
T2: not aligned Elapsed time when a link remains out of alignment before entering one of
these states:
Normal alignment
Emergency alignment
Out-of-service
T3: aligned Elapsed time when a link remains in one of these states:
Aligned
Normal
Emergency
T4: normal proving Elapsed time when a link remains in the proving state for normal
alignment
T4: emergency proving Elapsed time when a link remains in the proving state for emergency
alignment
T5: sending status Interval for sending SIB messages to a distant node when a link exceeds
indication busy the received message congestion onset threshold
T6: remote congestion Elapsed time between receiving a SIB message from the distant node and
the time when a positive or negative acknowledgment is received from
the distant node
T7: acknowledgment Elapsed time between sending a message to a distant node and receiving
delay a SIB message

The default parameter for each timer depends on the speed of the link. Table H lists the
default timer rate.
Table H. HSL level 2 default timer parameters for signaling rates
Timer 2.048 Mb/s

T1: aligned and ready 300

T2: not aligned-low 15

T2: not aligned-high 90

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 180

Table H. HSL level 2 default timer parameters for signaling rates, contd
Timer 2.048 Mb/s

T3: aligned 1.5

T4: normal proving 30

T4: emergency proving 500

T5: sending status indication busy 120

T6: remote congestion 6

T7: acknowledgment delay 1.0

Note: T1, T2, T3,T6, T7, T4: normal proving in seconds. T5, T4: emergency proving in milliseconds.

Group 4: Traffic measurement marginal threshold parameters

Group 3 parameters define hourly thresholds that set the marginal performance for the
specified signaling links. When the number of errors, negative acknowledgments, or
changeovers on the link exceeds the corresponding marginal performance threshold, an alarm
is issued to identify the link and the threshold.
Table I. HSL traffic measurement marginal threshold parameters
Marginal threshold attribute Identifies

Signal unit errors A limit on the number of signal units received with errors per hour
of operation

Negative acknowledgments received A limit on the number of negative acknowledgments received in an

hour

Automatic changeovers A limit on the number of times the link performs automatic
changeover to divert traffic from the link

Change high-speed E1 link parameters

User this procedure to change high-speed E1 link parameters.

Constraints

The following constraints apply to changing physical HSL parameters:

• The RX abatement level must be greater than 293 and less than the RX onset level plus 9.
• The RX onset level plus 9 must be less than the RX discard level.
• The RX discard level plus 9 must be less than 814.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 181

• The TXL1 abatement level must be less than the TXL1 onset level plus 9.
• The TXL1 onset level must be greater than 49; the TXL1 onset level plus 9 must be less
than the TXL1 discard level.
• The discard level plus 9 for TXL1, TXL2, and TXL3 messages must be less than 140.
• The abatement level for TXL1, TXL2, and TXL3 messages must be greater than 9.
• The TXL2 onset level must be greater than TXL1 onset plus 9. The TXL2 onset level must
be greater than TXL2 abatement plus 9. TXL onset plus 9 must be less than the TXL2
discard level.
• The TXL3 onset level must be greater than the TXL3 abatement level plus 9. The TXL3
onset level must be greater than the TXL2 onset level plus 9.
• After physical parameters are changed for an active link, the link must be deactivated and
then reactivated with distribution to activate the new parameters.
• Parameters for T1–T7 must be multiples of 10.

Data tables

When physical link parameters are changed, these data tables are changed:

• Link parameters (Y49)

• Link threshold (W49)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

Note: The link has to be assigned to HELK. To assign a link, use the Assign link
procedure.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE CCS HELKPA

2 Prompt: L*INK=
Enter: [0-3071]
The default value is none.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 182

3 Prompt: PARAM*GP=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1 (common link); perform the subsection: Change common link parameters.
2 (congestion link); perform the subsection: Change congestion level
parameters.
3 (timers); perform the subsection: Change timer parameters.
4 (traffic measurement marginal thresholds); perform the subsection: Change
marginal threshold parameters.
The default value is none.

Change common link parameters

4 Prompt: ECM=
Enter: [B or D]
B (basic error correction); go to Step 6.
P (preventive cyclic retransmission error correction); go to Step 5.
The default value is the current value or basic error correction method if the current
value is not valid.

5 Prompt: N2OCT=
Enter: number of octets available for retransmission
This entry defines the N2 SU octet forced retransmission threshold count.
The default value is the current value or 20000 if the current value is not valid.

6 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT<^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt
<CTRL+A> (do not execute changes and exit to the command prompt)
This subsection is complete; exit the procedure.

Change congestion level parameters

7 Prompt: RXONS=
Enter: maximum buffers to receive congestion onset

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 183

8 Prompt: RXABA=
Enter: maximum buffers to receive congestion abatement

9 Prompt: RXDISC=
Enter: maximum buffers to receive message discard

Note: The system displays the prompts in Step 10 through Step 18 only if the congestion
parameter for the logical network is set to congestion with priorities; otherwise, go to
Step 19.

10 Prompt: TXL1ONS=
Enter: maximum l1 buffers to transmit congestion onset

11 Prompt: TXL1ABA=
Enter: maximum l1 buffers to transmit congestion abatement

12 Prompt: TXL1DISC=
Enter: maximum l1 buffers to transmit congestion discard

13 Prompt: TXL2ONS=
Enter: maximum l2 buffers to transmit congestion onset

14 Prompt: TXL2ABA=
Enter: maximum l2 buffers to transmit congestion abatement

15 Prompt: TXL2DISC=
Enter: maximum l2 buffers to transmit congestion discard

16 Prompt: TXL3ONS=
Enter: maximum l3 buffers to transmit congestion discard

17 Prompt: TXL3ABA=
Enter: maximum l3 buffers to transmit congestion abatement

18 Prompt: TXL3DISC=
Enter: maximum l3 buffers to transmit congestion discard
The system shows the congestion level parameters assigned to the HSL; go to Step 21.

Note: The system displays the prompts in Step 19 and Step 20 only if the congestion
parameter for the logical network is set to congestion with levels.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 184

19 Prompt: TXONSET=
Enter: maximum buffers to transmit congestion onset

20 Prompt: TXABAT=
Enter: maximum buffers to transmit congestion abatement
The system shows the congestion level parameters assigned to the HSL.

21 Prompt: Prompt:EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT<^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt
<CTRL+A> (do not execute changes and exit to the command prompt)
This subsection is complete; exit the procedure.

Change timer parameters

Note: Defaults for each timer depend on the link speed.

Note: Enter parameters in multiples of 10.

22 Prompt: TIMRDF=
Enter: [D or U]
D (select default timers T1-T7); go to Step 32.
U (select user-defined timers T1-T7); continue.
The default value is the current value or D if the current value is not valid.

23 Prompt: T2TMER=
Enter: [L or H]
L (select low version of timer T2)
H (select high version of timer T2)
The default value is the current value or L if the current value is not valid.

24 Prompt: T1ALGN=
Enter: T1 timer parameter
The default is the current value or 300 milliseconds if the current value is not valid

25 Prompt: T2NALG=
Enter: T2 not aligned timer parameter

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 185

The default is the current value. if the current value is not valid, the default is assigned
depending on the T2TMER selection in Step 23.
If you entered L in Step 23, the default value is 15 milliseconds.
If you entered H in Step 23, the default value is 90 milliseconds.

26 Prompt: T3ALGN=
Enter: T3 aligned timer parameter
The default value is the current value or 105 milliseconds if the current value is not
valid.

27 Prompt: T4NORM=
Enter: T4 normal proving alignment state timer parameter
The default value is the current value or 30 milliseconds if the current value is not
valid.

28 Prompt: T4EMERG=
Enter: T4 emergency proving alignment state timer parameter
The default value is the current value or 500 milliseconds if the current value is not
valid.

29 Prompt: T5SIB=
Enter: T5 SIB timer parameter
The default value is the current value or 120 milliseconds if the current value is not
valid.

30 Prompt: T6ERM=
Enter: T6 high baud rate remote congestion timer parameter
The default value is the current value or 6 milliseconds if the current value is not valid.

31 Prompt: T7ACK=
Enter: T7 high baud rate acknowledgement delay timer parameter
The default value is the current value or 1000 if the current value is not valid.
The system shows the timer parameters assigned to the HSL.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 186

32 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name>, or ABORT<^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt
<CTRL+A> (do not execute changes and exit to the command prompt)
This subsection is complete; exit the procedure.

Change marginal threshold parameters

33 Prompt: SUPER=
Enter: [1-65535]
This entry defines the hourly threshold for signal units received in error.
The default value is the current value or 6400 if the current value is not valid.

34 Prompt: NAKREC=
Enter: [1-65535]
This entry defines the hourly threshold for negative acknowledgement received.
The default value is the current value or 6400 if the current value is not valid.

35 Prompt: AUTOCHG=
Enter: [1-65535]
This entry defines the hourly threshold for automatic changeovers.
The default value is the current value or 4 if the current value is not valid.

36 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT<^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt
<CTRL+A> (do not execute changes and exit to the command prompt)
This subsection is complete; exit the procedure.
END PROCEDURE

Copy high-speed E1 link parameters

Use this procedure to copy high-speed E1 link parameters.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 187

Constraints

The link to be copied and the destination link must belong to the same logical network.

Data tables

When HSL parameters are copied, these data tables are changed:

• Link parameters (Y49)

• Link threshold (W49)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

Note: The link has to be assigned to HELK. To assign a link, use the Assign link
procedure.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: COPY CCS HELKPA

2 Prompt: L*INK=
Enter: [0-3071]
The default value is none.

3 Prompt: DSTLNK=
Enter: [0-3071]
The system shows the copied parameters of a single link to one or more links.

4 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT<^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt
<CTRL+A> (do not execute changes and exit to the command prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display high-speed E1 link parameters

Use this procedure to display high-speed E1 link parameters.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 188

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying HSL parameters.

Data tables

The system retrieves HSL parameters from these data tables:

• Link parameters (Y49)

• Link threshold (W49)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

Note: The link has to be assigned to HELK. To assign a link, use the Assign link
procedure.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLA CCS HELKPA

2 Prompt: L*INK=
Enter: [0-3071]
The default value is none.

3 DPARMGP=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
0 (All groups)
1 (Common link)
2 (Congestion level)
3 (Timers)
4 (Traffic measurement marginal threshold)

4 To display another node, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

5 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 189

ATM over E1 high-speed links

This topic describes the procedures to define the link parameters for the ATM over E1
high-speed links. The ATM over E1 HSLs parameters fall into five groups:

• ATM - defines asynchronous transfer mode

• Congestion level - defines congestion levels of messages being received and transmitted
• ATM timers - defines ATM timer parameters
• Traffic measurement margin threshold - defines threshold used to determine the marginal
performance of ATM over E1 high-speed links
• SAAL - defines signaling ATM adaptation layer parameters

The following parameters are defined:

• Group 1: ATM parameters

• Group 2: Congestion level parameters
• Group 3: ATM timer parameters
• Group 4: Traffic measurement marginal threshold parameters
• Group 5: SAAL parameters

You can perform the following high-speed T1 link parameter procedures:

• Change ATM over E1 high-speed links parameters

• Copy ATM over E1 high-speed link parameters
• Display ATM over E1 high-speed links parameters

Group 1: ATM parameters

Group 1 parameters define ATM parameters for ATM over E1 high-speed links. Table J lists
these parameters.
Table J. ATM parameters
ATM attribute Identifies

VPI Virtual path identifier in the ATM header

VCI Virtual channel identifier in the ATM header

QSCLASS Quality of service class

CLKSCE Clock source

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 190

Table J. ATM parameters

ATM attribute Identifies

LINBDO Line build out

TXPUTP TX pulse template

ATMSCR ATM scrambling

Group 2: Congestion level parameters

Group 2 parameters define congestion level parameters for ATM over E1 high-speed links.
Table K lists these parameters.
Table K. Congestion level parameters
Congestion level
attribute Identifies

RXL1ON Number of message buffers that contain received and untransmitted

messages - When the parameter exceeds the threshold, the node sends retransmit
messages.

RXL1AB Number of message buffers that contain received and untransmitted

messages - When the parameter falls below the threshold, the node resumes normal
operation.

RXL1DS Number of message buffers containing received and untransmitted messages - When
the parameter exceeds the threshold, the node discards further messages.

TXL1ON, TXL2ON, Number of message buffers containing received and untransmitted messages of a
TXL3ON specific priority level (1, 2, or 3) - When the parameter exceeds the threshold, the
system is congested; the node instructs other nodes to send lower priority messages
away from the concerned destination.

TXL1AB, TXL2AB, Number of message buffers containing received and untransmitted messages of a
TXL3AB specific priority level - When the parameter falls below the congestion level, the
node instructs other nodes to send all messages.

TXL1DS, TXL2DS, Number of message buffers containing untransmitted and unacknowledged

TXL3DS messages - When the parameter exceeds the discard level, the node begins deleting
messages with lower priority than the priority level where congestion is taking place.

Note: The congestion parameters must be set with the following criteria: RXL1AB < RXL1ON <
RXL1DS and TXL1AB < TXL1ON < TXL1DS < TXL2AB < TXL2ON < TXL2DS < TXL3AB < TXL3ON <
TXL3DS with all parameters differing by at least 25 messages.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 191

Group 3: ATM timer parameters

Group 3 parameters define ATM timer parameters for ATM over E1 high-speed links. Table L
lists these parameters.
Table L. ATM timer parameters
ATM timer attribute Identifies

Timer definition Selection of default parameters or user-defined parameters initial alignment

COPTCC Time interval between transmission of BGN, END, RS and ER PDUs as long as
replies are received

COPTKA Maximum time interval to receive peer status or resumption of link traffic in
the keep-alive phase

COPTNR Maximum time between PDUs on a link

COPTP Maximum time since the receipt of last peer status

COPTID Time interval for the idle phase

COPTPV Time interval required to prove link alignment

CFNNIT1 Delay interval between link failure and an attempt to recover

CFNNIT2 Maximum time interval for alignment of a link in the align state

CFNNIT3 Time interval between the transmission of proving PDUs in the link proving
state

LMTRS Number of limits of time interval for an SCCOP recovery attempt

LMTNC Number of vail intervals to queue a PDU for transmission after receiving an
on-credit flow control message from the target

LMTSUP Number of superblock size in seconds

LMTLOS Number of loss limit in seconds

LMTTAU Number of error monitoring interval

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 192

Group 4: Traffic measurement marginal threshold parameters

Group 4 parameters define traffic measurement marginal threshold parameters for the ATM
over E1 high-speed links. Table M lists these parameters.
Table M. Traffic measurement marginal threshold parameters
Marginal threshold attribute Identifies

EPSOEC Maximum number of errors received per hour

SDPRETX Maximum number of retransmissions per hour

HTAUTOC Maximum number of automatic traffic change-overs per hour

CPSOEC Maximum number of connection errors per hour

Group 5: SAAL parameters

Group 5 parameters define signaling ATM adaptation layer parameters for ATM over E1
high-speed links. Table N lists these parameters.
Table N. SAAL parameters
SAAL attribute Identifies

OPMAXCC Maximum number of retransmissions per message

OPMAXPD Maximum number of PDUs before sending a poll PDU

OPMAXST Maximum number of limit elements in a STAT PDU message

CFNNIN1 Number of PDUs sent during normal proving of link alignment

LMMXNRP Maximum number of NRPs during a successful proving attempt on link

LMEXSF The exponential smoothing factor

LMQOSTH The quality of service threshold

NUMINTL Number of monitoring intervals needed to span the time when messages are not
released from the buffers

NMITBLK Number of monitoring intervals per block

CFC1CTR Number of proving PDUs to be sent after each T3 (CFNNIT3) interval in the
proving state

Change ATM over E1 high-speed links parameters

Use this procedure to change ATM over E1 high-speed links parameters.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 193

Data tables

When physical links are changed, these data tables are changed:

• Link parameter (Y49)

• Link threshold (W49)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

Note: The link has to be assigned to AE1LK. To assign a link, use the Assign link
procedure.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE CCS E1LKPA

2 Prompt: HLINK=
Enter: [0-3071]

3 Prompt: PARMGPH=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1 (ATM); perform the subsection Change ATM parameters.
2 (congestion level); perform the subsection Change congestion level
parameters.
3 (ATM timers); perform the subsection Change ATM timer parameters.
4 (traffic measurement marginal threshold); perform the subsection Change
traffic measurement marginal threshold parameters.
5 (SAAL); perform the subsection Change SAAL parameters.

Change ATM parameters

4 Prompt: VPI=
Enter: [0-4095]
The default value is 0.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 194

5 Prompt: VCI=
Enter: [0-65535]
The default value is 5.

6 Prompt: QSCLASS=
Enter: [0-3]
The default value is 3.

7 Prompt: LINBDO=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
0 (0 dB)
1 (7.5 dB)
2 (15 dB)
3 (22.5 dB)
Enter a line build out.

8 Prompt: CLKSCE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
0 (line timing)
1 (LTD A)
2 (LTD B)
3 (NIC local oscillator)
Enter the timing type.

9 Prompt: TXPUTP=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
0 (0-133 ft)
1 (133-266 ft)
2 (266-399 ft)
3 (399-533 ft)
4 (533-655 ft)
Enter the TX pulse template.

10 Prompt: ATMSCR=
Enter: [YES or NO]
The default value is YES.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 195

11 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
This subsection is complete; exit the procedure.

Change congestion level parameters

12 Prompt: RXL1ON=
Enter: maximum L1 buffers to receive congestion onset

13 Prompt: RXL1AB=
Enter: maximum L1 buffers to receive congestion abatement

14 Prompt: RXL1DS=
Enter: maximum L1 buffers to receive congestion discard

15 Prompt: TXL1ON=
Enter: maximum L1 buffers to transmit congestion onset

16 Prompt: TXL1AB=
Enter: maximum L1 buffers to transmit congestion abatement

17 Prompt: TXL1DS=
Enter: maximum L1 buffers to transmit congestion discard

18 Prompt: TXL2ON=
Enter: maximum L2 buffers to transmit congestion onset

19 Prompt: TXL2AB=
Enter: maximum L2 buffers to transmit congestion abatement

20 Prompt: TXL2DS=
Enter: maximum L2 buffers to transmit congestion discard

21 Prompt: TXL3ON=
Enter: maximum L3 buffers to transmit congestion onset

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 196

22 Prompt: TXL3AB=
Enter: maximum L3 buffers to transmit congestion abatement

23 Prompt: TXL3DS=
Enter: maximum L3 buffers to transmit congestion discard

24 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
This subsection is complete; exit the procedure.

Change ATM timer parameters

25 Prompt: TMRDF=
Enter: [D or U]
D (default timers); go to Step 40.
U (user-defined timers); continue.
There is no default value.

26 Prompt: COPTCC=
Enter: [100-2000]

27 Prompt: COPTKA=
Enter: [25-500]

28 Prompt: COPTNR=
Enter: [500-2000]

29 Prompt: COPTP=
Enter: [25-500]

30 Prompt: COPTID=
Enter: [25-1000]

31 Prompt: COPTPV=
Enter: [0-1200]

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 197

32 Prompt: CFNNIT1=
Enter: [1-15]

33 Prompt: CFNNIT2=
Enter: [15-180]

34 Prompt: CFNNIT3=
Enter: [1000-25000]

35 Prompt: LMTRS=
Enter: [30-1440]

36 Prompt: LMTNC=
Enter: [1000-6000]

37 Prompt: LMTSUP=
Enter: [10-600]

38 Prompt: LMTLOS=
Enter: [500-10000]

39 Prompt: LMTTAU=
Enter: [25-250]

40 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
This subsection is complete; exit the procedure.

Change traffic measurement marginal threshold parameters

41 Prompt: EPSOEC=
Enter: [0-65535]

42 Prompt: SDPRETX=
Enter: [0-65535]

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 198

43 Prompt: HTAUTOC=
Enter: [0-65535]

44 Prompt: CPSOEC=
Enter: [0-65535]

45 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
This subsection is complete; exit the procedure.

Change SAAL parameters

46 Prompt: OPMAXCC=
Enter: [1-10]

47 Prompt: OPMAXPD=
Enter: [5-2120]

Note: Enter only odd values in Step 48.

48 Prompt: OPMAXST=
Enter: [3-1021]

49 Prompt: CFNNIN1=
Enter: [50-50000]

50 Prompt: LMMXNRP=
Enter: [0-10]

51 Prompt: LMMEXSF=
Enter: [0-1000]

52 Prompt: LMQOSTH=
Enter: [100-1000]

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 199

53 Prompt: NUMINTL=
Enter: [1-25]

54 Prompt: NMITBLK=
Enter: [1-25]

55 Prompt: CFC1CTR=
Enter: [1-30]

56 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
This subsection is complete; exit the procedure.
END PROCEDURE

Copy ATM over E1 high-speed link parameters

Use this procedure to copy ATM over E1 high-speed link parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to copying ATM over E1 high-speed links.

Data tables

When ATM over E1 high-speed link parameters are copied, these data tables are changed:

• Link parameter (Y49)

• Link threshold (W49)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

Note: The link has to be assigned to AE1LK. To assign a link, use the Assign link
procedure.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: COPY CCS E1LKPA

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 200

2 Prompt: HLINK=
Enter: [0-3071]

3 Prompt: DSTLNKH=
Enter: destination link ID
Enter a single number, list of numbers, range of numbers, or combination of numbers.

4 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display ATM over E1 high-speed links parameters

Use this procedure to display ATM over E1 high-speed link parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying ATM over E1 high-speed links.

Data tables

The system retrieves ATM over E1 high-speed link parameters from these data tables:

• Link parameter (Y49)

• Link threshold (W49)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

Note: The link has to be assigned to AE1LK. To assign a link, use the Assign link
procedure.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLAY CCS E1LKPA

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Processors and links
Page 201

2 Prompt: HLINK=
Enter: [0-3071]

3 Prompt: DPARM*GPH=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
0 (all groups)
1 (ATM)
2 (congestion level)
3 (ATM timers)
4 (traffic measurement marginal threshold)
5 (SAAL)
6 (non provisional parameters)

4 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

5 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 202

SS7-IP interworking

This section describes the steps required to provision IP links and M3UA entities in the 5070
SSG.

• SS7 over IP using M2PA

• SS7 over IP using M3UA

The SS7 over IP using M2PA feature helps transport or receive SS7 traffic to or from an IP
network via an IPLK processor. The IPLK is a simplex, CP-1 processor that supports two IP ports
for connecting to the same or different IP networks.

The SS7 over IP using M3UA feature uses the IPUA processor. The IPUA is a simplex, CP-1 based
processor with two IP ports for connecting to the same or different IP networks. The IPUA
communicates with one or more ASPs according to the user-defined configuration. A separate
SCTP association is established with each ASP that the IPUA is configured to interface with,
and the M3UA layer on each IPUA uses the SCTP association to send the M3UA messages to the
appropriate ASP.

The SS7-IP interworking order of input figure illustrates the order of input for provisioning SS7
over IP links and M3UA entities in the 5070 SSG.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 203

Figure 2. SS7-IP interworking order of input

Note: The Order of input is
Follow Order of input down applicable only to IPLK.
to MPC parameters However the CCS local node
has to be assigned to IPUA.
Provision IPLK or IPUA processor

Configure hosts file

IPLK IPUA

SS7 over IP using M2PA SS7 over IP using M3UA

Assign links to a link set Assign an application

server

Assign IP connectivity Assign an application

server process

Change IP system Assign a link

parameters set/application server to a
route set master
Change IP system
parameters Assign a DPC route set

Activate the IP link Change UIP parameters (if

required)
Assign a link
Change UIP system
set/application server
parameters (if required)
to a route set master

Change UIP timer

Assign a DPC route set (if required)

Audit UIP database

Activate an application
server

Activate an application
server process

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 204

Provision IPLK or IPUA processor

Use the following two procedures to equip an IPLK or IPUA processor and then view its status:

• Equip processor
• Display process equip

In addition, the following procedures (in the Processors and links section) can be performed for
processors configured as IPLK or IPUA:

• Unequip processor
• Remove processor
• Restore processor
• Display processor configuration

The following procedures (in the Processors and links section) can be performed for processors
configured as IPLK, but are not applicable to those configured as IPUA:

• Display routing processor

• Display routing processor status

Equip processor
Use this procedure to equip the IPLK or IPUA processor.

Constraints

The processor must reside in a slot designated by the prompts in the command sequence.

Data tables

The system accesses hardware database tables to add an IPLK processor to the system.
However, the system does not access SS7 network data tables.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 205

Note: A cross-over cable is required when connecting directly between IPLKs.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE PROCES EQUIP

2 Prompt: SUBTYP*E=
Enter: [IPLK or IPUA]
Enter the device subtype.

3 Prompt: SUNIT=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
IPLK (0-63)
IPUA (0-47)

4 Prompt: EQU*IP=
Enter: EQD

5 Prompt: BOARD*TYPE=
Enter: CP1

6 Prompt: FRNAME=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
ALF (administration link frame)
LEF (link expansion frame)
The default value is ALF.

7 Prompt: FRNUM=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
0 (for ALF)
0-2 (for LEF)
The default value is 0.

8 Prompt: VERT*ICAL=
Enter: [4, 10, 16, 22, 28, 34, 40, 46, 52, 58, or 64]
Enter the physical location of the device according to the number of vertical units from
the floor.

9 Prompt: HORIZ*ONTAL=
Enter: [1-21]

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 206

Enter the physical location of the device according to the slot number.
The system shows the configuration data entered for the processor.

10 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display process equip

Use this procedure to show the configuration for a selected processor.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying processor configuration.

Data tables

The system reads hardware configuration and status tables to show the configuration of a
processor. However, the system does not read SS7 data tables.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLA PROCES EQUIP

2 Prompt: SUBTYP*E=
Enter: [IPLK or IPUA]

3 Prompt: UNIT=
Enter: processor number

4 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

5 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 207

Configure hosts file

The IPLK and IPUA processors supports SCTP multi-homing and has two ethernet interfaces, A
and B. Each interface is assigned a unique IP address in the hosts file supporting four
destination transport addresses per processor. In other words, the destination multi-homed
endpoint supports a maximum of four interfaces. The IP interface on the IPLK processors
support M2PA virtual links and IPUA processors support M3UA.

Use the ASSIGN HOSTS FILE MMI to configure the following IP routing information for each IP
interface:

• Source IP address
• Subnet MASK
• Four network routes (optional)

In addition, the IP address of the default route is configured for each processor.

Use this procedure to assign a local IP address, netmask, default router, and network routes to
each IPLK processor using the HOSTS FILE MMI commands. The hosts file resides on the admin
disk and associates host names with a corresponding local IP address, netmask, default router,
and network routes.

Constraints

The following constraints apply to the IP interface feature:

• The IP address 127.0.0.1 is applicable for local loopback and it is preconfigured in the
hosts file.
• The hosts file MMI does not allow an IP address parameter in the range of 224.0.0.0 to
239.255.255.255 (reserved for multi-cast).
• The default router is optional, but if assigned, there can only be one for the processor.
The IP address of the default router is associated with one of the IP interfaces and
determines which IP interface to use when IP routing cannot determine where to send the
message. The default router prompt is not issued when the second IP interface is created.

Use the Change the host file procedure to change an existing default router.

Use the Display the host files procedure to display the parameters assigned to one more IP
interfaces.

Use the Delete hosts file procedure to delete all the parameters assigned to an IP interface.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 208

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

! ALERT
ALERT! Use the COPY ADMIN FILE MMI command to make a copy of the existing hosts file
before modifying it. Be careful when updating the hosts file with the new IP configurations.
Contact your next level of support if you have any problems.

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

Note: Collect the local IP addresses, netmask, and remote IP addresses before starting
the procedure. A default route is not required if all IPLK traffic stays within a single
subnet.

Copy admin file

1 Prompt: >
Enter: COPY ADMIN FILE

2 Prompt: R*EPLACE=
Enter: N

3 Prompt: S*OURCE=
Enter: HOSTS

4 Prompt: D*ESTINATION=
Enter: a destination file name

5 Prompt: S*OURCE=
Enter: <RETURN>

6 Prompt: V*ERIFY=
Enter: Y

Assign the hosts file

Note: After setting up the hosts file, you must remove and restore the affected
processors to pick up the new hosts file.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 209

7 Prompt: >
Enter: ASSIGN HOSTS FILE

8 Prompt: LOCAL*REMOTE*ENTITY=
Enter: [LOCAL, L, REMOTE, or R]
If you enter R or REMOTE, go to Step 16; otherwise, continue.

9 Prompt: LOCAL*IP*ENTITY=
Enter: [PROCESSOR, P, CCMALIAS, or A]
If you enter CCMALIAS or A, go to Step 17; otherwise, continue.

10 Prompt: PROC*SUB=
Enter: [CCM, IPLK, IPUA, or PXP]
If you enter CCM, go to Step 15.
If you enter IPLK, go to Step 11.
If you enter IPUA, go to Step 12.
If you enter PXP, go to Step 13.

11 Prompt: PROC*NUM=
Enter: [0-63]
Go to Step 14.

12 Prompt: PROCNUMBER=
Enter: [0-47]
Go to Step 14.

13 Prompt: PROCESSOR*NUM=
Enter: [0-11]
Enter the processor number for PXP.
Go to Step 15.

14 Prompt: PORT*ID=
Enter: [1 or 2]
Go to Step 17.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 210

15 Prompt: PAIR*ID=
Enter: [A or B]
A (displays the parameters of host file with pair ID A)
B (displays the parameters of host file with pair ID B)
Go to Step 17.

16 Prompt: REMOTE*IP*ENTITY=
Enter: [NTPSERVER or N]

17 Prompt: IP*ADDR=
Enter: IP address
Enter the IP address in the format of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where xxx is 0-255.
If you entered R in Step 8 or A in Step 9, go to Step 29; otherwise, continue.

18 Prompt: NET*ADDR=
Enter: netmask address
Enter the netmask address in the format of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where xxx is 0-255.

19 Prompt: DFT*ROUTER=
Enter: default router address
Enter the default router address in the format of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where xxx is 0-255 or
NONE.
If you entered CCM or PXP in Step 10, go to Step 29; otherwise, continue.

20 Prompt: NET*ROUTE1=
Enter: network route address
Enter the network route address in the format of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where xxx is 0-255.
If you enter NONE, go to Step 29; otherwise, continue.

21 Prompt: RT1*NTMSK=
Enter: network route netmask address
Enter the network route netmask address in the format of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where xxx
is 0-255.

22 Prompt: NET*ROUTE2=
Enter: network route address
Enter the network route address in the format of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where xxx is 0-255.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 211

If you enter NONE, go to Step 29; otherwise, continue.

23 Prompt: RT2*NTMSK=
Enter: network route netmask address
Enter the network route netmask address in the format of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where xxx
is 0-255.

24 Prompt: NET*ROUTE3=
Enter: network route address
Enter the network route address in the format of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where xxx is 0-255.
If you enter NONE, go to Step 28; otherwise, continue.

25 Prompt: RT3*NTMSK=
Enter: network route netmask address
Enter the network route netmask address in the format of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where xxx
is 0-255.

26 Prompt: NET*ROUTE4=
Enter: network route address
Enter the network route address in the format of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where xxx is 0-255.
If you enter NONE, go to Step 28; otherwise, continue.

27 Prompt: RT4*NTMSK=
Enter: network route netmask address
Enter the network route netmask address in the format of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where xxx
is 0-255.

28 Prompt: GWY*ROUTER=
Enter: network gateway router address
Enter the network gateway router address in the format of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where xxx
is 0-255.

29 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 212

The following message is displayed if you enter Y:

WARNING: TO ACTIVATE THE CHANGES ENTERED, RECYCLE THE AFFECTED
PROCESSORS.

30 To assign additional hosts file entries, go to Step 8; otherwise, continue.

31 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

Remove processor (noboot)

32 Prompt: >
Enter: REMOVE PROCES xxxx y z N
where xxxx is CCM, IPLK, IPUA, or PXP
If the COMMAND COMPLETED - UNIT Y CONFIGURATION SUCCESSFUL message is
displayed (where Y is the processor number and Z is the pair ID), manual removal of the
processor was successful.

Remove processor (boot)

33 Prompt: >
Enter: REMOVE PROCES xxxx y z B
where xxxx is CCM, IPLK, IPUA, or PXP
If the COMMAND COMPLETED - UNIT Y CONFIGURATION SUCCESSFUL message is
displayed (where Y is the processor number and Z is the pair ID), manual removal of the
processor was successful.

Restore processor

34 Prompt: >
Enter: RESTOR PROCES xxxx y z I
where xxxx is CCM, IPLK, IPUA, or PXP
If the COMMAND COMPLETED - UNIT Y CONFIGURATION SUCCESSFUL message is
displayed (where Y is the processor number and Z is the pair ID), restore of the
processor was successful. The COMM 88 IPR is issued.
To continue configuring SS7-IP interworking using M2PA, go to SS7 over IP using M2PA,
or refer to SS7-IP interworking order of input to see which procedure(s) to do next.
To continue configuring SS7-IP interworking using M3UA, go to SS7 over IP using M3UA,
or refer to SS7-IP interworking order of input to see which procedure(s) to do next.
END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 213

Change the host file

Use this procedure to procedure to change an existing default router.

Constraints

No constraints apply to changing the hosts file parameters.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

Note: Collect the local IP addresses, netmask, and remote IP addresses before starting
the procedure. A default route is not required if all IPLK traffic stays within a single
subnet.

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE HOSTS FILE

2 Prompt: LOCAL*REMOTE*ENTITY=
Enter: [LOCAL, L, REMOTE, or R]
If you enter REMOTE or R, go to Step 10; otherwise, continue.

3 Prompt: LOCAL*IP*ENTITY=
Enter: [PROCESSOR, P, CCMALIAS, or A]
If you enter CCMALIAS or A, the system shows the local IP address parameters; go to
Step 11.
Otherwise, continue.

4 Prompt: PROC*SUB=
Enter: [CCM, IPLK, IPUA, or PXP]
If you enter CCM, go to Step 9.
If you enter IPLK, go to Step 5.
If you enter IPUA, go to Step 6.
If you enter PXP, go to Step 7.

5 Prompt: PROC*NUM=
Enter: [0-63]
Go to Step 8.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 214

6 Prompt PROCNUMBER=
Enter: [0-47]
Go to Step 8.

7 Prompt: PROCESSOR*NUM=
Enter: [0-11]
Enter the processor number for the PXP.
Go to Step 9.

8 Prompt: PORT*ID=
Enter: [1 or 2]
Go to Step 12.

9 Prompt: PAIR*ID=
Enter: [A or B]
A (displays the parameters of host file with pair ID A)
B (displays the parameters of host file with pair ID B)
Go to Step 11.

10 Prompt: REMOTE*IP*ENTITY=
Enter: [NTPSERVER or N]
The system shows the remote IP address parameters.

Note: The IP address parameter in the range of 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255 is not

allowed as it is reserved for multi-cast.

11 Prompt: NEW*IP*ADDR=
Enter: IP address
Enter the new IP address in the format of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where xxx is 0-255.
If you entered R in Step 2 or A in Step 3, the system shows the IP address parameters,
go to Step 23; otherwise, continue.

12 Prompt: NEW*NET*ADDR=
Enter: netmask address
Enter the new netmask address in the format of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where xxx is 0-255.

13 Prompt: NEW*DFT*ROUTER=
Enter: default router address

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 215

Enter the new default router address in the format of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where xxx is
0-255.
If you entered CCM or PXP in Step 4, the system shows the local IP address parameters.
Go to Step 23; otherwise, continue.

14 Prompt: NEW*NET*ROUTE1=
Enter: new network route address
Enter the new network route address in the format of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where xxx is
0-255.

15 Prompt: NEW*RT1NTMSK=
Enter: new network route netmask address
Enter the new network route netmask address in the format of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where
xxx is 0-255.

16 Prompt: NEW*NET*ROUTE2=
Enter: new network route address
Enter the new network route address in the format of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where xxx is
0-255.

17 Prompt: NEW*RT2NTMSK=
Enter: new network route netmask address
Enter the new network route netmask address in the format of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where
xxx is 0-255.

18 Prompt: NEW*NET*ROUTE3=
Enter: new network route address
Enter the new network route address in the format of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where xxx is
0-255.

19 Prompt: NEW*RT3NTMSK=
Enter: new network route netmask address
Enter the new network route netmask address in the format of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where
xxx is 0-255.

20 Prompt: NEW*NET*ROUTE4=
Enter: new network route address
Enter the new network route address in the format of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where xxx is
0-255.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 216

21 Prompt: NEW*RT4NTMSK=
Enter: new network route netmask address
Enter the new network route netmask address in the format of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where
xxx is 0-255.

22 Prompt: NEW*GWY*ROUTER=
Enter: new network gateway router address
Enter the new network gateway router address in the format of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where
xxx is 0-255.

23 Prompt: EXECUTE <Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
If you entered CCM or PXP in Step 4 and Y in Step 22, the following message is
displayed:
WARNING: TO ACTIVATE THE CHANGES ENTERED, RECYCLE THE AFFECTED
PROCESSORS.

24 To change additional hosts file entries, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

25 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

Remove processor (noboot)

26 Prompt: >
Enter: REMOVE PROCES xxxx y z N
where xxx is CCM or PXP.
If the COMMAND COMPLETED - UNIT Y CONFIGURATION SUCCESSFUL message is
displayed (where Y is the processor number and Z is the pair ID), manual removal of the
processor was successful.

Remove processor (boot)

27 Prompt: >
Enter: REMOVE PROCES xxxx y z B
where xxx is CCM or PXP.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 217

If the COMMAND COMPLETED - UNIT Y CONFIGURATION SUCCESSFUL message is

displayed (where Y is the processor number and Z is the pair ID), manual removal of the
processor was successful.

Restore processor

28 Prompt: >
Enter: RESTOR PROCES xxxx y z I
where xxx is CCM or PXP.
If the COMMAND COMPLETED - UNIT Y CONFIGURATION SUCCESSFUL message is
displayed (where Y is the processor number and Z is the pair ID), manual removal of the
processor was successful. The COMM 88 IPR is issued.
To continue configuring SS7-IP interworking using M2PA, go to SS7 over IP using M2PA,
or refer to SS7-IP interworking order of input to see which procedure(s) to do next.
To continue configuring SS7-IP interworking using M3UA, go to SS7 over IP using M3UA,
or refer to SS7-IP interworking order of input to see which procedure(s) to do next.
END PROCEDURE

Display the host files

Use this procedure to display the parameters assigned to one more IP interfaces.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying the hosts file parameters.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLA HOSTS FILE

2 Prompt: LOCAL*REMOTE*ENTITY=
Enter: [LOCAL, L, REMOTE, R, or ALL]
If you enter ALL, the system shows the local IP address parameters. Go to Step 11.
If you enter LOCAL or L, go to Step 4.
Otherwise, go to Step 3.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 218

3 Prompt: REMOTE*IP*ENTITY=
Enter: [NTPSERVER, N, or ALL]
The system displays the host files parameters; go to Step 11.

4 Prompt: LOCAL*IP*ENTITY=
Enter: [PROCESSOR, P, CCMALIAS, A, or ALL]
If you enter ALL, the system displays the host files of all the processors; go to Step 11.
If you enter PROCESSOR or P, go to Step 5.
If you enter CCMALIAS or A, the system displays the host file parameters; go to Step 11.

5 Prompt: PROC*SUB=
Enter: [CCM, IPLK, IPUA, PXP, or ALL]
If you enter CCM, go to Step 10.
If you enter IPLK, go to Step 6.
If you enter IPUA, go to Step 7.
If you enter PXP, go to Step 8.
If you enter ALL, the system displays the host files parameters of all the processor
subtypes; go to Step 11.

6 Prompt: PROC*NUM=
Enter: [0-63 or ALL]
Enter a single, a range, list of values, or ALL for all the values.
If you enter a processor number, go to Step 9.
If you enter ALL, the system displays the host files parameters; go to Step 11.

7 Prompt PROCNUMBER=
Enter: [0-47 or ALL]
Enter a single, a range, list of values, or ALL for all the values.
If you enter a processor number, go to Step 9.
If you enter ALL, the system displays the host file parameters; go to Step 11.

8 Prompt: PROCESSOR*NUM=
Enter: [0-11]
Enter a single, a range, list of values, or ALL for all the values.
If you enter a processor number; go to Step 10.
If you enter ALL, the system displays the host files parameters; go to Step 11.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 219

9 Prompt: PORT*ID=
Enter: [1, 2, or BOTH]
The system displays the host file parameters, go to Step 11.

10 Prompt: PAIR*ID=
Enter: [A, B, or BOTH]
A (displays the parameters of host file with pair ID A)
B (displays the parameters of host file with pair ID B)
BOTH (displays the parameters of host file with pair ID A and B)
The system displays the host file parameters.

11 To display another hosts file information, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

12 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Delete hosts file

Use this procedure to delete parameters from the hosts file.

Constraints

No constraints apply to deleting the hosts file parameters.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

Note: Whenever changes are made to the hosts file, you must remove and restore the
affected processors to pick up the new hosts file.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: DELETE HOSTS FILE

2 Prompt: LOCAL*REMOTE*ENTITY=
Enter: [LOCAL, L, REMOTE, R, or ALL]
If you enter LOCAL or L, go to Step 3.
If you enter REMOTE or R, go to Step 10.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 220

If you enter ALL, the system shows the local and remote IP address parameters. Go to
Step 12.
The following message is displayed if you enter ALL:
WARNING: ALL THE USER PROVISIONED IP ADDRESSES WILL BE DELETED.

3 Prompt: LOCAL*IP*ENTITY=
Enter: [PROCESSOR, P, CCMALIAS, A, or ALL]
If you enter ALL, the system shows the local IP address parameters. Go to Step 12;
otherwise, continue.
The following message is displayed if you enter ALL:
WARNING: ALL THE USER PROVISIONED IP ADDRESSES WILL BE DELETED.

4 Prompt: PROC*SUB=
Enter: [CCM, IPLK, IPUA, PXP, or ALL]
If you enter CCM, go to Step 9.
If you enter IPLK, go to Step 5.
If you enter IPUA, go to Step 6.
If you enter PXP, go to Step 7.
If you enter ALL, the system shows the IP address parameters of the IPLK and IPUA. Go
to Step 12.

5 Prompt: PROC*NUM=
Enter: [0-63]
Enter processor number for IPLK. Enter single, range, list of values, or ALL for all the
values.
Go to Step 8.

6 Prompt PROCNUMBER=
Enter: [0-47]
Enter processor number for IPUA. Enter single, a range, list of values, or ALL for all the
values.
Go to Step 8.

7 Prompt: PROCESSOR*NUM=
Enter: [0-11]
Enter a single, a range, list of values, or ALL for all the values.
Go to Step 9.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 221

8 Prompt: PORT*ID=
Enter: [1, 2, or BOTH]
The system shows the IP address parameters for the IPLK and IPUA. Go to Step 11.

9 Prompt: PAIR*ID=
Enter: [A, B, or BOTH]
A (displays the parameters of host file with pair ID A)
B (displays the parameters of host file with pair ID B)
BOTH (displays the parameters of host file with pair ID A and B)
The system shows the IP address of the CCM and PXP.
Go to Step 11.

10 Prompt: REMOTE*IP*ENTITY=
Enter: [NTPSERVER, N, or ALL]
The system shows the IP address parameters assigned to NTP server.

11 Prompt: EXECUTE <Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (executes the changes)
N (does not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (returns to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (does not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
The following message is displayed if you enter Y:
WARNING: TO ACTIVATE THE CHANGES ENTERED, RECYCLE THE AFFECTED
PROCESSORS.

12 To delete additional hosts file entries, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

13 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

Remove processor (noboot)

14 Prompt: >
Enter: REMOVE PROCES xxxx y z N
where xxxx is CCM, IPLK, IPUA, or PXP
If the COMMAND COMPLETED - UNIT Y CONFIGURATION SUCCESSFUL message is
displayed (where Y is the processor number and Z is the pair ID), manual removal of the
processor was successful.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 222

Remove processor (boot)

15 Prompt: >
Enter: REMOVE PROCES xxxx y z B
where xxxx is CCM, IPLK, IPUA, or PXP
If the COMMAND COMPLETED - UNIT Y CONFIGURATION SUCCESSFUL message is
displayed (where Y is the processor number and Z is the pair ID), manual removal of the
processor was successful.

Restore processor

16 Prompt: >
Enter: RESTOR PROCES xxxx y z I
where xxxx is CCM, IPLK, IPUA, or PXP
If the COMMAND COMPLETED - UNIT Y CONFIGURATION SUCCESSFUL message is
displayed (where Y is the processor number and Z is the pair ID), restore of the
processor was successful. The COMM 88 IPR is issued.
To continue configuring SS7-IP interworking using M2PA, go to SS7 over IP using M2PA,
or refer to SS7-IP interworking order of input to see which procedure(s) to do next.
To continue configuring SS7-IP interworking using M3UA, go to SS7 over IP using M3UA,
or refer to SS7-IP interworking order of input to see which procedure(s) to do next.
END PROCEDURE

SS7 over IP using M2PA

Use the following procedures to set up the links for SS7 over IP using M2PA.

• Assign links to a link set

• Assign IP connectivity
• Change IP link parameters
• Change IP system parameters
• Display IP system parameters
• Activate the IP link

Use the following procedure when you are setting up multiple links with the same or similar
parameters.

• Copy IP link parameters

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 223

• Display CCS IP link parameters

Use the following procedure to display SCTP status for IPLK:

• Display the SCTP association status of IP link

Assign links to a link set

Use this procedure to provision a new signaling link and associate the link with a link set.

Constraints

No constraints apply to assigning IP connection parameters.

Data tables

The following data table is changed when IP connection parameters are assigned:

• IP connections (ATY1A)

BEGIN PROCEDURE

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

Note: Use the Assign link set procedure if a new link is being configured.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: ASSIGN CCS LINK

2 Prompt: LS*NAMNUM=
Enter: link set name or number
The system shows the links in the link set.

3 Prompt: SLC=
Enter: [0-15]

4 Prompt: L*INK=
Enter: [0-3071]
If the issued link set is not a combined one, go to Step 6; otherwise, continue.

5 Prompt: CSLS=
Enter: signaling link selection

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 224

6 Prompt: PSLS=
Enter: signaling link selection

7 Prompt: RPSUB=
Enter: IPLK
Enter the new routing processor subtype.

8 Prompt: RPNUM=
Enter: [0-63]
Enter the new routing processor number.

9 Prompt: ACT*IVATE=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y, or N]
YES or Y (request activation; use this option if you are not going to change
any of the IP parameters later)
NO or N (do not request activation; use this option if you are going to change
any of the IP parameters later)
The system displays the parameters.

10 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Assign IP connectivity
The following constraints apply while assigning the IPCONN:
• The destination IP address at each end should contain the IP address of the other
end.
• When links on each end are being configured, one side uses the well-known port
number for M2PA (3565) as the source port while the other uses a uniquely chosen
local port number as its source port.
• Likewise, the end with the well-known port number for M2PA as its source port
contains the other end’s uniquely chosen local port number as its destination port.
The end with the uniquely chosen local port number for its source port uses the
well-known port number for M2PA as its destination port.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 225

Data tables

The following data table is changed when IP connection parameters are assigned:

• IP connections (ATY1A)

Note: When you configure IP links, the link parameters should remain as defaulted.

BEGIN PROCEDURE

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: ASSIGN CCS IPCONN

2 Prompt: LINK=
Enter: [0-3071]

3 Prompt: ADESTIPA*DDRESS=
Enter: destination IP address
Enter the IP address in the format of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where xxx is 0-255.

4 Prompt: ADESTP*ORT=
Enter: [1-65535]

5 Prompt: ASOURCEP*ORT=
Enter: [1-65535]

6 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Change IP link parameters

Use this procedure to change IP link parameters.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 226

Constraints

No constraint applies to changing the IP link parameters.

Data tables

The following data tables are affected when IP system parameters are changed:

• Link configuration data (ATY49)

• Marginal link performance threshold (ATW49)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

Note: The link has to be assigned to IPLK. To assign a link, use the Assign links to a link
set procedure.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE CCS IPLKPA

2 Prompt: L*INK=
Enter: [0-3071]
Enter the link ID.

3 Prompt: PARAGROUP=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1 (M2PA); perform the subsection Change MTP2 user peer-peer adaptation.
2 (SCTP timing); perform the subsection Change SCTP timing parameters.
3 (SCTP sizing); perform the subsection Change SCTP sizing parameters.
4 (congestion); perform the subsection Change congestion level parameters.
5 (traffic measurement marginal threshold); perform the subsection Change
marginal threshold parameters.

Change MTP2 user peer-peer adaptation

4 Prompt: T1RE*ADY=
Enter: T1 timer ready parameter

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 227

5 Prompt: M2PA*T2=
Enter: T2 status alignment parameter

6 Prompt: T3ALGN=
Enter: T3 status proving parameter

7 Prompt: T4NO*RMAL=
Enter: T4 normal proving alignment state timer parameter

8 Prompt: T4EM*RG=
Enter: T4 emergency proving alignment state timer parameter

9 Prompt: M2PAT*6=
Enter: T6 peer to be congested timer parameter

10 Prompt: T7DEL*ACK=
Enter: T7 user data acknowledgment delay timer parameter

11 Prompt: SRTT=
Enter: maximum SRTT value allowed
The system shows the timer parameters.

12 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
This subsection is complete; exit the procedure.

Change SCTP timing parameters

13 Prompt: SCTP*T1=
Enter: T1 initialization parameter

14 Prompt: SCTPT*2=
Enter: T2 shutdown parameter

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 228

15 Prompt: B*DELAY=
Enter: delay allowed for bundling

16 Prompt: IDLE*TIMER=
Enter: delay allowed for RTT calculations timer parameter

17 Prompt: S*TIMER=
Enter: delay allowed for sending SACK timer parameter

18 Prompt: COO*KIE=
Enter: value suggesting an increase in the cookie life span

19 Prompt: MAXHB=
Enter: maximum number of heartbeat misses
The system shows the SCTP timing parameters.

20 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
This subsection is complete; exit the procedure.

Change SCTP sizing parameters

21 Prompt: MIN*SZ=
Enter: minimum bundling message size

22 Prompt: I*SZ=
Enter: inbound message buffer size

23 Prompt: O*SZ=
Enter: outbound message buffer size

24 Prompt: SS*T=
Enter: SCTP slow start threshold value

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 229

25 Prompt: CWD=
Enter: congestion control window size
The system shows the SCTP sizing parameters.

26 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
This subsection is complete; exit the procedure.

Change congestion level parameters

Note: The system displays the prompts in Step 27 through Step 35 only if the congestion
parameter for the logical network is set to congestion with levels.

27 Prompt: TXL1AB*AT=
Enter: maximum L1 buffers to transmit congestion abatement

28 Prompt: TXL1ON*SET=
Enter: maximum L1 buffers to transmit congestion onset

29 Prompt: TXL1DI*SCARD
Enter: maximum L1 buffers to transmit congestion discard

30 Prompt: TXL2AB*AT=
Enter: maximum L2 buffers to transmit congestion abatement

31 Prompt: TXL2ON*SET=
Enter: maximum L2 buffers to transmit congestion onset

32 Prompt: TXL2DI*SCARD=
Enter: maximum L2 buffers to transmit congestion discard

33 Prompt: TXL3AB*AT=
Enter: maximum L3 buffers to transmit congestion abatement

34 Prompt: TXL3ON*SET=
Enter: maximum L3 buffers to transmit congestion onset

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 230

35 Prompt: TXL3DI*SCARD=
Enter: maximum L3 buffers to transmit congestion discard

Note: The system displays the prompts in Step 36 and Step 37 only if the congestion
parameter for the logical network is set to congestion with priority.

36 Prompt: RXABA*T=
Enter: maximum buffers to receive congestion abatement

37 Prompt: RXONSE*T=
Enter: maximum buffers to receive congestion onset

38 Prompt: RXDISCARD=
Enter: maximum buffers to receive congestion message discard
The system shows the congestion level parameters.

39 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
This subsection is complete; exit the procedure.

Change marginal threshold parameters

40 Prompt: LINKOO*S=
Enter: M2PA link out-of-service duration

41 Prompt: ASSORETRAN=
Enter: SCTP associated retransmitted chunks
The system shows the traffic measurement marginal threshold parameters.

42 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 231

This subsection is complete; exit the procedure.

END PROCEDURE

Display the SCTP association status of IP link

Use this procedure to display the SCTP association status of the M2PA links assigned to an
IPLK.

Constraints

The IPLK processor must be configured and active.

Data tables

The system retrieves data from the MTP link set number (Y45) data table.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

Note: Perform the Display CCS link status before performing this procedure.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: STATUS SCTP ASSOC

2 Prompt: PRC*SUBT=
Enter: IPLK

3 Prompt: IPLK*PRC*NUM=
Enter: [0-63]
Enter the processor number.

4 Prompt: REF*RESH=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y, N, R, or NR]
If you enter N, NO, or NR, go to Step 6; otherwise, continue.
The default is NO.

5 Prompt: FREQ*UENC=
Enter: [5-255]
The default is 5 seconds.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 232

6 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

7 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Copy IP link parameters

Use this procedure to copy IP link parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to copying IP link parameters.

Data tables

The following data tables are affected when IP system parameters are copied:

• Link configuration data (ATY49)

• Marginal link performance threshold (ATW49)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

Note: The link has to be assigned to IPLK. To assign a link, use the Assign links to a link
set procedure.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: COPY CCS IPLKPA

2 Prompt: L*INK=
Enter: [0-3071]

3 Prompt: LINKNODEST=
Enter: destination link ID

4 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 233

Display CCS IP link parameters

Use this procedure to display IP link parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying IP link parameters.

Data tables

The system retrieves IP connection parameters from the following data tables:

• Link configuration data (ATY49)

• Marginal link performance threshold (ATW49)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

Note: The link has to be assigned to IPLK. To assign a link, use the Assign links to a link
set procedure.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLAY CCS IPLKPA

2 Prompt: L*INK
Enter: [0-3071]

3 Prompt: DPARAGROUP=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
0 (ALL groups)
1 (M2PA)
2 (SCTP timing)
3 (SCTP sizing)
4 (congestion)
5 (TMM threshold)

4 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

5 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 234

Change IP system parameters

Use this procedure to change IP system parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to changing the IP system parameters.

Data tables

The following data table is affected when IP system parameters are changed:

• IP system parameter (ATY1C)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE CCS IPSYSP
The system displays the parameters.

2 Prompt: WIN*SIZE=
Enter: advertised receiver window size

3 Prompt: MEM*ORY=
Enter: total memory allocated for the SCTP stack

4 Prompt: INIT*RTO=
Enter: initial retransmission timeout

5 Prompt: MIN*RTO=
Enter: minimum retransmission timeout

6 Prompt: MAX*RTO=
Enter: maximum retransmission timeout

7 Prompt: COOK*LIF=
Enter: valid cookie life
The system shows the IP system parameters.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 235

8 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display IP system parameters

Use this procedure to display IP system parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying the IP system parameters.

Data tables

The system retrieves IP system parameters from the following data table:

• IP system parameters (ATYIC)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLA CCS IPSYSP

2 Verify that the system shows the IP system parameters.

END PROCEDURE

Activate the IP link

Use this procedure to activate the link (if it is not already active) after you are satisfied with
all the settings.

BEGIN PROCEDURE

Note: The link must be deactivated before activating it.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: DEACTI CCS LINK

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 236

2 Prompt: L*INK=
Enter: link ID
The following message appears when the link is deactivated:
DISK ENTRY AND PROCESSOR(S) UPDATED

3 Prompt: L*INK=
Enter: <CTRL+A>

4 Prompt: >
Enter: ACTIVA CCS LINK

5 Prompt: L*INK=
Enter: link ID

6 Prompt: DISTRIBUTE=
Enter: Y

7 Prompt: L*INK=
Enter: <CTRL+A>
END PROCEDURE

SS7 over IP using M3UA

The M3UA adaptation layer provides transport of MTP3-user messages between signaling
endpoints in the SS7 network and application servers in the IP networks.

An application server consists of one or more ASPs. In the initial phase, one ASP serves one
application server. A subsequent phase will allow an ASP to serve one or more application
servers. An application server is a logical entity serving a specific set of SS7 traffic identified
by a routing key. The routing key is DPC initially. An application server process serves as an
active or backup process of an application server.

The M3UA at the 5070 SSG uses the existing SCTP software as the lower layer protocol,
allowing the 5070 SSG to function as the signaling gateway between the SS7 and IP networks.

The M3UA provides the following features:

• The transfer of all SS7 MTP3-user part messages

• The seamless operation of MTP3-user protocol peers
• The asynchronous reporting of status changes to management

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 237

The following topics provide information about SS7 over IP using M3UA:

• Application server
• Display the SCTP association status of IPUA
• UIP parameters

Application server
Use the following procedures when initially provisioning application server parameters:

• Assign an application server

• Assign an application server process
• Activate an application server
• Activate an application server process

Use the following procedures for ongoing administration and maintenance of the application
servers:

• Change an application server

• Delete an application server
• Display an application server
• Change an application server process
• Delete an application server process
• Display an application server process
• Deactivate an application server
• Display status of an application server
• Deactivate an application server process
• Display status of an application server process
• Display the SCTP association status of IPUA

Assign an application server

Use this procedure to provision attributes of an application server (AS).

Constraints

No constraints apply to assigning an application server.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 238

Data tables

When a new application server is added to the database, the application server (U45) and the
application server name (V45) data tables are updated.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: ASSIGN CCS AS

2 Prompt: ASNAME=
Enter: application server name to be assigned
Enter application server names of 1-16 alphanumeric characters.

3 Prompt: TRAFF*MODE=
Enter: [O, L, or B]
O (override)
L (load sharing)
B (broadcast)
If you enter O, go to Step 6.
If you enter B, go to Step 5.
If you enter L, go to Step 4.

4 Prompt: ACTTHRESH=
Enter: [1-8]
Enter the active threshold number.

5 Prompt: NOTTHRESH=
Enter: [1-8]
Enter the notify threshold number.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 239

6 Prompt: INB*AS=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y, or N]
YES or Y (allow a message to be received from another application server)
NO or N (do not allow a message to be received from another application
server)
Enter the inbound application server allowed flag.

7 Prompt: OUT*AS=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y, or N]
YES or Y (allow a message to be sent to another application server)
NO or N (do not allow a message to be sent to another application server)
Enter the outbound application server allowed flag.

8 Prompt: SUP*DUNA=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y, or N]
YES or Y (suppress DUNA messages from being sent to this AS)
NO or N (do not suppress DUNA messages)
Enter a suppress DUNA broadcast flag.

9 Prompt: PRE*DUNA=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y, or N]
YES or Y (convert a DRST message to a DUNA message)
NO or N (do not convert a DRST message to a DUNA message)
Enter a preventive DUNA flag.

10 Prompt: INS*TFR=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y, or N]
YES or Y (send a TFR due to insufficient active ASPs)
NO or N (do not send a TFR due to insufficient active ASPs)
Enter a insufficient TFR flag.

11 Prompt: DEF*ACTREQ=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y, or N]
YES or Y (use default activation request)
NO or N (do not use default activation request)
Enter the default activation request flag.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 240

12 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Assign an application server process

Use this procedure to provision an application server process (ASP) and associate it with an
application server (AS). The AS is updated with the ASP ID after the creation of the ASP.

The maximum number of ASPs that can be assigned to an IPUA processor is eight, and the
maximum number of ASPs that can be assigned to an AS is eight in the UIP system parameter
database.

Constraints

These constraints apply to adding an application server process:

• The application server name or ID that is being used must exist in the application server
database.
• The IPUA ID must be in the allowed IPUA processor range, but not necessarily equipped.

Data tables

The following data tables are updated when a new application server process is added:

• Application server process (U34)

• Application server process name (V34)
• Application server (U45)
• M3UA UIP parameter (V49)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 241

1 Prompt: >
Enter: ASSIGN CCS ASP

2 Prompt: ASPNAME=
Enter: application server process name to be assigned
Enter application server process names of 1-16 characters.

3 Prompt: AS*NAMENUM=
Enter: application server name or number
Enter application server name of 1-16 characters or number.

4 Prompt: RPNUM=
Enter: [0-47]
Enter the routing processor number.

5 Prompt: ACT*IVATE=
Enter: [Y or N]
Enter the activation request of the processor.

6 Prompt: ADESTIPA*DDRESS=
Enter: destination IP address

7 Prompt: ADESTP*ORT=
Enter: [1-65535]
Enter the destination port number.

8 Prompt: ASOURCEP*ORT=
Enter: [1-65535]
Enter the source port number.

9 Prompt: RESTART=
Enter: [Y or N]
Enter the activation request of the application server.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 242

10 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Activate an application server

Use this procedure to set the activation request per logical application server parameter in an
application server.

Constraints

The application server name or ID must exists in the AS database.

Data tables

The system reads and updates the AS (U45) data table.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: ACTIVATE CCS AS

2 Prompt: AS*ACT=
Enter: application server to be activated
Enter the application server names or ID of 1-16 characters.

3 Prompt: LAS ID=

Enter: [0-7]
Enter the logical application server ID.
Enter an ID or ALL for all the logical application server IDs.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 243

4 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Activate an application server process

Use this procedure to activate the application server process in all logical application servers
(LAS) or the ASP assigned to a particular logical application server.

Constraints

The ASP name or ID identified must be created.

Data tables

The system reads and updates the ASP (U34) data table.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: ACTIVATE CCS ASP

2 Prompt: ASP*NAMEID=
Enter: application server process to be activated
Enter application server process names of 1-16 characters or an ID between the range
1-384.

3 Prompt: LAS_ID=
Enter: [0-7]
Enter the logical application server ID.
Enter an ID or ALL for all the logical application server IDs.

4 Prompt: DOWN_LD=
Enter: [Y or N]
Enter download ASP UIP parameters.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 244

5 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Change an application server

Use this procedure to change the attributes of an existing application server.

Constraints

The application server name or ID must exists in the AS database.

Data tables

The application server (U45) and the application server name (V45) data tables are updated.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE CCS AS

2 Prompt: ASCHANGE=
Enter: application server name or ID to be changed
Enter application server name of 1-16 alphanumeric characters or ID.

3 Prompt: NASN*AME=
Enter: new application server name
Enter application server name of 1-16 alphanumeric characters.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 245

4 Prompt: TRAFF*MODE=
Enter: [O, L, or B]
O (override)
L (load sharing)
B (broadcast)
If you enter O, go to Step 7.
If you enter B, go to Step 6.
If you enter L, go to Step 5.

5 Prompt: ACTTHRESH=
Enter: [1-8]
Enter the active threshold number.

6 Prompt: NOTTHRESH=
Enter: [1-8]
Enter the notify threshold number.

7 Prompt: INB*AS=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y, or N]
YES or Y (allow a message to be received from another application server)
NO or N (do not allow a message to be received from another application
server)
Enter the inbound application server allowed flag.

8 Prompt: OUT*AS=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y, or N]
YES or Y (allow a message to be sent to another application server)
NO or N (do not allow a message to be sent to another application server)
Enter the outbound application server allowed flag.

9 Prompt: SUP*DUNA=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y, or N]
YES or Y (suppress DUNA messages from being sent to this AS)
NO or N (do not suppress DUNA messages)
Enter a suppress DUNA broadcast flag.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 246

10 Prompt: PRE*DUNA=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y, or N]
YES or Y (convert a DRST message to a DUNA message)
NO or N (do not convert a DRST message to a DUNA message)
Enter a preventive DUNA flag.

11 Prompt: INS*TFR=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y, or N]
YES or Y (send a TFR due to insufficient active ASPs)
NO or N (do not send a TFR due to insufficient active ASPs)
Enter a insufficient TFR flag.

12 Prompt: DEF*ACTREQ=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y, or N]
YES or Y (use default activation request)
NO or N (do not use default activation request)
Enter the default activation request flag.

13 Prompt: ACT*REQLASK=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y, or N]
YES or Y (use activation request per LAS parameter)
NO or N (do not use activation request per LAS parameter)
Enter the activation request per logical application server.

14 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Delete an application server

Use this procedure to delete an application server.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 247

Constraints

These constraints apply to adding an application server process:

• The application server name or ID that is being used should exist in the application server
database.
• ASPs assigned to the particular AS should be deleted first before deleting the AS.
• If an AS is assigned to the route set master, you cannot delete the last ASP assigned to the
AS unless you delete the AS assignment to the route set master.

Data tables

The application server (U45) and the application server name (V45) data tables are updated.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

Note: Delete the ASPs assigned to the AS before performing this procedure.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: DELETE CCS AS

2 Prompt: ASDEL=
Enter: application server to be deleted
Enter application server names or IDs of 1-16 characters.

3 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 248

Display an application server

Use this procedure to display the parameters of an application server and its assigned ASPs.

Constraints

No constraints apply for displaying an application server.

Data tables

The system reads the application server (U45) and the application server name (V45) data
table to show the data.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLA CCS AS

2 Prompt: ASDISP=
Enter: application server to be displayed
Enter application server names or ID of 1-16 characters.
Enter a single name, ID, or ALL for all the application server names and IDs.
If you enter name or ID, go to Step 4; otherwise, continue.

3 Prompt: DIS*ORD=
Enter: [N or I]
N (AS name order)
I (AS ID order)
Enter the application server display order.

4 Prompt: FORM*AT=
Enter: [B or D]
B (brief format)
D (detailed format)

5 To display another application server name or ID, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

6 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 249

Change an application server process

Use this procedure to change the attributes for an application server process (ASP) and
associate it with an application server (AS).

Constraints

These constraints apply to changing an application server process:

• The application server process name or ID must exists in the ASP database.
• The application server name or ID that is being used must exist in the AS database.
• The IPUA ID must be in the configured IPUA processor range, but not necessarily equipped.

Data tables

The following data tables are updated when a new application server process is changed:

• Application server process (U34)

• Application server process name (V34)
• Application server (U45)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE CCS ASP

2 Prompt: ASP_NAMID=
Enter: application server process name or ID to be changed
Enter application server process names of 1-16 characters or the ASP ID.

3 Prompt: ASPNAME=
Enter: new application server process
Enter application server process names of 1-16 characters.

4 Prompt: AS*NAMEID=
Enter: application server name or ID
Enter application server names of 1-16 characters or the AS ID.

5 Prompt: RPNUM=
Enter: [0-47]

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 250

Enter the routing processor number.

6 Prompt: ACT*IVATE=
Enter: [Y or N]
Enter the activation request of the processor.

7 Prompt: ADESTIPA*DDRESS=
Enter: destination IP address

8 Prompt: ADESTP*ORT=
Enter: [1-65535]
Enter the destination port number.

9 Prompt: ASOURCEP*ORT=
Enter: [1-65535]
Enter the source port number.

10 Prompt: RESTART=
Enter: [Y or N]
Enter the activation request of the application server.

11 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Delete an application server process

Use this procedure to delete an application server process.

Constraints

These constraints apply to deleting an application server process:

• The application server process name or ID must exist in the ASP database.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 251

Data tables

The following data tables are updated when a new application server process is changed:

• Application server process (U34)

• Application server process name (V34)
• Application server (U45)
• M3UA UIP parameter (V49)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: DELETE CCS ASP

2 Prompt: ASPNAMID=
Enter: application server process name or ID to be deleted
Enter application server names or IDs of 1-16 characters.

3 Prompt: RESTART=
Enter: [Y or N]
Enter the activation request of the application server.

4 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 252

Display an application server process

Use this procedure to display the parameters of an application server process and its assigned
ASPs.

Constraints

The application server process name or ID must exist in the ASP database.

Data tables

The system reads the ASP (U34) and ASP name (V34) data tables to show the data.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLA CCS ASP

2 Prompt: ASPDISP=
Enter: application server process name or ID to be displayed
Enter application server process names or ID of 1-16 characters.
Enter a single name, ID, or ALL for all the application server process names and IDs.
If you enter name or ID, go to Step 5; otherwise, continue.
<RETURN> to continue.

3 Prompt: PROCID=
Enter: [0-47]
Enter the processor number. Enter a single number, list, range, or ALL for all the
processor numbers.

4 Prompt: DIS*ORD=
Enter: [N or I]
N (ASP name order)
I (ASP ID order)
P (Proc ID order)
Enter the application server process display order.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 253

5 Prompt: FORM*AT=
Enter: [B or D]
B (brief format)
D (detailed format)
Enter the application server process display format.

6 To display another application server name or ID, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

7 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Deactivate an application server

Use this procedure to reset the activation request per logical application server parameter in
an application server.

Constraints

The application server name or ID must exist and be activated in the AS database.

Data tables

The system reads and updates the AS (U45) data table.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DEACTIVATE CCS AS

2 Prompt: AS*DEACT=
Enter: application server to be deactivated
Enter application server names or ID of 1-16 characters.

3 Prompt: LAS ID=

Enter: [0-7]
Enter the logical application server ID.
Enter an ID or ALL for all the logical application server IDs.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 254

4 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display status of an application server

Use this procedure to display the status for one or more logical application servers in an
application server and the ASPs in a particular logical application server.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying the status of the application server.

Data tables

The system reads the AS (U45) and AS name (V45) data tables to display the status.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: STATUS CCS AS

2 Prompt: AS*STAT=
Enter: application server to be displayed
Enter application server names or ID of 1-16 characters.
Enter a single name, ID, or ALL for all the application server names and IDs.
If you enter name or ID, go to Step 4; otherwise, continue.

3 Prompt: DIS*ORD=
Enter: [N or I]
N (AS name order)
I (AS ID order)
Enter the application server display order.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 255

4 Prompt: REF*RESH=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y, N, R, or NR]
YES, Y, or R (allow the refresh required flag)
NO, N, or NR (do not allow the refresh required flag)
If you enter N, NO, or NR, go to Step 6; the AS status is displayed. Otherwise, continue.
Enter the refresh flag.

5 Prompt: FREQ*UENC=
Enter: [5-240]
Enter the refresh frequency in seconds.

6 To display the status of another application server name or ID, go to Step 2; otherwise,
continue.

7 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Deactivate an application server process

Use this procedure to deactivate the application server process in all logical application
servers (LAS) or the ASP assigned to a particular logical application server.

Constraints

The ASP name or ID must exist and be activated in the ASP database.

Data tables

The system reads and updates the ASP (U34) data table.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DEACTIVATE CCS ASP

2 Prompt: ASP*NAMEID=
Enter: application server process to be activated
Enter application server process names of 1-16 characters or an ID between the range
1-384.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 256

3 Prompt: LAS_ID=
Enter: [0-7]
Enter the logical application server ID.
Enter an ID or ALL for all the logical application server IDs.

4 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display status of an application server process

Use this procedure to display the status of the assigned application server process in all logical
application servers.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying the status of the application server process.

Data tables

The system reads the ASP (U34) and ASP name (V34) data tables to display the status.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: STATUS CCS ASP

2 Prompt: ASP*NAMID=
Enter: application server process name or ID to be displayed
Enter application server process names or ID of 1-16 characters.
Enter a single name, ID, or ALL for all the application server process names and IDs.
If you enter ALL, go to Step 4.
If you enter ASP name or ID, go to Step 5.
<RETURN> to continue.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 257

3 Prompt: PROCID=
Enter: [0-47]
Enter the processor number. Enter a single number, range, list, or ALL for all the
processor numbers.

4 Prompt: DIS*ORD=
Enter: [N or I]
N (ASP name order)
I (ASP ID order)
P (Proc ID order)
Enter the application server process display order.

5 Prompt: REF*RESH=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y, N, R, or NR]
YES, Y, or R (allow the refresh required flag)
NO, N, or NR (do not allow the refresh required flag)
If you enter N, NO, or NR, go to Step 7; the ASP status is displayed. Otherwise,
continue.
Enter the refresh flag.

6 Prompt: FREQ*UENC=
Enter: [5-240]
Enter the refresh frequency in seconds.

7 To display the status of another application server process name or ID, go to Step 2;
otherwise, continue.

8 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Display the SCTP association status of IPUA

Use this procedure to display the SCTP association status of the ASPs assigned to an IPUA.

Constraints

The IPUA processor must be configured and active.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 258

Data tables

The system retrieves data from the MTP link set number (Y45) data table.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: STATUS SCTP ASSOC

2 Prompt: PRC*SUBT=
Enter: IPUA

3 Prompt: IPUA*PRC*NUM=
Enter: [0-47]
Enter the processor number.

4 Prompt: REF*RESH=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y, N, R, or NR]
If you enter N, NO, or NR, go to Step 6; otherwise, continue.
The default is NO.

5 Prompt: FREQ*UENC=
Enter: [5-255]
The default is 5 seconds.

6 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

7 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

UIP parameters
Use the following procedure when initially provisioning UIP parameters:

• Audit UIP database

Use the following procedures only if you must change the default UIP settings.

• Change UIP parameters

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 259

• Change UIP system parameters

• Change UIP timer

Use the following procedures for ongoing administration and maintenance of the UIP
parameters:

• Copy UIP parameters

• Display UIP parameters
• Display UIP system parameters
• Display UIP timer

Audit UIP database

Use this procedure to audit the UIP database.

Constraints

No constraints apply to audit the UIP database.

Data tables

The system displays audit processing messages during audit execution and an execution
summary at the end of the audit. The audit is performed on the information in the AS, ASP,
and M3UA UIP data tables.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

! ALERT
ALERT! Contact your next level of support before changing any UIP default settings.

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: AUDIT UIP DATABA
The following message is displayed:

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 260

Before executing AUDIT UIP DATABASE, execute AUDIT MTP DATABASE

2 Prompt: SUMMARY ONLY=

Enter: [Y*ES or N*O]
The default value is N.
If you enter N or <RETURN>, go to Step 3.
If you enter Y, the following message is displayed:

**************************************************
* *
* SS7 UIP DATABASE AUDIT *
* *
**************************************************

INITIALIZING STATISTICS
STATISTICAL SUMMARY
===================
+-------------------------------------------------------------------+
| | | Utilization | Audit Results |
| File | Entity Set | Max. Total %Full | Error Warn Fixed |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------+
| ATU45 | AS | 129 4 3.1% | |
| ATV45 | AS Name | 129 4 3.1% | |
| ATU34 | ASP | 384 7 1.8% | |
| ATV34 | ASP Name | 384 7 1.8% | |
| ATU31 | UIP Timers | 3 3 100.0% | |
| ATY51 | Route Set Mster | 600 4 0.6% | |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------+
| Totals | 1629 29 1.7% | N/A N/A N/A |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------+
THIS IS A SUMMARY OF DATABASE UTILIZATION.

THE AUDIT WAS NOT EXECUTED.

3 Prompt: REPAIR PROMPT=

Enter: [Y*ES or N*O]
The default value is N.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 261

The following message is displayed:

**************************************************
* *
* SS7 UIP DATABASE AUDIT *
* *
**************************************************

INITIALIZING STATISTICS

CHECKING AS TABLES

CHECKING ASP TABLES

CHECKING ROUTE SET MASTER TABLE

AUDIT UIP DATABASE : checkpoint at 05/11/06 04:23:34.8

Successful Checkpoint at: 05/11/06 04:23:34.8

STATISTICAL SUMMARY
===================
+-------------------------------------------------------------------+
| | | Utilization | Audit Results |
| File | Entity Set | Max. Total %Full | Error Warn Fixed |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------+
| ATU45 | AS | 129 4 3.1% | 0 0 0 |
| ATV45 | AS Name | 129 4 3.1% | 0 0 0 |
| ATU34 | ASP | 384 7 1.8% | 0 0 0 |
| ATV34 | ASP Name | 384 7 1.8% | 0 0 0 |
| ATU31 | UIP Timers | 3 3 100.0% | 0 0 0 |
| ATY51 | Route Set Mster | 600 4 0.6% | 0 0 0 |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------+
| Totals | 1629 29 1.7% | 0 0 0 |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------+
YOUR DATABASE IS VERY GOOD

4 Verify that the following message appears:

COMMAND COMPLETED
END PROCEDURE

Change UIP parameters

Use this procedure to change the UIP parameters for an ASP.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 262

Constraints

No constraints apply to changing the IPUA parameters.

Data tables

The system updates the M3UA UIP parameter (V49) data table.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE CCS UIPPAR

2 Prompt: ASP*NAMNUM=
Enter: application server process name or number
Enter an application server process name of 1-16 characters or an ID between the range
1-384.

3 Prompt: PARAGROUP=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1 (SCTP timing); go to Step 4.
2 (SCTP sizing); go to Step 11.
3 (Congestion); go to Step 16.
4 (Traffic measurement marginal threshold); go to Step 28.
5 (All the above groups); go to Step 4.
Enter the parameter group. The parameter group is displayed.

SCTP timing parameters

4 Prompt: SCTP*T1=
Enter: [0-65535]
Enter the SCTP timer T1.

5 Prompt: SCTP*T2=
Enter: [0-65535]
Enter the SCTP timer T2.

6 Prompt: B*DELAY=
Enter: [0-65535]

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 263

Enter the bundle delay.

7 Prompt: IDLE*TIMER=
Enter: [0-65535]

8 Prompt: S*TIMER=
Enter: [0-65535]
Enter the sack timer.

9 Prompt: COO*KIE=
Enter: [0-65535]
Enter the cookie preservative.

10 Prompt: MAXHB=
Enter: [1-100]
Enter the maximum heart beat misses.
If you entered 1 in Step 3, go to Step 30; otherwise, continue.

SCTP sizing parameters

11 Prompt: MIN*SZ=
Enter: [0-65535]
Enter the minimum building message size.

12 Prompt: I*SZ=
Enter: [0-4294967295]
Enter the inbound buffer message.

13 Prompt: O*SZ=
Enter: [0-4294967295]
Enter the outbound buffer message.

14 Prompt: SS*T=
Enter: [0-65535]
Enter the slow start threshold.

15 Prompt: CWD=
Enter: [0-4294967295]

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 264

Enter the congestion window size.

If you enter 2 in Step 3, go to Step 30; otherwise, continue.

Congestion level parameters

16 Prompt: TXL1AB*AT=
Enter: [0-100]
Enter the TX congestion L1 abatement.

17 Prompt: TXL1ON*SET=
Enter: [0-100]
Enter the TX congestion L1 onset.

18 Prompt: TXL1DI*SCARD=
Enter: [0-100]
Enter the TX congestion L1 discard.

19 Prompt: TXL2AB*AT=
Enter: [0-100]
Enter the TX congestion L2 abatement.

20 Prompt: TXL2ON*SET=
Enter: [0-100]
Enter the TX congestion L2 onset.

21 Prompt: TXL2DI*SCARD=
Enter: [0-100]
Enter the TX congestion L3 discard.

22 Prompt: TXL3AB*AT=
Enter: [0-100]
Enter the TX congestion L3 abatement.

23 Prompt: TXL3ON*SET=
Enter: [0-100]
Enter the TX congestion L2 onset.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 265

24 Prompt: TXL3DI*SCARD=
Enter: [0-100]
Enter the TX congestion L3 discard.

25 Prompt: RXABA*T=
Enter: [0-100]
Enter the receive congestion abatement.

26 Prompt: RXONSE*T=
Enter: [0-100]
Enter the receive congestion onset.

27 Prompt: RXDISCARD=
Enter: [0-100]
Enter the receive congestion L2 discard. Go to Step 30.
If you entered 3 in Step 3, go to Step 30; otherwise, continue.

Traffic measurement marginal threshold parameters

28 Prompt: ASSDOWNTRAN=
Enter: [1-65535]
Enter the SCTP association down duration threshold.

29 Prompt: ASSORETRAN=
Enter: [1-65535]
Enter the SCTP association retransmission threshold.

30 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 266

Change UIP system parameters

Use this procedure to change the M3UA IP interface system parameters in the IP system
parameters table (ATU1C).

Constraints

No constraints apply to changing the IPUA system parameters.

Data tables

The system updates the IP system parameter (U1C) data table.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE CCS UIPSYS
The system displays the UIP system parameters.

2 Prompt: WIN*SIZE=
Enter: [0-1,000,000]
Enter the new advertised receiver window size in bytes.

3 Prompt: MEM*ORY=
Enter: [0-1,000,000,000]
Enter the new total memory allocated for the SCTP stack in bytes.

4 Prompt: INIT*RTO=
Enter: [0-65,535]
Enter the new initial retransmission time-out in milliseconds.

5 Prompt: MIN*RTO=
Enter: [0-65,535]
Enter the new minimum retransmission time-out in milliseconds.

6 Prompt: MAX*RTO=
Enter: [0-65,535]
Enter the new maximum retransmission time-out in milliseconds.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 267

7 Prompt: COOK*LIF=
Enter: [0-120,000]
Enter the new valid cookie life in milliseconds.

8 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Change UIP timer

Use this procedure to change the following M3UA timers:

• Pending state recovery timer

• SCON timer
• Time controlled procedure timer

Constraints

No constraints apply to changing the M3UA UIP timers.

Data tables

The system updates the M3UA UIP system timer (U31) data table.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE CCS UIPTMR
The system displays the UIP timer parameters.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 268

2 Prompt: TIMER*TYPE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1 (T (r) timer); go to Step 3.
2 (T (scon) timer); go to Step 5.
3 (T (tcp) timer); go to Step 7.
4 (T (act) timer); go to Step 9.

3 Prompt: R*SECONDS=
Enter: [0 or 1]
Enter the number of seconds for T (r) timer.

4 Prompt: R*TENTHS=
Enter: [0-9]
Enter the number of tenths of seconds for T (r) timer. Go to Step 10.

5 Prompt: S*SECONDS=
Enter: [1, 2, or 3]
Enter the number of seconds for T (scon) timer.

6 Prompt: S*TENTHS=
Enter: [0-9]
Enter the number of tenths of seconds for T (scon) timer. Go to Step 10.

7 Prompt: T*SECONDS=
Enter: [0 or 1]
Enter the number of seconds for T (tcp) timer.

8 Prompt: T*TENTHS=
Enter: [0-9]
Enter the number of tenths of seconds for T (tcp) timer.

9 Prompt: A*SECONDS=
Enter: [1-60]
Enter the number of seconds for T(act) timer.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 269

10 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Copy UIP parameters

Use this procedure to copy the UIP parameters from one ASP to another ASP.

Constraints

No constraints apply to copying the IPUA parameters.

Data tables

The system updates the M3UA UIP parameter (V49) data table.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: COPY CCS UIPPAR

2 Prompt: A*SP=
Enter: [1-384]
Enter application server process ID.

3 Prompt: ASPNODEST=
Enter: [1-384]
Enter destination application server process ID.
Enter a single ID, list of IDs, range, or combination of IDs.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 270

4 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display UIP parameters

Use this procedure to display the UIP parameters for an ASP.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying the IPUA parameters.

Data tables

The system reads the ASP UIP parameter (V49) data table.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLAY CCS UIPPAR

2 Prompt: ASP*NAMNUM=
Enter: application server process name or number
Enter an application server process name of 1-16 characters or an ID between the range
1-384.

3 Prompt: DPARAGROUP=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
0 (All groups)
1 (SCTP timing)
2 (SCTP sizing)
3 (Congestion)
4 (Traffic measurement marginal threshold)
Enter the parameter group. The parameter group is displayed.
The display fields vary based on the parameter group selected in Step 3.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 271

4 To display another parameter group, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

5 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Display UIP system parameters

Use this procedure to display the M3UA IP interface system parameters in the IP system
parameters table (ATU1C).

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying the IPUA system parameters.

Data tables

The system reads the IP system parameter (U1C) data table.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLAY CCS UIPSYS

2 Verify that the system displays the UIP system parameters.

END PROCEDURE

Display UIP timer

Use this procedure to display the following UIP timers:

• Pending state recovery timer

• SCON timer
• Time controlled procedure timer

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying the UIP timers.

Data tables

The system updates the UIP system timer (U31) data table.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary SS7-IP interworking
Page 272

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLAY CCS UIPTMR

2 Verify that the system displays the UIP timer parameters.

END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 Route set master
Page 273

Route set master

A route set master number identifies a group of link sets that constitute a route from the local
node to a distant node.

A route set master identifies as many as six link sets. Each link set is assigned a priority level
(1, 2, or 3). The priority determines the order in which the link sets are activated. Only two
link sets in a route are active at a time. Only two link sets are assigned the same priority in the
route set at one time.

You can perform the following route set master procedures:

• Assign a link set/application server to a route set master

• Change a link set/application server in a route set master
• Delete a link set/application server from a route set master
• Display a route set master

Assign a link set/application server to a route set master

Use this procedure to add a new link set/application server and link set/application server
priority to a route set master in the database. The route set master may be empty or may
already have link sets/application server.

Constraints

These constraints apply to adding a link set or application server to a route set master:

• The system assigns route set master numbers automatically.

• Two link sets in a route set master may be assigned the same priority level. A direct link
set (terminating at a specified node) should be assigned a higher priority than an indirect
link set (terminating at an intermediate node such as the mate 5070 SSG). However, if a
super link set is used as a route in a route set master, then that must be the only route
with that priority level. (Super link set: For future use.)
• Link sets must be defined before they can be assigned to a route set master.
• A link set must have at least one link before it can be assigned to a route set.
• If two link sets are assigned the same priority and one of them is combined, they must all
be combined.
• Only six link sets can be assigned to a route set master.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 Route set master
Page 274

• The AS ID must be an application server that has been created and not be used in any
route set master.

Data tables

When a new route set master is added to the database, the route set master (Y51) data table is
changed.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: ASSIGN CCS RSMAST

2 Prompt: ROUT*ESET=
Enter: route set to be added

3 Prompt: LS*CAT=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
S (super link set); go to Step 5.
N (normal link set); go to Step 4.
AS (application server); go to Step 6.

4 Prompt: LINKS*ET=
Enter: a link set name or number
Go to Step 7.

5 Prompt: SUPERLS*NUM=
Enter: a super link set number
Go to Step 7.

6 Prompt: APPS*SER=
Enter: an application server name or number

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 Route set master
Page 275

7 Prompt: PRI*ORITY=
Enter: priority number
The system shows the link sets and other values assigned to this route set.

8 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Change a link set/application server in a route set master

Use this procedure to change the link set/application server members and link set/application
server priorities assigned to a route set in the database.

Constraints

These constraints apply to changing a link set or application server in a route set master:

• Two link sets in a route set master may be assigned the same priority level. A direct link
set (terminating at a specified node) should be assigned a higher priority than an indirect
link set (terminating at an intermediate node such as the mate 5070 SSG). However, if a
super link set is used as a route in a route set master, then that must be the only route
with that priority level. (Super link set: For future use.)
• A link set must have at least one link to be assigned to a route set.
• If two link sets are to be assigned the same priority, and one of them is combined, they
must all be combined.
• Link sets must be defined before assigning a route set master.
• All the link sets assigned to one route set master must be of the same logical network.
• The AS ID must be an application server that has been created and not be used in any
route set master.

Data tables

When an existing route set master is changed, the route set master (Y51) data table is
changed.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 Route set master
Page 276

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE CCS RSMAST

2 Prompt: ROUT*ESET=
Enter: route set to be changed

3 Prompt: LS*CAT=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
S (super link set); go to Step 5.
N (normal link set); go to Step 4.
AS (application server); go to Step 6.

4 Prompt: LINKS*ET=
Enter: a link set name or number
Go to Step 7.

5 Prompt: SUPERLS*NUM=
Enter: a super link set number
Go to Step 7.

6 Prompt: APPS*SER=
Enter: a application server name or number

7 Prompt: CLS*CAT=
Enter: [S, N, or AS]
If you enter S, go to Step 8.
If you enter N, go to Step 9.
If you enter AS, go to Step 10.
If you enter S in Step 3 and <RETURN> in Step 7; go to Step 8.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 Route set master
Page 277

If you enter N in Step 3 and <RETURN> in Step 7; go to Step 9.

If you enter AS in Step 3 and <RETURN> in Step 7; go to Step 10.

8 Prompt: CSUPERLS*NUM=
Enter: new super link set number
Go to Step 11.

9 Prompt: CLINKS=
Enter: new link set name
Go to Step 11.

10 Prompt: CAPPS*SER=
Enter: new application server name or number

11 Prompt: CPRIOR=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
A new priority level
<RETURN> (keep the same priority level)
The system shows the link sets and other parameters.

12 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Delete a link set/application server from a route set master

Use this procedure to delete one or all link sets/application server from a route set in the
database. The route set cannot be deleted if it is referenced in the database.

Constraints

These constraints apply to removing a route set master from the SS7 database:

• When a route set master number is deleted, the 5070 SSG can no longer route traffic to
any node served by that route.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 Route set master
Page 278

• Before deleting a route, deactivate all link sets in the route.

• If a route set master is used as a route to a DPCRS, it cannot be deleted.

Data tables

The system changes the route set master (Y51) table when an existing route set master is
deleted.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: DELETE CCS RSMAST

2 Prompt: ROUT*ESET=
Enter: route set to be deleted

3 Prompt: DLS*CAT=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
S (super link set); go to Step 5.
N (normal link set - default); go to Step 4.
AS (application server); go to Step 6.
<RETURN>; go to Step 7.

4 Prompt: LINKS*ET=
Enter: a link set name or number
Go to Step 7.

5 Prompt: SUPERLS*NUM=
Enter: a super link set number
Go to Step 7.

6 Prompt: APPS*SER=
Enter: a application server name or number

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 Route set master
Page 279

7 Prompt: DLINKS=
Enter: link set name, number, or ALL

8 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display a route set master

Use this procedure to show the link sets/application server and link set/application server
priorities for a single, a list, a range, or all route sets residing in the database.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying a route set master.

Data tables

The system reads the route set master (Y51) data table to show the data.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLA CCS RSMAST

2 Prompt: DROUT*SE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
A route set number
ALL
The system shows the link sets assigned to the route and their priority levels.

3 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

4 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 Routing
Page 280

Routing

The 5070 SSG supports two methods of MTP routing:

• Member (full point code) routing - routes messages based on the network number, cluster
number, and cluster member number of the DPC
• Cluster (partial point code) routing - routes messages based on the network number and
cluster number of the DPC

The system performs member routing by assigning a route set master to the point code. A
route set master is a grouping of all link sets that carry traffic from the 5070 SSG to a distant
node.

The route set master includes the link sets that terminate at the node and any other link set
transferring messages to the node. All routes include the link set to the mate 5070 SSG. If the
primary link set to the node is inaccessible, the message traffic is forwarded through the mate
5070 SSG.

Note: If both member routing and cluster routing functions are assigned to a node, the 5070
SSG uses member routing.

The following topics provide information about routing:

• Routing procedures
• Destination point code route sets

Routing procedures
You can perform the following routing tasks procedures:

• Establish routing
• Delete routing for nonadjacent point codes
• Delete routing for adjacent point codes

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 Routing
Page 281

Establish routing
Use this procedure to establish MTP routing.

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not enter database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Add one or more link sets to a route set master (Route set master form).

2 Add a route.
END PROCEDURE

Delete routing for nonadjacent point codes

Use this procedure to delete a route for a nonadjacent node.

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not enter database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 If the point code is used as a destination for GTT, remove it from the GTT tables.

2 If the point code is part of a subsystem or point code address assigned to a CSP group,
remove the concerned point code.

3 If the point code is a member of a CSP group, remove the point code from the group.

4 If the point code is assigned as a mated application, remove it from the mated
application tables.

5 If the point code is assigned a subsystem name, remove the subsystem name.

6 Remove the routing for this point code by deleting the ordered route.
END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 Routing
Page 282

Delete routing for adjacent point codes

Use this procedure to delete a route for an adjacent node.

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not enter database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 If the point code is used as a destination for GTT, remove it from GTT and from the GTT
tables.

2 If the point code is part of a subsystem or point code address assigned to a CSP group,
remove the concerned point code.

3 If the point code is a member of a CSP group, remove the point code from the group.

4 If the point code is assigned as a mated application, remove it from the mated
application tables.

5 If the point code is assigned as a subsystem name, remove the subsystem name.

6 Remove the routing for this point code by deleting the ordered route.

7 Remove the link set terminating in the adjacent node from any route set master in
which it appears.

8 Remove the link set.

END PROCEDURE

Destination point code route sets

Routing uses a DPC route set to identify link sets that originate at the 5070 SSG and terminate
at an intermediate or distant node. Each route set is assigned a route set master number. The
route set master number contains these link sets and lists their priorities.

The mate 5070 SSG is usually included in each route set because it can transmit messages to
the distant node if the direct link set fails.

You can perform the following DPC route set procedures:

• Assign a DPC route set

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 Routing
Page 283

• Change an ordered route

• Delete an ordered route
• Display an ordered route

Assign a DPC route set

Use this procedure to define a distant node name and establish routing for the node.

Constraints

The following constraints apply to adding an ordered route:

• All routes originate at the 5070 SSG. Each route must terminate at a distant node.
• If the cluster routing feature is enabled, a node can have member routing or cluster
routing.
• If both member routing and cluster routing are assigned to a node, then member routing
must be used.
• The route set master number must be assigned before assigning the route to the ordered
route. When routes are created, a route set master of zero is automatically assigned.
• If the node is a final destination for GTT, routing must be assigned to the node.
• The DPC router set does not allow a route set master that contains an application server
to be referenced by more than one point code.

Data tables

When a new route is added to the database, the following data tables are changed:

• Node name (Y55)

• MTP destination (Y52)
• Network (Y33)
• Adjacent node name (S27)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not enter database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 Routing
Page 284

1 Prompt: >
Enter: ASSIGN CCS DPCRS

2 Prompt: ANO*DE=
Enter: a node name

Note: If the node is adjacent, go to Step 5; otherwise, continue.

3 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number
Enter the logical network name of 1-16 characters or a number between the range of
0-31.
The default value is none.

4 Prompt: PNT*COD=
Enter: point code
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.
The default value is none.
The system shows the parameters associated with the distant node.

5 Prompt: ARS*MASTER=
Enter: route set master number

6 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Change an ordered route

Use this procedure to change the distant node definition. Specify the node by name or point
code.

Constraints

The following constraints apply to changing ordered route parameters:

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 Routing
Page 285

• Assign the route set master number before assigning the route to the ordered route. When
routes are created, a route set master of zero is automatically assigned.
• A point code cannot be modified in the DPC to route set data table (Y52) if the point code
is used in the point code and SSN table (W53). The parameters of the point code can be
modified.
• If the node appears in the adjacent node name data table (S27), the node name must be
changed there before the node name can be modified in the node name table (Y55).
• The DPC router set does not allow a route set master that contains an application server to
be referenced by more than one point code.

Data tables

When parameters of an existing route are changed, the following data tables are changed:

• Node name (Y55)

• Adjacent node name (S27)
• SSN (W53)
• MTP destination (Y52)
• Network (Y33)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not enter database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE CCS DPCRS

2 Prompt: NODE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
A node name; go to Step 5. The system shows the current node.
<RETURN>; continue.

3 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 Routing
Page 286

4 Prompt: PNT*COD=
Enter: point code
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.
The default value is none.
The system shows the parameters associated with the distant node.

5 Prompt: CNODE=
Enter: a new node name
If the node is adjacent, go to Step 9; otherwise, continue.

6 Prompt: CLOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number

7 Prompt: CPNT*COD=
Enter: point code

8 Prompt: CRS*MASTER=
Enter: [A or C]
A (route set master number)
C (route set number)
The route set master is a number identifying the group of link sets making up the route.
Go to Step 10.

9 Prompt: RS*MASTER=
Enter: route set master number

10 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 Routing
Page 287

Delete an ordered route

Use this procedure to delete an ordered route for an existing, nonlocal node. Specify the node
by name or point code.

Constraints

The following constraints apply to removing an ordered route from the SS7 database:

• Deactivate all link sets in the route set before deleting a route.
• To remove an adjacent node, delete the link set to the node before removing the route.
Deleting a link set terminates traffic on the links.
• A point code cannot be deleted from the DPC to route set data table (Y52) and the node
name data table (Y55) if it is used in the multiple point code and SSN data table (W53).
• If a nonadjacent node is removed, remove the route, but do not delete the link sets to the
node. The link sets may also serve an intermediate node adjacent to the 5070 SSG.
• If a node is defined as a GTT address, CSP code, or mated application, the route to that
node cannot be deleted. The SCCP definitions must be deleted before deleting the route.
• A point code cannot be deleted from the DPC to route set data table (Y52) and the node
name data table (Y55) if it is defined as a DEN point code in the PCM database.

Data tables

The system accesses the following tables to delete an existing route:

• Node name (Y55)

• MTP destination (Y52)
• SSN (Y53)
• Network (Y33)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not enter database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: DELETE CCS DPCRS

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 Routing
Page 288

2 Prompt: NODE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
A node name; the system shows parameters. Go to Step 5.
<RETURN>; continue.

3 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number

4 Prompt: PNT*COD=
Enter: point code
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.
The default value is none.
The system shows the parameters of the member to be deleted.

5 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display an ordered route

Use this procedure to show an ordered route of an existing distant node. Specify the node by
name or point code.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying the ordered route parameters.

Data tables

The parameters showed are retrieved from the following data tables:

• Route set master (Y51)

• MTP destination (Y52)
• Node name (Y55)
• Network (Y33)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 Routing
Page 289

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLA CCS DPCRS

2 Prompt: NODE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
A node name; go to Step 5.
ALL; go to Step 5.
<RETURN>; continue.

3 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number

4 Prompt: PNT*COD=
Enter: point code
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.
The default value is none.

5 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

6 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 SCCP subsystem
Page 290

SCCP subsystem

The following topics provide information about the SCCP subsystem:

• SCCP signaling functions

• Subsystem name

SCCP signaling functions

SCCP software performs signaling functions for specialized routing and management services.
The SCCP software subsystems perform functions required by network services:

• Routing GTT messages to the SCCP GTT processing function

• Routing database queries to special applications for further processing
• Returning processed messages to the MTP routing function
• Implementing error procedures for SCCP messages that cannot be processed
• Managing routing procedures to back up subsystems

The SS7 database contains configuration information on all subsystems that receive 5070 SSG
messages. A subsystem is identified in the database by any of these forms:

• Subsystem name
• Node name and SSN
• Point code and SSN

Each subsystem identified in the SS7 database has a unique name. The subsystem name
identifies both the node where the subsystem resides and the SSN. The name identifies the
subsystem in system output messages.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 SCCP subsystem
Page 291

Reserved subsystems
The SSN is a decimal number in the range 00-255. The SSN identifies a particular subsystem at
the node. The following SSNs are reserved for special applications:

00 - SSN not known or not used

01 - SCCP management
02 - telephone user part
03 - ISUP
04 - operation, administration, and maintenance
255 - reserved for future expansion

Delete a subsystem
Use this procedure to delete a subsystem name.

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not enter database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Remove the GTT.

2 Remove the subsystem name if it is a member of a global title destination data group.

3 Remove a CSP if the CSP group assigned to the specified subsystem name.

4 Remove mated applications for the specified subsystem name.

5 Remove the subsystem name.

END PROCEDURE

Subsystem name
The subsystem name form associates a subsystem name with a node name and an SSN or a
point code and an SSN. A subsystem can then be identified by its subsystem name, node name
and SSN, or by point code and SSN.

You can perform the following SCCP subsystem procedures:

• Assign an SCCP subsystem name

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 SCCP subsystem
Page 292

• Change an SCCP subsystem name

• Delete an SCCP subsystem
• Display an SCCP subsystem
• Activate an SCCP subsystem
• Deactivate an SCCP subsystem

Assign an SCCP subsystem name

Use this procedure to add parameters to the database. The database is used to associate a
name with a subsystem (point code plus subsystem number) and to keep status information on
assigned subsystems.

Constraints

These constraints apply to adding a subsystem name to the SS7 database:

• When SSNs are duplicated in different nodes, the subsystem name must be unique in each
node.
• A subsystem must not be assigned to a point code that is an alias point code.
• The subsystem name must be selected carefully because it represents both the node
where the subsystem resides and the SSN.

Data tables

The system changes the following data tables to add a subsystem name and its characteristics
to the database:

• Subsystem status (Y83)

• Subsystem name (Y84)
• MTP destination (Y52)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not enter database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 SCCP subsystem
Page 293

1 Prompt: >
Enter: ASSIGN SCCP SUBSYS

2 Prompt: NEWN*AME=
Enter: subsystem name

3 Prompt: NODE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
The node name to be added; go to Step 6.
<RETURN>; continue.

4 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number
Enter the logical network name of 1-16 characters or a number between the range of
0-31.
The default value is none.

5 Prompt: PNT*COD=
Enter: point code
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for a
lognet.
The default value is none.
The system shows the parameters assigned to the node.

6 Prompt: SUBNO=
Enter: subsystem number to be added

7 Prompt: RE*ROUTE=
Enter: [R or D]
R (reroute - default)
D (disable)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 SCCP subsystem
Page 294

8 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Change an SCCP subsystem name

Use this procedure to change parameters in the database. The database is used to associate a
name with a subsystem (point code plus subsystem number) to keep status information on
assigned subsystems.

Constraints

The following constraints apply to changing subsystem name parameters:

• When SSNs are duplicated in different nodes, the subsystem name must be unique for each
node.
• The subsystem number cannot be changed if the subsystem is referenced by a global title
or a mated application.
• The subsystem name must be selected carefully because it represents both the node
where the subsystem resides and the SSN.

Data tables

The system accesses the following data tables to change a subsystem name and its
characteristics:

• Subsystem status (Y83)

• GTT multiple PC/SSN (W53)
• Subsystem name (Y84)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 SCCP subsystem
Page 295

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not enter database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE SCCP SUBSYS

2 Prompt: SUB*NAME=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
The subsystem name; go to Step 7.
<RETURN>; continue.

3 Prompt: NODE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
The node name; go to Step 6.
<RETURN>; continue.

4 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number
The default value is none.

5 Prompt: PNT*COD=
Enter: point code
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.
The default value is none.
The system shows the parameters assigned to the node.

6 Prompt: SUBNO=
Enter: subsystem number to be changed
The system shows the current configuration of the subsystem identified.

7 Prompt: NEWN*AME=
Enter: new subsystem name

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 SCCP subsystem
Page 296

8 Prompt: NEWS*UB=
Enter: new subsystem number

9 Prompt: RE*ROUTE=
Enter: [R or D]
R (reroute)
D (disable)
<RETURN> (current value)

10 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Delete an SCCP subsystem

Use this procedure to delete parameters from the database. The database associates a name
with a subsystem (point code plus SSN) to keep status information on assigned subsystems.

Constraints

These constraints apply to removing a subsystem name:

• A subsystem name that is a destination in the GTT tables cannot be removed.

• An entry may be deleted only if it is not referenced by a global title or a mated
application.
• All subsystem names for a single node name and point code can be deleted if there are no
references to any of the subsystems in the GTT tables or mated applications table.
• If a subsystem name references a CSP code group that is removed, the usage count in the
CSP code table for that group is decremented. If the usage count goes to zero, that group
is deleted from the CSP code tables.

Data tables

The system accesses the following data tables to delete a subsystem name and its
characteristics:

• Subsystem status (Y83)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 SCCP subsystem
Page 297

• GTT multiple PC/SSN (W53)

• Subsystem name (Y84)
• MTP destination (Y52)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not enter database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: DELETE SCCP SUBSYS

2 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number
The default value is none.

3 Prompt: DSUB*NAME=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
The subsystem name; go to Step 7.
<RETURN>; continue.

4 Prompt: DNODE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
The node name; go to Step 6.
<RETURN >; continue.

5 Prompt: PNT*COD=
Enter: point code
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.
The default value is none.
The system shows the parameters assigned to the node.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 SCCP subsystem
Page 298

6 Prompt: SUBNO=
Enter: subsystem number to be deleted

7 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display an SCCP subsystem

Use this procedure to show parameters in the database. The database is used to associate a
name with a subsystem (point code and SSN) to keep status information on assigned
subsystems.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying subsystem parameters.

Data tables

The system retrieves SCCP subsystem parameters from the following data tables:

• Subsystem status (Y83)

• Subsystem name (Y84)
• MTP node name (Y55)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLA SCCP SUBSYS

2 Prompt: DSUB*NAME=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
The subsystem name or ALL; go to Step 7.
<RETURN>; continue.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 SCCP subsystem
Page 299

3 Prompt: DNODE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
The node name; go to Step 6.
ALL; go to Step 7.
<RETURN>; continue.

4 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number
The default value is none.

5 Prompt: PNT*COD=
Enter: point code
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.
The default value is none.
The system shows the parameters assigned to the node.

6 Prompt: DSUBNO=
Enter: subsystem number or ALL
The system shows the subsystem name and its parameters

7 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

8 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Activate an SCCP subsystem

Use this procedure to activate an SCCP subsystem.

SCCP subsystems are manually deactivated and activated during network maintenance for
these purposes:

• To remove the subsystem from service gracefully and reduce traffic loss or thrashing
caused by a remove and restore procedure
• To return subsystems to service in case of an improper response to a SST message, which
leaves the subsystem prohibited

When a subsystem is activated, the database marks the subsystem status as in service,
regardless of the subsystem's actual state. The system does not test a newly activated
subsystem, but simply resumes sending messages to the subsystem.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 SCCP subsystem
Page 300

When a subsystem is deactivated, the database marks the subsystem status as out of service,
regardless of the subsystem's actual state. The system reroutes all messages to that subsystem
to a backup destination if a backup is configured. If there is no backup, the system returns the
message to the sender or discards the message.

The STATUS SCCP SUBSYSTEM command shows a manual out-of-service condition for manually
deactivated subsystems.

Manual deactivation/activation only affects the 5070 SSG where the command is executed.

Constraints

This command accesses the subsystem status data table (Y83) table.

Data tables

The system writes to the following data tables to activate an SCCP subsystem:

• Subsystem status (Y83)

• Subsystem name (Y84)
• Node name (Y55)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not enter database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: ACTIVA SCCP SUBSYS

2 Prompt: SUB*NAME=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
The subsystem name; go to Step 7.
<RETURN>; continue.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 SCCP subsystem
Page 301

3 Prompt: NODE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
The node name; go to Step 6.
<RETURN>; continue.

4 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number
The default value is none.

5 Prompt: PNT*COD=
Enter: point code
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.
The default value is none.
The system shows the parameters assigned to the node.

6 Prompt: DSUBNO=
Enter: subsystem number or ALL

7 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Deactivate an SCCP subsystem

Use this procedure to deactivate a subsystem.

Constraints

The following constraints apply to deactivating a subsystem:

• The 5070 SSG sends routing messages to systems marked as activated, regardless of their
actual state. If the subsystem is not active, the message is lost.
• For correct operation, deactivate a mate 5070 SSG at the same time.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 SCCP subsystem
Page 302

Data tables

The system accesses the following data tables to deactivate a subsystem:

• Subsystem status (Y83)

• Subsystem name (Y84)
• Node name (Y55)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not enter database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: DEACTI SCCP SUBSYS

2 Prompt: SUB*NAME=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
The subsystem name; go to Step 7.
<RETURN>; continue.

3 Prompt: NODE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
The node name; go to Step 6.
<RETURN>; continue.

4 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number
The default value is none.

5 Prompt: PNT*COD=
Enter: point code
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.
The default value is none.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 SCCP subsystem
Page 303

The system shows the parameters assigned to the node.

6 Prompt: DSUBNO=
Enter: subsystem number or ALL

7 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 304

GTT for SCCP

This topics provide information about regular GTT for global titles translated in an SS7 system.

• GTT
• GTT tasks
• Supported GTTs
• TT definition
• GTM definition
• GTT destination definition
• Regular GTT

GTT

Global title
A global title or GTA is an address that can be translated to a point code and subsystem
address for routing. The SS7 database contains the information that the SCCP software uses to
translate the global title to a network address.

For example, an SS7 message that requests 800 service contains the dialed digits for the node
that handles call setup, not the point code of the node. The 5070 SSG translates the global
title and routes the message to the network node that handles 800 service functions. After the
database lookup is completed for the 800 digits, the 5070 SSG routes the call to the destination
node on the voice network for call setup.

GTT
GTT provides routing information for global titles. When the 5070 SSG receives a message
containing a global title in the routing label, the SCCP software translates the global title to a
destination address (point code and SSN) that the MTP software can use to route the message.

The GTT process determines the GTT destination according to TT, GTA digits, DPC, and SSN
availability, and backup mode.

Figure 3 provides a simplified diagram of the GTT process.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 305

Figure 3. GTT process

GTA GTT destination SS7 node (DPC)
GTT function SS7 routing
Trans determines function SSN message
type Digits DPC SSN processing

Translation type
In GTT, the TT directs the precise characteristics of the translation process. When the SCCP
receives a message containing a global title, it checks the message for the TT, and the GTA
digits to determine the routing destination for the call. The 5070 SSG supports 256 TTs.

Shared TTs
Some SS7-based services require GTTs that translate to the same destinations residing in an
existing service database. To avoid duplicate databases, a TT can share the GTT database of
the existing TT.

Multiple destinations and backup types

A GTA or range for a TT can have multiple GTT destinations for database backup or load
sharing. A GTT destination consists of a destination node or a destination node and subsystem.

The system can define as many as eight destinations, including backup destinations. The 5070
SSG supports the following backup modes:

• Solitary (no backup routing)

• Dominant replicate (routing to a primary node, when available, or to as many as three
backup nodes selected by priority)
• Load shared (routing to alternate destinations in equal proportions)
• Weighted load sharing (routing to two or more destinations by percentage, calculated
according to a weighting factor and available nodes)
• Shared-replicate routing to three or more destinations (consisting of two or more primary
nodes and one or more backup nodes) by percentage, according to a weight factor

Note: In the shared-replicate mode, if a primary node becomes unavailable, the 5070 SSG
redistributes the traffic in equal proportions to a group of backup destination.

The SCCP GTTDEST command provisions the backup mode, destinations, and weight factors for
the translations database.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 306

Route selection
The load-sharing type is selected in the ASSIGN SCCP GTTDEST command at the BKA*MODE
prompt. This command fills as many as eight slots in the GTT multiple PC and SSN data table
(W53) to identify a load-sharing group. The load-sharing type determines the way the
destinations are entered in the table. The load-sharing type also determines the types of
information requested by the command.

The GTT process selects a route to a GTT destination according to TT, GTA digits, DPC/SSN
availability, and backup mode:

• If a single destination is entered, the backup type is solitary. The system accesses the
single destination if it is available.
• If multiple destinations are entered, and the backup type is dominant replicate, the
system records the order in which the destinations are entered. Routing goes first to the
preferred destination and then to the next preferred destination (based on table order).
• If multiple destinations are entered and the backup type is load-shared, routing rotates
among the destinations in the table.
• If multiple destinations are entered and the load-sharing type is weighted load-shared, the
command requires weighting factors. The system sorts the destinations by point code,
subsystem number, and weighting factor.
• If multiple destinations are entered and the load-sharing type is shared replicate, the
command requires identification of primary and backup destinations. Routing accesses the
primary group before accessing the backup group.

GTT loop detection and elimination

GTT looping occurs when one or more GTT databases are incorrectly provisioned, causing a
message to be misrouted. The misrouted message may be sent repeatedly between network
elements in a circular fashion, causing congestion and possible failure in the SS7 network.

Note: GTT looping can occur only with nonfinal GTTs.

The 5070 SSG software can be configured to perform two types of loop detection tests:

• Point code comparison - This test compares the point code of the incoming message with
the point code resulting from the GTT. If the point codes are identical, the message is
eliminated.
• Common route comparison - This test compares the route to the GTT destination after
translation with the route from the originating node. If a priority one route exists that is
common to both, the message is eliminated.

If the common route comparison test is enabled, the point code comparison test is executed
first.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 307

When GTT looping is detected, the system either discards the message if return-on-error is not
specified, or returns a message with the return cause set to No Translation for This Specific
Address.

GTT tasks
The SCCP databases can be provisioned with the following commands:

• SCCP TRANSL
• SCCP GTTDEST
• SCCP GTT
• SCCP PREGTM
• GLOBAL TRANSL

Define a new TT
Use this procedure to establish a new GTT in the database.

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 If necessary, map the TT to the TT at a gateway switch.

2 Define the TT.

3 Assign the shared database TT, if applicable.

4 Enable GTT loop detection, if applicable.

5 Identify the TT as an LNP TT, if applicable.

6 Define backup mode.

7 Define GTT destinations.

8 Define any associated weight and cost parameters.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 308

9 Assign the TT and GTA or range to a GTT destination group.

END PROCEDURE

Delete GTT entries or a TT

Use this procedure to delete GTT entries. You can delete one or more GTT entries for a TT or
delete the TT.

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

! ALERT
ALERT! Deleting a final GTT may result in removal of the associated subsystem, subsequent
failures, and possible service interruption.

1 Remove the GTT group assignment.

2 Remove the GTT group definition if desired.

3 Delete the TT data.

Note: To delete GTT entries, delete one or more GTA values or ranges assigned to the
TT.

Note: To delete the TT, delete all GTA entries assigned to the TT.

4 To remove the TT, delete the TT entry (this deletes the translation mechanism
assignment).

5 To remove the TT, remove the TT mapping, if applicable.

END PROCEDURE

Supported GTTs
The 5070 SSG supports the GTT of a GTA containing up to 28 digits. GTTs for ported numbers
are supported when the optional LNP feature is installed.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 309

The 5070 SSG supports the following GTT types:

• Single destination
• 800 or toll-free service
• 6- and 10-digit (optional)
• Split end-office CLASS (optional)
• 12- and 15-digit

800 or toll-free service GTT

The 5070 SSG supports the translation of 800-XXX numbers in the complete range of 800-000
through 800-999. It also optionally supports the translation of XXX-XXX numbers for toll-free
service.

Six-digit GTT
The 5070 SSG supports GTT for global titles in the form of XXX-XXX, and provides the
requirements for performing GTT for RA0-0/1XX. The six-digit GTT permits full support for
CLASS features and LIDB services.

Ten-digit CLASS GTT

The 5070 SSG supports CLASS SS7 message processing in a split end-office environment with
the 10-digit CLASS option. The split end-office CLASS database indicates the number of digits
provisioned (6 or 10), and GTT is performed using the provisioned digits.

Twelve- and fifteen-digit GTA

The 5070 SSG supports the translation of 12 and 15 digits in the GTA. However, SEAS does not
support 12- to 15-digit GTTs.

When the SEAS feature is enabled, provisioning must be made using the corresponding SEAS
local RC&V command.

TT definition
The TT controls processing for global titles in an SS7 message. The TT is carried in the SS7
message with the GTA. When the SS7 message is received at the 5070 SSG, the translation
mechanism assigned to the TT in the database controls the GTT of the GTA.

You can perform the following TT procedures:

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 310

• Assign a TT
• Change a TT
• Display a TT
• Delete a TT

Assign a TT
Use this procedure to define a new TT by assigning a translation mechanism and related
parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to assigning a TT.

Data tables

The following data tables are affected when adding a TT:

• Global title TT (Y85)

• GTT (W86)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: ASSIGN SCCP TRANSL

2 Prompt: GTF=
Enter: [1-4]
Enter the global title format.

3 Prompt: TRT*YPE=
Enter: [0-255]
Enter the translation type.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 311

4 Prompt: IPRD=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y, or N]
YES or Y (enable GTT failure IPRs)
NO or N (disable GTT failure IPRs)

5 Prompt: LOOP*DET=
Enter: (one of the following GTT loopback detection methods)
1 - None
2 (the point code match)
3 (the common route match)
4 (the network ID match)

6 Prompt: SHR*DTYPE=
Enter: [0-255]
Enter the shared translation type or <RETURN> to specify bypass database sharing.
The system shows the parameters.

7 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Change a TT
Use this procedure to change a TT entry.

Constraints

No constraints apply to changing a TT.

Data tables

The system changes the GTT-type data table (Y85) and may change the GTT table (W86) to
change a TT entry. The following changes occur:

• Change an old six-digit destination to a new 28-digit destination; this procedure changes
the GTT table during a maintenance window and backs up tables W86 and Y85.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 312

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

! ALERT
ALERT! If translation data is currently assigned to the TT, changing the translation mechanism
may result in service interruption. Be sure to update the GTT table for the new translation
mechanism.

Note: Use the DISPLA GLOBAL TRANSL command to verify that no GTAs are assigned to
the TT.

Note: Use the DELETE GLOBAL TRANSL command to remove the translation data
assigned to the TT.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE SCCP TRANSL

2 Prompt: GTF=
Enter: [1-4]
Enter the global title format.

3 Prompt: TRT*YPE=
Enter: [0-255]
Enter the translation type to be changed.

4 Prompt: CIPRD=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y, or N]
YES or Y (enable GTT failure IPRs)
NO or N (disable GTT failure IPRs)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 313

5 Prompt: CLOOP*DET=
Enter: (one of the following GTT loopback detection methods)
1 (no detection)
2 (point code match)
3 (common route match)
4 (network ID match)
<RETURN> (keep the current value)

6 Prompt: CSHR*DTYPE=
Enter: [0-255]
Enter the shared translation type to be changed, <RETURN> to specify no change in
shared translation type, or NS to specify bypass database sharing. The system shows the
parameters.

7 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display a TT
Use this procedure to show a TT entry.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying TT parameters.

Data tables

The system retrieves the TT from the global title TT (Y85).

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLA SCCP TRANSL

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 314

2 Prompt: GTF=
Enter: [1-4]
Enter the global title format.

3 Prompt: DSPT*TYP=
Enter: [0-255]
Enter a single translation type, range, list, or ALL for all the translation types.
The system shows the translation type table entry.

4 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

5 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Delete a TT
Use this procedure to delete a TT.

Constraints

No constraints apply to deleting a TT.

Data tables

The system changes GTT-type data table (Y85) to remove a TT from the database.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

Note: Use the DISPLA GLOBAL TRANSL command to verify that no GTAs are assigned to
the TT.

Note: Use the DELETE GLOBAL TRANSL command to remove the translation data
assigned to the TT.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 315

1 Prompt: >
Enter: DELETE SCCP TRANSL

2 Prompt: GTF=
Enter: [1-4]

3 Prompt: TRT*YPE=
Enter: [0-255]
The system shows the translation type entry to be deleted.

4 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

GTT destination definition

A GTT destination handles GTAs for a TT. The system can configure multiple destinations to
handle the same GTA in a TT for backup or load-sharing purposes. Multiple destinations are
configured as GTT destination groups. The system assigns GTT destination groups to GTAs with
the GLOBAL TRANSL command.

A destination group includes as many as eight destinations. The backup mode specified
determines the number of destinations that can be entered. The following list defines the GTT
backup modes and applies only to the routing processor destination database.

Mode... Provides...
Solitary No backup; always routes to the PC+SSN configured. A routing failure occurs if
the PC or SSN is unavailable.
Dominant replicate Routes to a backup destination when the primary destination is unavailable.
This mode always translates to the first PC and SSN. If the PC or SSN is
unavailable, the SCCP translates to the second PC and SSN, to as many as
eight destinations.
Load-shared replicate Load sharing between two to eight destinations. Traffic is divided equally
among the available destinations. A routing failure occurs only if all DPCs and
SSNs are unavailable.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 316

Mode... Provides...
Weighted load share Load sharing between two to eight destinations where traffic is allocated
proportionally to the available destinations according to weight factors.
Shared replicate Routes traffic to two or more primary destinations according to weight
factors. If one or more primary destinations becomes unavailable, traffic
routing to those nodes is divided equally among one or more available backup
destinations.

You can perform the following GTT destination procedures:

• Assign a GTT destination

• Change a GTT destination
• Display a GTT destination
• Delete a GTT destination

Assign a GTT destination

Use this procedure to assign one or more GTT destinations to a destination group. The backup
mode specified determines the number of destinations that can be entered for a group.

Constraints

The following constraints apply to creating a GTT destination group entry:

• The destination node (name and PC) and associated routing must first be defined in the
database.
• If the backup type is set to load-shared, dominant replicate, or weighted load share, at
least two GTT destinations must be defined.
• If the backup type is set to shared replicate, at least three GTT destinations must be
defined. At least one backup destination must be defined in the group of three.
• In load-shared/replicate mode, backup destinations are provisioned with a weight value of
0.
• For final translations, the subsystem name or number must first be defined in the
database.

Data tables

The following data tables are affected when a GTT destination pair is added:

• GTT multiple PC/SSN (W53)

• GTT multiple PC/SSN name (W13)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 317

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

Note: AT1LK, CTLK, DS0LK, and SIPM are for future use.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: ASSIGN SCCP GTTDEST

2 Prompt: GTTA*NAME=
Enter: GTT destination group name
Enter GTT destination group name of 1-8 characters.
The default value is none.

3 Prompt: BKA*MODE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
0 (solitary, or no replicates)
1 (dominant replicate)
2 (load-shared replicate)
3 (weighted load share)
4 (shared replicate)
The default value is 0.
Enter the backup mode.
Go to the step with the prompt that matches your system.

Note: The prompts in Step 4 through Step 10 repeat to allow as many as eight
destinations. Enter QUIT at a FINxx*TRAN prompt to indicate the end of the sequence.

Note: The xx in the FINxx*TRAN prompt and all subsequent prompts identifies the
sequence number of the destination. The system reorders the destinations from highest
to lowest preference according to the weight factors.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 318

4 Prompt: FIN1A*TRAN=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y, or N]
YES or Y (indicate final translation)
NO or N (indicate subsequent translations)
Go to the prompt that follows that matches the one on your system.

5 Prompt: WEIGHT1A=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1-100 (backup type - weighted load-shared)
0-100 (backup type - shared replicate)

6 Prompt: SS1A*NAME=
Enter: subsystem name
Enter the subsystem name of 1-6 characters.
Go to Step 4 if additional destinations are allowed or Step 11 if no additional
destinations are allowed.
<RETURN> (specify a node and SSN); continue.

7 Prompt: NOD1A*NAME=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
The node name; go to Step 10.
<RETURN> (specify node point code); continue.

8 Prompt: LOGNET1A=
Enter: logical network name or number
Enter the logical network name of 1-16 characters or a number between the range of
0-31.
The default value is none.

9 Prompt: PTCODE1A=
Enter: point code
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for a
lognet.

10 Prompt: SYS1A*NUM=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
An SSN (final translation); go to Step 11.
0 (nonfinal translation); go to Step 4.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 319

The system shows the destination data.

11 Verify the data in the GTT destination group table entry. The system reorders the
destination data in highest to lowest preference. In shared-replicate mode, weight
factors are ordered in highest to lowest preference.

12 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Change a GTT destination

Use this procedure to change a GTT destination group table entry.

Constraints

The following constraints apply to changing a GTT destination entry:

• A group name must be unique.

• The destination node name/PC and associated routing must first be defined in the
database.
• For final translations, the subsystem name or number must first be defined in the
database.
• Except for solitary mode, which requires one GTT destination, as many as eight
destinations can be defined for a group.
• Groups with the same PC/SSNs that have different parameters, including different weight
assignments, are considered unique and are assigned a different group number.
• When the backup type is set to load-shared, dominant replicate, or weighted load-shared,
at least two PC/SSN entries must be defined.
• When the backup type is set to shared replicate, at least three PC/SSN entries must be
defined. One of these must be a backup destination.
• A change to GTT destination group data affects all GTTs that reference that group.

Data tables

The following data tables are affected when a GTT destination pair is changed:

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 320

• GTT multiple PC/SSN (W53)

• GTT multiple PC/SSN name (W13)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE SCCP GTTDEST

2 Prompt: GTTD*NAME=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
A GTT destination group name; go to Step 4.
<RETURN> (identify the GTT group number)

3 Prompt: GTC*NUM=
Enter: [1-1125]
Enter the GTT destination group number.

4 Prompt: GTTA*NAME=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
A new GTT destination group name
<RETURN> (keep the current name)

5 Prompt: BKB*MODE=
Enter: (a backup mode from one of the following choices)
0 (solitary, or no replicates)
1 (dominant replicate)
2 (load-shared)
3 (weighted load-shared)
4 (shared replicate)
<RETURN> (keep the current backup mode)
Go to the step with the prompt that matches your system.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 321

6 Prompt: MENU1A*GTT=
Enter: (a function from one of the following choices)
1 (change/add PC/SSNs); go to Step 9.
2 (delete PC/SSNs); go to Step 7.
<RETURN> (keep all current PC/SSNs); go to Step 16.

Note: The prompts in Step 9 through Step 15 repeat to allow as many as eight
destinations for all backup modes except solitary.

Note: The xx or nA in the following prompts identifies the selection number of the
destination to be changed in the data. The system reorders the destinations in highest
to lowest order.

7 Prompt: GRPA*ORD=
Enter: GTT preference order
Go to the step with the prompt that matches your system.

8 Prompt: SELA*NUM=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
A single value to delete
A list of values to delete
A range of values to delete
Go to the step with the prompt that matches your system.

9 Prompt: FIN1A*TRAN=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
YES or Y (indicate a final translation)
NO or N (indicate a nonfinal translation)
Q (indicate the end of destinations)
<RETURN> (keep the current parameter)
Go to the step with the prompt that matches your system.

Note: The prompt in Step 10 appears when the backup mode is weighted load-shared or
shared replicate.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 322

10 Prompt: WEIGHT1A=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1-100 (backup type - weighted load-shared)
0-100 (backup type - shared replicate)
<RETURN> (keep the current parameter)

Note: The SSxx*NAME prompt appears for final translations only. For nonfinal
translations, go to Step 11.

11 Prompt: SS1A*NAME=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
The subsystem name; go to Step 9 if additional destinations are allowed; go
to Step 16 if no additional destinations are allowed.
<RETURN> (specify a node and SSN); continue.

12 Prompt: NOD1A*NAME=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
The node name; go to Step 15.
<RETURN> (specify node point code); continue.

13 Prompt: LOGNET1A=
Enter: logical network name or number

14 Prompt: PTCODE1A=
Enter: point code
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

15 Prompt: SYS1A*NUM=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
An SSN (a final destination); go to Step 9 if additional subsystem are allowed.
0 (nonfinal translation); go to Step 16 if no additional subsystem are allowed.
<RETURN> (keep the current parameter); continue.
The system shows the destinations.

16 Verify the GTT destination group table entry. The system reorders the destination data
in highest to lowest preference. In shared-replicate mode, weight factors are ordered
in highest to lowest preference.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 323

17 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display a GTT destination

Use this procedure to show GTT destination group table entries. An option to show the
destinations assignments in the group or the GTAs in a TT that reference the group is provided.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying GTT destination group data.

Data tables

The system reads the GTT destination from the GTT multiple PC/SSN data table (W53).

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLA SCCP GTTDEST

2 Prompt: GTTD*NAME=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
A GTT destination group name; go to Step 4.
ALL; go to Step 4.
<RETURN>; continue.

3 Prompt: GTC*NUM=
Enter: [1-1125]
Enter GTT destination group number.
Enter a single number, range, list of number, or ALL for all the numbers.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 324

4 Prompt: DIS2A*FORM=
Enter: [CONT, ASSIGN, C, or A]
CONT or C (GTT destination group contents)
ASSIGN or A (TT and GTAs referencing the group)

5 To display another GTT destination name, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

6 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Delete a GTT destination

Use this procedure to delete GTT destination group table entries.

Constraints

Do not delete a GTT destination if it is referenced for GTTs.

Data tables

The following data tables are affected when a GTT destination pair is deleted:

• GTT multiple PC/SSN table (W53)

• GTT multiple PC/SSN name table (W13)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

! ALERT
ALERT! Deleting a GTA or range from the database can result in service interruption.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: DELETE SCCP GTTDEST

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 325

2 Prompt: GTTD*NAME=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
A GTT destination group name to be deleted
<RETURN> (select GTT group number); continue.

3 Prompt: GTA*NUM=
Enter: [1-1125]
Enter GTT destination group number.
The system shows the table entry.

4 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

GTM definition
The GTM definition feature provides the capabilities to modify global title parameters of a
called party address so that the SCCP message can be properly interpreted by the 5070 SSG for
later performing global title translation and can be decoded appropriately by the next
signaling point where it is sent.

Global title modification is performed before the global title translation (pre-GTT GTM), or
after the global title translation (post-GTT GTM), or both.

You can perform the following GTM definition procedures:

• Assign the pre-GTT GTM criteria and GTM parameters

• Change the pre-GTT GTM parameters
• Display the pre-GTT GTM criteria and GTM parameters
• Display the GTM parameters

Assign the pre-GTT GTM criteria and GTM parameters

Use this procedure to assign the pre-GTT GTM criteria and the associated GTM parameters.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 326

Constraints

No constraints apply to changing the pre-GTT GTM criteria and GTM parameters.

Data tables

The system accesses these data tables to add the pre-GTT GTM criteria and GTM parameters:

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: ASSIGN SCCP PREGTM

2 Prompt: GTF=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1 (NADDR); go to Step 5.
2 (TRANSTYPE)
3 (TRANSTYPE and NUMPLAN)
4 (TRANSTYPE, NUMPLAN, and NADDR)

3 Prompt: TRA*TYPE=
Enter: [0–255]
If you enter 2 in Step 2, go to Step 6.
This entry specifies the translation type.

4 Prompt: NUM*PLAN=
Enter: [0–14]
If you enter 3 in Step 2, go to Step 6.
This entry specifies the valid numbering plans. The default is 0.

5 Prompt: NAD*DR=
Enter: [0–126]
This entry specifies the nature of address indicators. The default is 0.

6 Prompt: GTTWEA=
Enter: [1–28]
Enter a single number, list of numbers, or range of numbers.
This entry specifies the global title address digits.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 327

7 Prompt: GTMNUM=
Enter: [1-999]
Enter a single value; go to Step 18.
<RETURN>; go to Step 8.
If you entered 1 in Step 2 and default is entered in Step 7, go to Step 10.

8 Prompt: NTRA*TYPE
Enter: (one of the following choices)
[0-255] (single value)
N (no modification)
If you entered 2 in Step 2, go to Step 11.
This entry specifies the new translation type value.

9 Prompt: NNUM*PLAN=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
[0-14] (single value)
N (no modification)
If you entered 3 is entered in Step 2, go to Step 11.
This entry specifies the new numbering plan value.

10 Prompt: NNAD*DR=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
[0-126] (single value)
N (no modification)
This entry specifies the new nature of address value.

11 Prompt: GTADM*TYPE
Enter: (one of the following choices)
N (no modification); go to Step 18.
R (replace); go to Step 12.
I (insert); go to Step 14.
D (delete); go to Step 15.
A (append); go to Step 17.

12 Prompt: DIGRS*LOC=
Enter: [1–28]

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 328

This entry specifies the start location of digit replacement.

13 Prompt: NUMDR=
Enter: [1-28]; go to Step 17.
This entry specifies the number of digits to be replaced in the MSU.

14 Prompt: DIGI*LOC=
Enter: [1-28]; go to Step 17.
This entry specifies the start location from where digit is inserted.

15 Prompt: DIGDS*LOC=
Enter: [1-28]
This entry specifies the start location from where digit is deleted.

16 Prompt: NUMDD=
Enter: [1-28]; go to Step 18.
This entry specifies the number of digits to be deleted.

17 Prompt: NEW*DIG=
Enter: [1-28 digits] (single value)
This entry specifies the new digits.
The system shows the pre-GTT GTM criteria and GTM parameters.

18 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute changes and exit to the command prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Change the pre-GTT GTM parameters

Use this procedure to change the pre-GTT GTM parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to changing the pre-GTT GTM parameters.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 329

Data tables

The system accesses these data tables to change the pre-GTT GTM parameters:

• GTM parameter (ATW8D)

• Pre-GTT GTM criteria (ATW8C)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE SCCP PREGTM

2 Prompt: GTF=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1 (NADDR); go to Step 5.
2 (TRANSTYPE)
3 (TRANSTYPE and NUMPLAN)
4 (TRANSTYPE, NUMPLAN, and NADDR)

3 Prompt: TRA*TYPE=
Enter: [0–255]
If you enter 2 in Step 2, go to Step 6.
This entry specifies the translation type value.

4 Prompt: NUM*PLAN=
Enter: [0–14]
If you enter 3 in Step 2, go to Step 6.
This entry specifies the valid numbering plans.
The default is 0.

5 Prompt: NAD*DR=
Enter: [0–126]
This entry indicates the nature of address.
The default is 0.

6 Prompt: GTTTWEA=
Enter: [1–28]

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 330

Enter a single number, list of numbers, or range of numbers.

This entry specifies the global title address digits.

7 Prompt: GTMNUM=
Enter: [1-999]
Enter a single value; go to Step 18.
<RETURN>; go to Step 8.
If you entered 1 in Step 2 and default is entered in Step 7, go to Step 10.

8 Prompt: CNTRA*TYPE
Enter: (one of the following choices)
[0-255] (single value)
N (no modification)
If you entered 2 in Step 2, go to Step 11.
This entry specifies the new translation type value. The default is the current database
values.

9 Prompt: CNNUM*PLAN=
Enter: (one of the following)
[0-14] (single value)
N (no modification)
If you entered 3 in Step 2, go to Step 11.
This entry specifies the new numbering plan value. The default is the current database
values.

10 Prompt: CNNAD*DR=
Enter: (one of following choices)
[0-126] (single value)
N (no modification)
This entry specifies the new nature of address value. The default is the current
database values.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 331

11 Prompt: CGTADM*TYPE
Enter: (one of the following choices)
N (no modification); go to Step 18.
R (replace); go to Step 12.
I (insert); go to Step 14.
D (delete); go to Step 15.
A (append); go to Step 17.
The default is the current database values.

12 Prompt: CDIGRS*LOC=
Enter: [1–28]
This entry specifies the start location of digit replacement.

13 Prompt: CNUMDR=
Enter: [1-28]; go to Step 17.
This entry specifies the number of digits to be replaced in the MSU.

14 Prompt: CDIGI*LOC=
Enter: [1-28]; go to Step 17.
This entry specifies the start location from where digit is inserted.

15 Prompt: CDIGDS*LOC=
Enter: [1-28]
This entry specifies the start location from where digit is deleted.

16 Prompt: CNUMDD=
Enter: [1-28]; go to Step 18.
This entry specifies the number of digits to be deleted.

17 Prompt: NEW*DIG=
Enter: [1-28 digits] (single value)
This entry specifies the new digits.
The system shows the changed pre-GTT GTM parameters.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 332

18 Prompt: EXECUTE <Y/N>, CHANGE <name>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute changes and exit to the command prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Delete the pre-GTT GTM criteria and GTM parameters

Use this procedure to delete the pre-GTT GTM criteria and the associated GTM parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to deleting the pre-GTT GTM criteria and GTM parameters.

Data tables

The system accesses these data tables to delete the pre-GTT GTM criteria and GTM
parameters:

• GTM parameter (ATW8D)

• Pre-GTT GTM criteria (ATW8C)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DELETE SCCP PREGTM

2 Prompt: GTF=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1 (NADDR); go to Step 5.
2 (TRANSTYPE)
3 (TRANSTYPE and NUMPLAN)
4 (TRANSTYPE, NUMPLAN, and NADDR)

3 Prompt: TRA*TYPE=
Enter: [0–255]
If you enter 2 in Step 2 and a single value is entered in Step 3, go to Step 6.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 333

This entry specifies the translation type.

4 Prompt: NUM*PLAN=
Enter: [0–14]
If you enter 3 in Step 2 and a single value is entered in Step 4, go to Step 6.
This entry specifies the valid numbering plans.
The default is 0.

5 Prompt: NAD*DR=
Enter: [0–126]
This entry specifies the nature of address indicators.
The default is 0.

6 Prompt: GTTTWEC=
Enter: [1–28]
This entry specifies the global title address digits.

7 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute changes and exit to the command prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display the pre-GTT GTM criteria and GTM parameters

Use this procedure to show the pre-GTT GTM criteria and the associated GTM parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying the pre-GTT GTM criteria and GTM parameters.

Data tables

No data tables are affected by this command.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 334

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLAY SCCP PREGTM

2 Prompt: GTF=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1 (NADDR); go to Step 5.
2 (TRANSTYPE)
3 (TRANSTYPE and NUMPLAN)
4 (TRANSTYPE, NUMPLAN, and NADDR)

3 Prompt: DTRA*TYPE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
[0–255] (single value)
ALL; go to Step 7.
If you enter 2 in Step 2 and a single value is entered in Step 3, go to Step 6.
This entry specifies the translation type.

4 Prompt: DNUM*PLAN=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
[0–14] (single value)
ALL; go to Step 7.
If you enter 3 in Step 2 and a single value is entered in Step 4, go to Step 6.
This entry specifies the valid numbering plans. The default is 0.

5 Prompt: DNAD*DR=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
[0–126] (single value)
ALL; go to Step 7.
This entry specifies the nature of address indicators. The default is 0.

6 Prompt: GTTTWEC=
Enter: [1–28]
This entry specifies the global title address digits.
The system shows the pre-GTT GTM criteria and GTM parameters.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 335

7 To display another node, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

8 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Display the GTM parameters

Use this procedure to show the GTM parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying the GTM parameters.

Data tables

No data tables are affected by this command.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLAY SCCP GTMPARAM

2 Prompt: GTMNUM=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
[1–199] (single value); go to Step 13.
ALL; go to Step 13.
<RETURN>; go to Step 3.

3 Prompt: NTRA*TYPE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
[0–255] (single value)
N (no modification)
ALL
This entry specifies the translation type. The default value is ALL.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 336

4 Prompt: NNUM*PLAN=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
[0–14] (single value)
N (no modification)
ALL
This entry specifies the valid numbering plans. The default is ALL.

5 Prompt: NNAD*DR=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
[0–126] (single value)
N (no MSU modification)
ALL
This entry specifies the nature of address indicators. The default is ALL.

6 Prompt: GTADM*TYPE
Enter: (one of the following choices)
N (no modification); go to Step 13.
R (replace); go to Step 7.
I (insert); go to Step 9.
D (delete); go to Step 10.
A (append); go to Step 12.
ALL; go to Step 13.
The default is the current database values.

7 Prompt: DIGRS*LOC=
Enter: [1–28 or ALL]
1–28(single value)
ALL; go to Step 13.
This entry specifies the start location of digit replacement.

8 Prompt: NUMDR=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
[1-28] (single value); go to Step 12.
ALL; go to Step 12.
This entry specifies the number of digits to be replaced in the MSU.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 337

9 Prompt: DIGI*LOC=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
[1–28] (single value); go to Step 12.
ALL; go to Step 12.
This entry specifies the start location from where digit is inserted. The default is ALL.

10 Prompt: DIGDS*LOC=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
[1–28] (single value); go to Step 11.
ALL; go to Step 12.
This entry specifies the start location from where digit is deleted. The default is ALL.

11 Prompt: NUMDD=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
[1–28] (single value); go to Step 13.
ALL; go to Step 13.
This entry specifies the number of digits to be deleted. The default is ALL.

12 Prompt: NEW*DIG=
Enter: [1–28 digits] (single value)
This entry specifies the new digits.
The system shows the changed pre-GTT GTM criteria and GTM parameters.

13 To display another node, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

14 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Regular GTT
Each SS7 destination that handles SS7 messages must have a TT and GTA. A regular GTT
destination group consists of one or more SS7 destinations.

A regular GTT destination group is assigned to each GTA in a TT. The same GTT destination
group can be assigned to one or more GTAs in a TT and to GTAs in other TTs. A GTA in a TT can
be assigned to only one regular GTT destination group.

You can perform the following regular GTT procedures:

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 338

• Assign a regular GTT entry

• Change a regular GTT entry
• Display a regular GTT entry
• Delete a regular GTT entry

Assign a regular GTT entry

Use this procedure to add regular GTT data for the 28-digit addresses single destinations.

Global title data is specified as a single digit or range of digits whose number is determined by
the translation mechanism assigned to the type through the ASSIGN SCCP TRANSL command or
the CHANGE SCCP TRANSL command.

Assign a destination by specifying a group name or a group number.

Constraints

The following constraints apply to adding a regular GTT destination pair:

• Define the TT, translation mechanism, and the GTT destination group in the database
before adding the GTT destination. The TT cannot be defined as shared in the database.
• A range cannot overlap another range with the same TT.
• Single values cannot be defined more than once. Single values cannot fall on or in the
boundaries of a range defined in the same TT.
• If the number of entered digits is fewer than the number required by the translation
mechanism, the system assigns a range as follows:
– The value entered is right-padded with zeros.
– An ending value is created by right-padding with nines.

Data tables

The following data tables are affected when a GTT destination pair is added:

• Regular GTT (W86)

• TT mapping (W85)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 339

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: ASSIGN GLOBAL TRANSL

2 Prompt: GTF=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1 (NADDR); go to Step 5.
2 (TRANSTYPE)
3 (TRANSTYPE and NUMPLAN)
4 (TRANSTYPE and NUMPLAN, NADDR)

3 Prompt: TRA*TYPE=
Enter: [0-255]
If you enter 2 in Step 2, go to Step 6; otherwise, continue.

4 Prompt: NUM*PLAN=
Enter: [0-14]
The default is 0.

5 Prompt: NAD*DR=
Enter: [0-126]
The default is 0.

6 Prompt: GTTTWEA=
Enter: [1-28]

7 Prompt: GTTD*NAME=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
Destination group name; go to Step 9.
<RETURN>; continue.
The default is group number.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 340

8 Prompt: GTNA*NUM=
Enter: [1-1125]
The system shows the parameters.

9 Prompt: GTMREQ=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y or N]
If you enter YES, continue; otherwise, go to Step 21.

10 Prompt: GTMNUM=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
[1-199] (single value); go to Step 21.
<RETURN>; go to Step 11.
If you enter 1 in Step 2 and default is entered in Step 10, go to Step 13.

11 Prompt: NTRA*TYPE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
[0-255] (single value)
N (no modification)
If you enter 2 in Step 2, go to Step 14.

12 Prompt: NNUM*PLAN=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
[0-14] (single value)
N (no modification)
If you enter 2 in Step 2, go to Step 14.

13 Prompt: NNAD*DR=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
[0-126] (single value)
N (no modification)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 341

14 Prompt: GTADM*TYPE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
N (no modification); go to Step 21.
R (replace); go to Step 15.
I (insert); go to Step 17.
D (delete); go to Step 18.
A (append); go to Step 20.

15 Prompt: DIGRS*LOC=
Enter: [1-28]

16 Prompt: NUMDR=
Enter: [1-28]; go to Step 20.

17 Prompt: DIGI*LOC=
Enter: [1-28]; go to Step 20.

18 Prompt: DIGI*LOC=
Enter: [1-28]

19 Prompt: NUMDD=
Enter: [1-28]; go to Step 21.

20 Prompt: NEW*DIG=
Enter: [1-28]
Enter single value.
This entry specifies the new digits.

21 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute changes and exit to the command prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 342

Change a regular GTT entry

Use this procedure to reassign all regular GTT data from one TT to another, whose translation
mechanism is the same as the original.

This procedure also modifies regular GTT data for 28-digit GTT addresses single destinations.

Constraints

The following constraints apply to changing a regular GTT destination:

• The TT, translation mechanism, and the GTT destination group must first be defined in the
database. The TT cannot be defined as shared in the database.
• A range cannot overlap another range with the same TT.
• Single values cannot be defined more than once. Single values cannot fall on or in the
boundaries of a range defined in the same TT.
• If the number of entered digits is fewer than the number required by the translation
mechanism, the system assigns a range as follows:
– The value entered is right-padded with zeros.
– An ending value is created by right-padding with nines.

Data tables

The following data tables are affected when a GTT destination is changed:

• TT mapping (W85)
• Regular GTT (W86)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE GLOBAL TRANSL

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 343

2 Prompt: GTF=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1 (NADDR); go to Step 5.
2 (TRANSTYPE)
3 (TRANSTYPE and NUMPLAN)
4 (TRANSTYPE and NUMPLAN, NADDR)

3 Prompt: TRA*TYPE=
Enter: [0-255]
If you enter 2 in Step 2, go to Step 6; otherwise, continue.

4 Prompt: NUM*PLAN=
Enter: [0-14]
The default is 0.

5 Prompt: NAD*DR=
Enter: [0-126]
The default is 0.

6 Prompt: GTTTWEA=
Enter: [1-28]
Enter a single value or range.

7 Prompt: GTTD*NAME=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
Destination group name; go to Step 9.
<RETURN>; continue.

8 Prompt: GTNB*NUM=
Enter: [1-1125]
The system shows the parameters.

9 Prompt: CGTMREQ=
Enter: [YES, NO, Y, or N]
If you enter YES, continue; otherwise, go to Step 21.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 344

10 Prompt: CGTMNUM=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
[1-199] (single value); go to Step 21.
<RETURN>; go to Step 11.
If you enter 1 in Step 2 and default is entered in Step 10, go to Step 13.

11 Prompt: CNTRA*TYPE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
[0-255] (single value)
N (no modification)
If you enter 2 in Step 2, go to Step 14.

12 Prompt: CNNUM*PLAN=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
[0-14] (single value)
N (no modification)
If you enter 2 in Step 2, go to Step 14.

13 Prompt: CNNAD*DR=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
[0-126] (single value)
N (no modification)

14 Prompt: CGTADM*TYPE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
N (no modification); go to Step 21.
R (replace); go to Step 15.
I (insert); go to Step 17.
D (delete); go to Step 18.
A (append); go to Step 20.

15 Prompt: CDIGRS*LOC=
Enter: [1-28]

16 Prompt: CNUMDR=
Enter: [1-28]; go to Step 20.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 345

17 Prompt: CDIGI*LOC=
Enter: [1-28]; go to Step 20.

18 Prompt: CDIGI*LOC=
Enter: [1-28]

19 Prompt: CNUMDD=
Enter: [1-28]; go to Step 21.

20 Prompt: CNEW*DIG=
Enter: [1-28]
Enter single value.
This entry specifies the new digits.

21 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute changes and exit to the command prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display a regular GTT entry

Use this procedure to show GTT data for the 28-digit single destinations:

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying a regular GTT entry.

Data tables

The system retrieves parameters from the following data tables:

• TT mapping (W85)
• Regular GTT (W86)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 346

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLAY GLOBAL TRANSL

2 Prompt: GTF=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1 (NADDR); go to Step 5.
2 (TRANSTYPE)
3 (TRANSTYPE and NUMPLAN)
3 (TRANSTYPE and NUMPLAN, NADDR)

3 Prompt: DSPT*TYP=
Enter: [0-255 or ALL]
If you enter ALL; go to Step 7.
If you enter 3 or 4 in Step 2, go to Step 4.
If you enter 2 in Step 2, go to Step 6.

4 Prompt: DNUM*PLAN=
Enter: [0-14 or ALL]
If you enter ALL; go to Step 7.
The default is 0.

5 Prompt: DNAD*DR=
Enter: [0-126 or ALL]
The default value is 0.

6 Prompt: GTTTWEC=
Enter: [1-28 or ALL]

7 Prompt: DIS1A*FORM=
Enter: [BRIEF, DETAIL, B, or D]

8 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

9 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 347

Delete a regular GTT entry

Use this procedure to delete regular GTT data for a TT. Global title data is specified as a single
digit, a range of digits, or by specifying ALL.

Constraints

If regular GTT data assigned to a translation mechanism is deleted, messages are not routed
for those global titles.

Data tables

One or both of the following data tables are changed when a regular GTT destination is
removed from the database:

• TT mapping (W85)
• Regular GTT (W86)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not execute database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

! ALERT
ALERT! Deleting the last regular GTT may result in removal of the associated subsystem,
subsequent failures, and possible service interruption.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: DELETE GLOBAL TRANSL

2 Prompt: GTF=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1 (NADDR); go to Step 5.
2 (TRANSTYPE)
3 (TRANSTYPE and NUMPLAN)
3 (TRANSTYPE and NUMPLAN, NADDR)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 GTT for SCCP
Page 348

Enter the global title format.

3 Prompt: TRA*TYPE=
Enter: [0-255]
Enter the translation type.
If you enter 2 in Step 2, go to Step 6.

4 Prompt: NUM*PLAN=
Enter: [0-14]
Enter the numbering plan value.
The default is 0.

5 Prompt: NAD*DR=
Enter: [0-126 or ALL]

6 Prompt: GTTTWEC=
Enter: [1-28]
Enter the global title address digits.
Enter a single value, range, list, or ALL for all the values.

7 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 SCCP applications
Page 349

SCCP applications

When a subsystem is duplicated at two different DPCs, the subsystem's DPCs can be assigned as
mated applications in the 5070 SSG. In a mated application, at least one subsystem resides in a
node adjacent to the 5070 SSG. SCCP management uses the mated application feature to
inform the subsystem of a change of status in its mate.

You can perform the following mated application procedures:

• Assign a mated application

• Change a mated application
• Display a mated application
• Delete a mated subsystem

Assign a mated application

Use this procedure to add a subsystem to its mate application. The subsystem and its mate are
validated by confirming their existence in the database and ensuring that neither has a
previously assigned mate.

Constraints

The following constraints apply to completing the mated application form:

• Subsystem names must be defined on the subsystem name form.

• The node name must be defined on either the ordered route form or the link set form.
• At least one of the subsystems must be at a local or adjacent node.

Data tables

The system accesses the subsystem status data table (Y83) to add a mated application to the
database.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 SCCP applications
Page 350

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not enter database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: ASSIGN SCCP MAP

2 Prompt: SUB*NAME=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
The subsystem name; go to Step 7.
<RETURN>; continue.

3 Prompt: NODE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
The node name; go to Step 6.
<RETURN>; continue.

4 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number
Enter the logical network name of 1-16 characters or a number between the range of
0-31.
The default value is none.

5 Prompt: PNT*COD=
Enter: point code
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.
The default value is none.
The system shows the parameters assigned to the node.

6 Prompt: SUBNO=
Enter: subsystem number

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 SCCP applications
Page 351

7 Prompt: MSUB*NAME=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
The mated subsystem name; go to Step 12.
<RETURN>; continue.

8 Prompt: MNODE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
The mated node name; go to Step 11.
<RETURN>; continue.

9 Prompt: MLOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number
Enter the logical network name of 1-16 characters or a number between the range of
0-31.
The default value is none.

10 Prompt: MPNT*COD=
Enter: mated point code

11 Prompt: MSUBNO=
Enter: mated subsystem number

12 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute changes and exit to the command prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Change a mated application

Use this procedure to change a mated application for a subsystem. The system validates a new
mated application by confirming its existence in the database and ensuring that it does not
have a previously assigned mate. The old mate becomes unassigned by resetting the subsystem
table (Y83) entry.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 SCCP applications
Page 352

Constraints

The following constraints apply to completing the mated application form:

• Subsystem names must be defined on the subsystem name form.

• The node name must be defined in the ordered route database or the link set database.
• At least one of the subsystems must be at a local or adjacent node.

Data tables

The system accesses the subsystem status data table (Y83) to change a mated application.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not enter database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE SCCP MAP

2 Prompt: SUB*NAME=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
The subsystem name; go to Step 7.
<RETURN>; continue.

3 Prompt: NODE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
The node name; go to Step 6.
<RETURN>; continue.

4 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number
The default value is none.

5 Prompt: PNT*COD=
Enter: point code

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 SCCP applications
Page 353

The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.
The default value is none.
The system shows the parameters assigned to the node.

6 Prompt: SUBNO=
Enter: subsystem number

7 Prompt: MSUB*NAME=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
The mated subsystem name to be changed; go to Step 12.
<RETURN>; continue.

8 Prompt: MNODE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
The mated node name to be changed; go to Step 11.
<RETURN>; continue.

9 Prompt: MLOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number
The default value is none.

10 Prompt: MPNT*COD=
Enter: mated point code

11 Prompt: MSUBNO=
Enter: mated subsystem number

12 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute changes and exit to the command prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 SCCP applications
Page 354

Display a mated application

Use this procedure to provide a report on one or all subsystems as requested. This report lists
basic information about the subsystem and its mate. All information is obtained from the
database.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying mated application assignments.

Data tables

The system retrieves SCCP mated applications from the following data tables:

• Node name (Y55)

• Subsystem status (Y83)
• Subsystem name (Y84)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLA SCCP MAP

2 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name, number, or All
The default value is none.

3 Prompt: DSUB*NAME=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
The subsystem name (the system shows the mated application).
ALL (the system shows all mated applications); go to Step 7.
<RETURN>; continue.

4 Prompt: NODE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
The node name; go to Step 6.
<RETURN>; continue.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 SCCP applications
Page 355

5 Prompt: PNT*COD=
Enter: point code
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.
The default value is none.
The system shows the parameters assigned to the node.

6 Prompt: SUBNO=
Enter: subsystem number
The system shows the mated application.

7 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

8 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Delete a mated subsystem

Use this procedure to delete a subsystem from its mate by resetting the entry for both
subsystems in the database.

Constraints

No constraints apply to deleting mated application assignments.

Data tables

The system accesses the subsystem status data table (Y83) to delete a mated application.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not enter database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: DELETE SCCP MAP

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01, October 2007 SCCP applications
Page 356

2 Prompt: SUB*NAME=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
The subsystem name to be deleted; go to Step 7.
<RETURN>; continue.

3 Prompt: NODE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
The node name to be deleted; go to Step 6.
<RETURN>; continue.

4 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number
The default value is none.

5 Prompt: PNT*COD=
Enter: point code
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.
The default value is none.
The system shows the parameters assigned to the node.

6 Prompt: SUBNO=
Enter: subsystem number

7 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute changes and exit to the command prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Concerned signaling points
Page 357

Concerned signaling points

A group of SPs can be defined for a DPC of a subsystem. These SPs are notified of a status
change for that subsystem. This group of SPs is called a CSP group.

The following topics provide information about the CSPs:

• CSP tasks
• CSP groups
• CSPs

CSP tasks

Establish SCCP definitions

Use this procedure to establish SCCP definitions in the database.

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not enter database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Add subsystem names.

2 Add mated applications.

3 Add CSP groups.

4 Add CSPs (SSNs and DPCs) to the CSP groups.

END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Concerned signaling points
Page 358

Delete a CSP group or member

Use this procedure to delete a CSP group or member.

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not enter database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 If a group is to be deleted, remove a CSP for each SSN and DPC where the group is
assigned.

2 If a group or member is to be deleted, remove a CSP group (remove a single member, or

list all members to delete the group).
END PROCEDURE

CSP groups
Signaling points that require notification of a subsystem status change are called CSPs.
Signaling points that are concerned about the same subsystem point code are grouped together
and assigned a name in the 5070 SSG database.

Note: Create a concerned signaling point group for a destination group with two or more final
destinations. Each destination should consist of the other final destinations in the destination
group. If the concerned signaling point groups are not defined, the other point codes in the
group do not receive status changes related to the subsystem.

You can perform the following CSP group procedures:

• Assign a CSP group

• Change a CSP group
• Display a CSP group
• Delete a CSP group

Assign a CSP group

Use this procedure to assign a single concerned node or a list of concerned nodes to a group
name. If the group name does not exist, the new group is created by adding it to the database.
Each concerned node is assigned in the database.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Concerned signaling points
Page 359

Constraints

The following constraint apply to adding a CSP group:

• The node name and DPC must be listed on either the ordered route form or the link set
form.

Data tables

The following data tables are updated when a CSP group is added to the database:

• Concerned signaling point code (W89)

• CSP group (S89)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not enter database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

Note: Many subsystems can be assigned to the same CSP group.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: ASSIGN SCCP CSPGRP

2 Prompt: GROUP=
Enter: concerned signaling point group name

3 Prompt: NODE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
The node name; go to Step 6.
<RETURN>; continue.

4 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number
Enter the logical network name of 1-16 characters or a number between the range of
0-31.
The default value is none.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Concerned signaling points
Page 360

5 Prompt: PNT*COD=
Enter: point code
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.
The default value is none.
The system shows the parameters assigned to the node.

6 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Change a CSP group

Use this procedure to change the existing members to another node name. To add a new
member to the group, refer to Assign a CSP group.

Constraints

The following constraints apply to changing a CSP group:

• The node name and DPCs must be listed in the ordered route database or the link set
database.
• Nodes in the CSP group must use member (full point code) routing.

Data tables

The system accesses the concerned signaling point code data table (W89) to change a CSP.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not enter database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Concerned signaling points
Page 361

1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE SCCP CSPGRP

2 Prompt: GROUP=
Enter: concerned signaling point group name

3 Prompt: SELECT=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
A selection number (1-n) of the group member to be changed
A list of selection numbers separated by commas

4 Prompt: NODE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
The node name; go to Step 7.
<RETURN>; continue.

5 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number
The default value is none.

6 Prompt: PNT*COD=
Enter: point code
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.
The default value is none.
The system shows the parameters assigned to the node.

7 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display a CSP group

Use this procedure to show one or all CSP groups.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Concerned signaling points
Page 362

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying a CSP group.

Data tables

The system retrieves CSP parameters from the following data tables:

• MTP node name (Y55)

• Subsystem status (Y83)
• Subsystem name (Y84)
• Concerned signaling point code (W89)
• CSP group (S89)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLA SCCP CSPGRP

2 Prompt: DGROUP=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
A concerned signaling point group name; go to Step 4.
ALL; continue.

3 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name, number, or ALL

4 Prompt: FORMAT=
Enter: (a character from one of the following choices)
A (group assignments)
B (brief description)
C (group contents)
The system shows the CSP group.

5 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.
END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Concerned signaling points
Page 363

Delete a CSP group

Use this procedure to delete nodes from a concerned signaling point group. If the command
empties the group, the system deletes the group.

Constraints

No constraints apply to deleting a CSP group.

Data tables

The following data tables are affected when a CSP group is deleted:

• Concerned signaling point code (W89)

• CSP group (S89)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not enter database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: DELETE SCCP CSPGRP

2 Prompt: GROUP=
Enter: concerned signaling point group name

3 Prompt: SELECT=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
A selection number (1-n) of the group member to be deleted
A list of selection numbers separated by commas

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Concerned signaling points
Page 364

4 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

CSPs
The SPs that require notification of a system status change are called CSPs. SPs that are
concerned about the same subsystem are grouped together and associated with the subsystems
in the 5070 SSG database. The system generates a notification to the CSPs when that
subsystem or point code status changes.

Note: Many subsystems can be assigned to the same CSP group.

You can perform the following CSP procedures:

• Assign a CSP
• Change a CSP
• Display a CSP
• Delete a CSP

Assign a CSP
Use this procedure to assign a group of concerned signaling points to a subsystem. The
subsystem entered is validated by confirming its existence in the database and assuring it is
not currently assigned to a group. An entry is assigned a group in the database to establish the
relationship between the subsystem and a group of concerned nodes.

Constraints

The following constraints apply to adding a CSP:

• The group name must already be defined in the concerned signaling point group database.
• Many point codes can be assigned to the same CSP group, but only one CSP group can be
assigned to a subsystem.
• Subsystem names must already be defined in the subsystem name database.
• The node name must be defined in the ordered route database or the link set database.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Concerned signaling points
Page 365

Data tables

The following tables are accessed when a CSP is added.

• Global title translation type (Y85)

• Global title translation (W86)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not enter database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: ASSIGN SCCP CSP

2 Prompt: SUB*NAME=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
The subsystem name; go to Step 7.
<RETURN>; continue.

3 Prompt: NODE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
The node name; go to Step 6.
<RETURN>; continue.

4 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number
Enter the logical network name of 1-16 characters or a number between the range of
0-31.
The default value is none.

5 Prompt: PNT*COD=
Enter: point code
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.
The default value is none.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Concerned signaling points
Page 366

The system shows the parameters assigned to the node.

6 Prompt: SUBNO=
Enter: subsystem number

7 Prompt: GROUP=
Enter: CSP group name

8 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute changes and exit to the command prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Change a CSP
Use this procedure to reassign a group of CSPs from one subsystem to another. The subsystem
is validated by confirming its existence in the database and ensuring it is not currently assigned
to a group. The entry is changed in the database to establish the relationship between the
subsystem and a group of concerned nodes.

Constraints

The following constraints apply to changing CSPs:

• The group name must already be defined in the concerned signaling point group database.
• Many point codes can be assigned to the same CSP group, but only one CSP group can be
assigned to a subsystem.
• When a change to a CSP changes its state from ported to nonported, the system does not
remove the CSP from the CSP status data table (W89). The system maintains the CSP with
the nonported flag set to allow the CSP to be changed back to ported at a later date.

Data tables

The subsystem changes the CSP status data table (W89) tables to change a CSP.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Concerned signaling points
Page 367

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not enter database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE SCCP CSP

2 Prompt: SUB*NAME=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
The subsystem name to be changed; go to Step 7.
<RETURN>; continue.

3 Prompt: NODE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
The node name to be changed; go to Step 6.
<RETURN>; continue.

4 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number
The default value is none.

5 Prompt: PNT*COD=
Enter: point code
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.
The default value is none.
The system shows the parameters assigned to the node.

6 Prompt: SUBNO=
Enter: subsystem number

7 Prompt: GROUP=
Enter: a concerned signaling point group name

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Concerned signaling points
Page 368

8 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute changes and exit to the command prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display a CSP
Use this procedure to show a brief or detailed report of one or all subsystems as requested.
The brief report lists basic information about the subsystem and the name of its assigned CSP
group. The detailed report shows all the information shown by the brief report, as well as a list
of all the nodes in the CSP group.

Constraints

No constraints apply to verifying a CSP.

Data tables

The system retrieves CSP group parameters from the following data tables:

• Node name (Y55)

• Subsystem status (Y83)
• Subsystem name (Y84)
• Concerned signaling point code (W89)
• CSP group (S89)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLA SCCP CSP

2 Prompt: DSUB*NAME=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
The subsystem name; go to Step 7.
ALL; go to Step 4.
<RETURN>; continue.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Concerned signaling points
Page 369

3 Prompt: NODE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
The node name; go to Step 6.
<RETURN>; continue.

4 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number
The default value is none.

5 Prompt: PNT*COD=
Enter: point code
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.
The default value is none.
The system shows the parameters assigned to the node.

6 Prompt: SUBNO=
Enter: subsystem number

7 Prompt: FORMAT=
Enter: [B or D]
B (brief format)
D (detailed format)

8 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

9 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Delete a CSP
Use this procedure to disassociate a subsystem from a group of concerned signaling points.

Constraints

The following constraint applies to deleting a CSP:

• When a change to a CSP changes its state from ported to nonported, the system does not
remove the CSP from the subsystem status data table (Y83) table. The system maintains

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Concerned signaling points
Page 370

the CSP with the nonported flag set to allow the CSP to be changed back to ported at a
later date.

Data tables

The system accesses subsystem status data table (Y83) to delete a CSP.

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not enter database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: DELETE SCCP CSP

2 Prompt: SUB*NAME=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
The subsystem name to be deleted; go to Step 7.
<RETURN>; continue.

3 Prompt: NODE=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
The node name to be deleted; go to Step 6.
<RETURN>; continue.

4 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number
The default value is none.

5 Prompt: PNT*COD=
Enter: point code
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.
The default value is none.
The system shows the parameters assigned to the node.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Concerned signaling points
Page 371

6 Prompt: SUBNO=
Enter: subsystem number

7 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute changes and exit to the command prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 372

Gateway screening

The following topics provide information about gateway screening:

• Screening features
• Gateway screening supporting tables
• Gateway screening MMI commands
• Gateway link set
• Allowed/blocked OPC
• Allowed SIO
• Allowed/blocked DPC
• Allowed affected destination
• Allowed CGPA global title address
• Allowed calling party address
• Allowed CDPA global title address
• Allowed called party address
• Allowed affected point code
• Gateway screening threshold
• Gateway screening throttle

Screening features
The gateway screening feature provides the 5070 SSG capabilities to screen incoming MTP and
SCCP message traffic received on link sets designated as gateway link sets. This feature
provides protection against unauthorized traffic or traffic sent in error to a network.

The gateway screening feature provides a local MMI interface for operations personnel at the
5070 SSG to provision gateway screening tables. The gateway screening tables contain
parameters from selected fields within received MTP and SCCP messages that are to be
screened as allowed or blocked.

• MTP and SCCP messages with message parameters provisioned as allowed in the gateway
screening tables are routed by MTP and SCCP.
• Messages with message parameters provisioned as blocked in the gateway screening tables
are set as failing screening. An IPR is issued and is counted in TMM. If the screening is

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 373

enabled, the message is discarded; otherwise, the message goes through the normal
routing procedure.
• Screening for a message is discontinued if the next screening reference is STOP. The
message is then considered as successfully passing gateway screening.

SSN screening
SSN values that are defined by combining originating and terminiating logical networks are
screened with SSN screening. SCCP messages with non-allowed SSN values are discarded. SSN
screening takes place in the following situations:

• Affected PC/SSN screening

• Calling party PC/SSN screening
• Calling party GTA screening
• Called party PC/SSN screening
• Called party GTA screening

Gateway screening supporting tables

The following tables support the gateway screening feature:

• Link set table - this table contains an indicator specifying that the link set is a gateway
link set.
• Gateway screening reference table - entries in this table are created based on the
screening references. These entries provide the link between screening criteria of
different parameter fields tables that screen received messages.

Gateway screening MMI commands

MMIs are used to provision the following gateway screening tables:

• Gateway link set

• Allowed/blocked OPC
• Allowed SIO
• Allowed/blocked DPC
• Allowed affected destination
• Allowed calling party address global title address
• Allowed calling party address

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 374

• Allowed called party address global title address

• Allowed called party address
• Allowed affected point code
• Gateway screening threshold
• Gateway throttling parameter table

Note: The configuration of gateway screening must be done in the reverse order of the
provision list. For example, the MMIs are executed in the following order to configure the
gateway screening tables:

• Allowed called party address

• Allowed SIO
• Gateway link set

Gateway link set

A link set is provisioned as a gateway link set if gateway screening is to be performed on the
parameters of the received MTP and SCCP messages.

You can perform the following gateway link set procedures:

• Assign the gateway link set

• Change the gateway link set
• Delete the gateway link set
• Display the gateway link set

Assign the gateway link set

Use this procedure to assign the gateway screening link set.

Constraints

No constraints apply to assigning the gateway link set.

Data tables

The following data tables are affected when gateway link set parameters are assigned:

• Gateway link set table (ATW70)

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 375

• Gateway network table (ATW33)

• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: ASSIGN GWSCR GTWYLS

2 Prompt: LSNAME=
Enter: a unique gateway link set name

3 Prompt: LNKGID=
Enter: [01-99]

4 Prompt: NSFI=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
OPC
DPC
BLKOPC
BLKDPC
SIO
STOP
If you enter STOP, go to Step 6; otherwise, continue.

5 Prompt: NSR=
Enter: next screening reference

6 Prompt: REJIPR=
Enter: [Y or N]
Y (enable rejected MSU IPR)
N (disable rejected MSU IPR)

7 Prompt: SCREEN=
Enter: [Y or N]
Y (enable screening)
N (disable screening)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 376

8 Prompt: REM*ARK=
Enter: remark

9 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Change the gateway link set

Use this procedure to change the gateway screening link set.

Constraints

No constraints apply to changing the gateway link set.

Data tables

The following data tables are affected or referenced when gateway link set parameters are
changed:

• Gateway link set table (ATW70)

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)
• Gateway network table (ATW33)
• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE GWSCR GTWYLS

2 Prompt: LSNAME=
Enter: gateway link set name

3 Prompt: NEWLNKGID=
Enter: [1-99]

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 377

4 Prompt: NEWNSFI=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
OPC
DPC
BLKOPC
BLKDPC
SIO
STOP
If you enter STOP, go to Step 6; otherwise, continue.

5 Prompt: NEWNSR=
Enter: new next screening reference

6 Prompt: NEWREJIPR=
Enter: [Y or N]
Y (enable new rejected MSU IPR)
N (disable new rejected MSU IPR)

7 Prompt: NEWSCR=
Enter: [Y or N]
Y (enable new screening)
N (disable new screening)

8 Prompt: NEWREM*ARK=
Enter: new remark

9 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Delete the gateway link set

Use this procedure to delete the gateway screening link set.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 378

Constraints

No constraints apply to deleting the gateway link set.

Data tables

The following data tables are affected when gateway link set parameters are deleted:

• Gateway link set table (ATW70)

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)
• Gateway network table (ATW33)
• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DELETE GWSCR GTWYLS

2 Prompt: LSNAME=
Enter: link set name
The system shows the parameters.

3 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display the gateway link set

Use this procedure to display the gateway screening link sets.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying the gateway link set.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 379

Data tables

The system retrieves the gateway link set parameters from the following data tables:

• Gateway link set table (ATW70)

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)
• Gateway network table (ATW33)
• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLAY GWSCR GTWYLS

2 Prompt: DLSNAME=
Enter: gateway link set name or ALL
The system shows the parameters.

3 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

4 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Allowed/blocked OPC
You can perform the following gateway screening OPC procedures:

• Assign GWSCR OPC

• Change GWSCR OPC
• Delete GWSCR OPC
• Display GWSCR OPC

Assign GWSCR OPC

Use this procedure to assign the OPC gateway screening parameters.

Constraints

No constraint applies to assigning GWSCR OPC.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 380

Data tables

The following data tables are affected when OPC gateway screening parameters are assigned:

• Allowed/blocked originating point code (ATS61)

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)
• Gateway network table (ATW33)
• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: ASSIGN GWSCR OPC

2 Prompt: SF=
Enter: [A or B]
A (allowed)
B (blocked)

3 Prompt: SR=
Enter: screening reference
If you enter A in Step 2, go to Step 5; otherwise, continue.

4 Prompt: NOMATCH=
Enter: [Y or N]
Y (no match record); go to Step 9.
N (blocked record)
The default value is N.

5 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number
Enter the logical network name of 1-16 characters or a number between the range of
0-31.
The default value is none.

6 Prompt: PCSR=
Enter: point code start range or ALL

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 381

If you enter ALL, go to Step 8; otherwise, continue

The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

7 Prompt: PCER=
Enter: point code end range or ALL
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

8 Prompt: NSFI1=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
BLKOPC
SIO
DPC
BLKDPC
CGGTA
CGPA
AFTDES
STOP
If you enter STOP, go to Step 13; otherwise, go to Step 10.

9 Prompt: NSFIB1=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
SIO
DPC
BLKDPC
CGGTA
CGPA
AFTDES
FAIL
STOP
If you enter STOP or FAIL, go to Step 13; otherwise, continue.

10 Prompt: NSR1=
Enter: next screening reference
If you enter CGPA or CGGTA in Step 8 or Step 9, go to Step 11; otherwise, go to Step 13.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 382

11 Prompt: NSFI2=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
CGGTA
CGPA
STOP
FAIL
If you enter STOP or FAIL, go to Step 13; otherwise, continue.
If you enter CGPA in Step 8 or Step 9, then the choices are: CGGTA, STOP, FAIL.
If you enter CGGTA in Step 8 or Step 9, then the choices are: CGPA, STOP, FAIL.

12 Prompt: NSR2=
Enter: next screening reference

13 Prompt: REM*ARK=
Enter: remark

14 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Change GWSCR OPC

Use this procedure to modify the OPC gateway screening parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to changing GWSCR OPC.

Data tables

The following data tables are affected or referenced when OPC gateway screening parameters
are changed:

• Allowed/blocked originating point code (ATS61)

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)
• Gateway network table (ATW33)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 383

• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE GWSCR OPC

2 Prompt: SF=
Enter: [A or B]
A (allowed)
B (blocked)

3 Prompt: SR=
Enter: screening reference
If you enter A in Step 2, go to Step 6; otherwise, continue.

4 Prompt: NOMATCH=
Enter: [Y or N]
Y (no match record); go to Step 11.
N (blocked record)

5 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number

6 Prompt: PCSR=
Enter: point code start range or ALL
If you enter ALL, go to Step 8; otherwise, continue
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

7 Prompt: PCER=
Enter: point code end range or ALL
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 384

8 Prompt: NEWPCSR=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
New point code start range
ALL; go to Step 10.
<RETURN> (current value).

9 Prompt: NEWPCER=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
New point code end range
ALL; go to Step 2.
<RETURN> (current value).

10 Prompt: NEWNSFI1=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
BLKOPC
SIO
DPC
BLKDPC
CGGTA
CGPA
AFTDEST
STOP
<RETURN> (current value)
If you enter STOP, go to Step 15; otherwise, go to Step 12.

11 Prompt: NEWNSFIB1=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
SIO
DPC
BLKDPC
CGGTA
CGPA
AFTDEST
FAIL
STOP
<RETURN> (current value)
If you enter STOP or FAIL, go to Step 15; otherwise, continue.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 385

12 Prompt: NEWNSR1=
Enter: next screening reference
If you enter CGPA or CGGTA in Step 10 or Step 11, go to Step 13; otherwise, go to
Step 15.

13 Prompt: NEWNSFI2=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
CGPA
CGGTA
STOP
FAIL
If you enter STOP or FAIL, go to Step 15; otherwise, continue.
If you enter CGPA in Step 10 or Step 11, then the choices are: CGGTA, STOP, FAIL.
If you enter CGGTA in Step 10 or Step 11, then the choices are: CGPA, STOP, FAIL.

14 Prompt: NEWNSR2=
Enter: next screening reference

15 Prompt: NEWREM=
Enter: new remark

16 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Delete GWSCR OPC

Use this procedure to delete OPC gateway screening entities.

Constraints

No constraints apply to deleting GWSCR OPC.

Data tables

The following data tables are affected when OPC gateway screening parameters are deleted:

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 386

• Allowed/blocked originating point code (ATS61)

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)
• Gateway network table (ATW33)
• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DELETE GWSCR OPC

2 Prompt: SF=
Enter: [A or B]
A (allowed)
B (blocked)

3 Prompt: SR=
Enter: screening reference
If you enter A in Step 2, go to Step 6; otherwise, continue.

4 Prompt: NOMATCH=
Enter: [Y or N]
Y (no match record)
N (blocked record)

5 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number

6 Prompt: PCSR=
Enter: point code start range or ALL
If you enter ALL, go to Step 8; otherwise, continue.
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

7 Prompt: PCER=
Enter: point code end range or ALL
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 387

8 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display GWSCR OPC

Use this procedure to display OPC parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying GWSCR OPC.

Data tables

The system retrieves the OPC gateway screening parameters from the following data tables:

• Allowed/blocked originating point code (ATS61)

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)
• Gateway network table (ATW33)
• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLAY GWSCR OPC

2 Prompt: DSF=
Enter: [A or B]
A (allowed)
B (blocked)
ALL; go to Step 8.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 388

3 Prompt: DSR=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
Screening reference
ALL; go to Step 8.
If you enter A in Step 2, go to Step 6; otherwise, continue.

4 Prompt: DNOMATCH=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (no match record); go to Step 8.
N (blocked record)
ALL; go to Step 8.

5 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number

6 Prompt: PCSR=
Enter: point code start range or ALL
If you enter ALL, go to Step 8; otherwise, continue.
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

7 Prompt: PCER=
Enter: point code end range or ALL
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

8 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

9 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Allowed SIO
You can perform the following gateway screening SIO procedures:

• Assign GWSCR SIO

• Change GWSCR SIO
• Delete GWSCR SIO

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 389

• Display GWSCR SIO

Assign GWSCR SIO

Use this procedure to assign the SIO gateway screening parameters.

Constraints
• If STOP is configured as NSFID for an SR, SI, PRI, H0, H1 where value of SI = 3, then the
same cannot be configured for a secondary NSFID for the same SR, SI, PRI, H0, H1.
• To configure another NSFI for the same SR, either perform the Delete GWSCR SIO
procedure, delete the entry, and reconfigure, or perform the Change GWSCR SIO
procedure for the same SR, SI, PRI, H0, H1.

Data tables

The following data tables are affected when SIO gateway screening parameters are assigned:

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)

• Allowed SIO table (ATS63)
• Gateway network table (ATW33)
• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: ASSIGN GWSCR SIO

2 Prompt: SR=
Enter: screening reference

3 Prompt: PRI=
Enter: priority value or ALL

4 Prompt: SI=
Enter: service indicator or ALL
If you enter 00 or 01, go to Step 5; otherwise, go to Step 7.

5 Prompt: H0=
Enter: heading code or ALL

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 390

6 Prompt: H1=
Enter: heading code or ALL

Note: The set of possible next screening functions is based on the service indicator
value entered in Step 4.

7 Prompt: NSFI=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
DPC
BLKDPC
CGGTA
CGPA
CDGTA
CDPA
AFTDES
STOP
If you enter STOP, go to Step 11; otherwise, continue.

8 Prompt: NSR1=
Enter: next screening reference
If you enter CGPA, CDGTA, CGGTA, or CDPA in Step 7, then go to Step 9; otherwise, go
to Step 11.

Note: The set of possible next screening functions is based on the next screening
function value entered in Step 7.

9 Prompt: NSFI2=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
CGGTA
CGPA
CDGTA
CDPA
STOP
FAIL
If you enter STOP or FAIL, go to Step 11; otherwise, continue.

10 Prompt: NSR2=
Enter: next screening reference

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 391

11 Prompt: REM*ARK=
Enter: remark

12 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Change GWSCR SIO

Use this procedure to modify the SIO gateway screening parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to changing GWSCR SIO.

Data tables

The following data tables are affected or referenced when SIO gateway screening parameters
are changed:

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)

• Allowed SIO table (ATS63)
• Gateway network table (ATW33)
• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE GWSCR SIO

2 Prompt: SR=
Enter: screening reference

3 Prompt: PRI=
Enter: priority value or ALL

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 392

4 Prompt: SI=
Enter: service indicator or ALL
If you enter 00 or 01, go to Step 5; otherwise, go to Step 8.

5 Prompt: H0=
Enter: heading code or ALL

6 Prompt: H1=
Enter: heading code or ALL

7 Prompt: NEWPRI=
Enter: new priority value or ALL

8 Prompt: NEWSI=
Enter: new service indicator or ALL
If you enter 00 or 01, go to Step 9; otherwise, go to Step 11.

9 Prompt: NEWH0=
Enter: new heading code or ALL

10 Prompt: NEWH1=
Enter: new heading code or ALL

Note: The set of possible next screening functions is based on the service indicator
value entered in Step 8.

11 Prompt: NEWNSFI1=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
DPC
BLKDPC
CGGTA
CGPA
CDGTA
CDPA
AFTDEST
STOP
If you enter STOP, go to Step 15; otherwise, continue.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 393

12 Prompt: NEWNSR1=
Enter: new next screening reference
If you enter CGPA, CDGTA, CGGTA, or CDPA in Step 11, then go to Step 13; otherwise,
go to Step 15.

Note: The set of possible next screening functions is based on the next screening
function value entered in Step 11.

13 Prompt: NEWNSFI2=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
CGGTA
CGPA
CDGTA
CDPA
STOP
FAIL
If you enter STOP or FAIL, go to Step 15; otherwise, continue.

14 Prompt: NEWNSR2=
Enter: next screening reference

15 Prompt: NEWREM*ARK=
Enter: remark

16 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Delete GWSCR SIO

Use this procedure to delete SIO gateway screening entities.

Constraints

No constraints apply to deleting GWSCR SIO.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 394

Data tables

The following data tables are affected when SIO gateway screening parameters are deleted:

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)

• Allowed SIO table (ATS63)
• Gateway network table (ATW33)
• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DELETE GWSCR SIO

2 Prompt: SR=
Enter: screening reference

3 Prompt: PRI=
Enter: priority value or ALL
If you enter ALL, go to Step 7.

4 Prompt: SI=
Enter: service indicator or ALL
If you enter 00 or 01, go to Step 5; otherwise, the system shows the parameters. Go to
Step 7.

5 Prompt: H0=
Enter: heading code or ALL

6 Prompt: H1=
Enter: heading code or ALL
The system shows the parameters.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 395

7 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display GWSCR SIO

Use this procedure to display SIO gateway screening parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying GWSCR SIO.

Data tables

The system retrieves the SIO gateway screening parameters from the following data tables:

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)

• Allowed SIO table (ATS63)
• Gateway network table (ATW33)
• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLAY GWSCR SIO

2 Prompt: DSR=
Enter: screening reference or ALL
If you enter ALL, the system shows the parameters; go to Step 7.

3 Prompt: PRI=
Enter: priority value or ALL
If you enter ALL, the system shows the parameters; go to Step 7.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 396

4 Prompt: SI=
Enter: service indicator or ALL
If you enter 00 or 01, go to Step 5; otherwise, the system shows the parameters. Go to
Step 7.

5 Prompt: H0=
Enter: heading code or ALL

6 Prompt: H1=
Enter: heading code or ALL

7 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

8 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Allowed/blocked DPC
You can perform the following gateway screening DPC procedures:

• Assign GWSCR DPC

• Change GWSCR DPC
• Delete GWSCR DPC
• Display GWSCR DPC

Assign GWSCR DPC

Use this procedure to assign the DPC gateway screening parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to assigning GWSCR DPC.

Data tables

The following data tables are affected when DPC gateway screening parameters are assigned:

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)

• Allowed/blocked destination point code table (ATS62)
• Gateway network table (ATW33)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 397

• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: ASSIGN GWSCR DPC

2 Prompt: SF=
Enter: [A or B]
A (allowed)
B (blocked)

3 Prompt: SR=
Enter: screening reference
If you enter A in Step 2, go to Step 6; otherwise, continue.

4 Prompt: NOMATCH=
Enter: [Y or N]
Y (no match record); go to Step 9.
N (blocked record)

5 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number
Enter the logical network name of 1-16 characters or a number between the range of
0-31.
The default value is none.

6 Prompt: PCSR=
Enter: point code start range or ALL
If you enter ALL, go to Step 8; otherwise, continue.
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

7 Prompt: PCER=
Enter: point code end range or ALL
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 398

8 Prompt: NSFI1=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
BLKDPC
CGGTA
CGPA
AFTDEST
STOP
If you enter STOP, go to Step 13; otherwise, go to Step 10.

9 Prompt: NSFIB1=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
CGGTA
CGPA
AFTDES
FAIL
STOP
If you enter STOP or FAIL, go to Step 13; otherwise, continue.

10 Prompt: NSR1=
Enter: next screening reference
If you enter CGPA or CGGTA in Step 8 or Step 9, go to Step 11; otherwise, go to Step 13.
If you enter CGPA in Step 8 or Step 9, then the choices are: CGGTA, STOP, FAIL.
If you enter CGGTA in Step 8 or Step 9, then the choices are: CGPA, STOP, FAIL.

11 Prompt: NSFI2=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
CGPA
CGGTA
STOP
FAIL
If you enter STOP or FAIL, go to Step 13; otherwise, continue.

12 Prompt: NSR2=
Enter: next screening reference

13 Prompt: REM*ARK=
Enter: remark

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 399

14 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute changes and exit to the command prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Change GWSCR DPC

Use this procedure to modify the DPC gateway screening parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to changing GWSCR DPC.

Data tables

The following data tables are affected or referenced when DPC gateway screening parameters
are changed:

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)

• Allowed/blocked destination point code table (ATS62)
• Gateway network table (ATW33)
• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE GWSCR DPC

2 Prompt: SF=
Enter: [A or B]
A (allowed)
B (blocked)

3 Prompt: SR=
Enter: screening reference
If you enter A in Step 2, go to Step 6; otherwise, continue.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 400

4 Prompt: NOMATCH=
Enter: [Y or N]
Y (no match record); go to Step 11.
N (blocked record)

5 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number

6 Prompt: PCSR=
Enter: point code start range or ALL
If you enter ALL, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

7 Prompt: PCER=
Enter: point code end range or ALL
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

8 Prompt: NEWPCSR=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
New point code start range
ALL; go to Step 10.
<RETURN> (current value)

9 Prompt: NEWPCER=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
New point code end range
ALL; go to Step 2.
<RETURN> (current value)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 401

10 Prompt: NEWNSFI1=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
BLKDPC
CGGTA
CGPA
AFTDEST
STOP
<RETURN> (current value)
If you enter STOP, go to Step 15; otherwise, go to Step 12.

11 Prompt: NEWNSFIB1=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
CGGTA
CGPA
AFTDEST
FAIL
STOP
<RETURN> (current value)
If you enter STOP or FAIL, go to Step 15; otherwise, continue.

12 Prompt: NEWNSR1=
Enter: next screening reference
If you enter CGPA or CGGTA in Step 10 or Step 11, go to Step 13; otherwise, go to
Step 15.
If you enter CGPA in Step 10 or Step 11, then the choices are: CGGTA, STOP, FAIL.
If you enter CGGTA in Step 10 or Step 11, then the choices are: CGPA, STOP, FAIL.

13 Prompt: NEWNSFI2=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
CGPA
CGGTA
STOP
FAIL
If you enter STOP or FAIL, go to Step 15; otherwise, continue.

14 Prompt: NEWNSR2=
Enter: next screening reference

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 402

15 Prompt: NEWREM=
Enter: new remark

16 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Delete GWSCR DPC

Use this procedure to delete DPC gateway screening entities.

Constraints

No constraints apply to deleting GWSCR DPC.

Data tables

The following data tables are affected when DPC gateway screening parameters are deleted:

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)

• Allowed/blocked destination point code table (ATS62)
• Gateway network table (ATW33)
• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DELETE GWSCR DPC

2 Prompt: SF=
Enter: [A or B]
A (allowed)
B (blocked)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 403

3 Prompt: SR=
Enter: screening reference
If you enter A in Step 2, go to Step 6; otherwise, continue.

4 Prompt: NOMATCH=
Enter: [Y or N]
Y (no match record)
N (blocked record)

5 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number

6 Prompt: PCSR=
Enter: point code start range or ALL
If you enter ALL, go to Step 8; otherwise, continue.
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

7 Prompt: PCER=
Enter: point code end range or ALL
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

8 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display GWSCR DPC

Use this procedure to display DPC gateway screening parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying GWSCR DPC.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 404

Data tables

The system retrieves the DPC gateway screening parameters from the following data tables:

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)

• Allowed/blocked destination point code table (ATS62)
• Gateway network table (ATW33)
• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLAY GWSCR DPC

2 Prompt: DSF=
Enter: [A or B]
A (allowed)
B (blocked)
ALL; go to Step 8.

3 Prompt: DSR=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
Screening reference
ALL; go to Step 8.
If you enter A in Step 2 and ALL in Step 3, go to Step 6; otherwise, continue.

4 Prompt: DNOMATCH=
Enter: [Y or N]
Y (no match record); go to Step 8.
N (blocked record); go to Step 6.
ALL; go to Step 8.

5 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number

6 Prompt: PCSR=
Enter: point code start range or ALL
If you enter ALL, go to Step 8; otherwise, continue.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 405

The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

7 Prompt: PCER=
Enter: point code end range or ALL
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

8 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

9 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Allowed affected destination

You can perform the following allowed affected destination procedures:

• Assign GWSCR AFTDES

• Change GWSCR AFTDES
• Delete GWSCR AFTDES
• Display GWSCR AFTDES

Assign GWSCR AFTDES

Use this procedure to assign the AFTDEST gateway screening parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to assigning GWSCR AFTDES.

Data tables

The following data tables are affected when AFTDES gateway screening parameters are
assigned:

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)

• Allowed affected destination table (ATS67)
• Gateway network table (ATW33)
• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 406

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: ASSIGN GWSCR AFTDES

2 Prompt: SR=
Enter: screening reference

3 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number
Enter the logical network name of 1-16 characters or a number between the range of
0-31.
The default value is none.

4 Prompt: PCSR=
Enter: point code start range or ALL
If you enter ALL, go to Step 6; otherwise, continue.
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

5 Prompt: PCER=
Enter: point code end range or ALL
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

6 Prompt: REM*ARK=
Enter: remark

7 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 407

Change GWSCR AFTDES

Use this procedure to modify the AFTDEST gateway screening parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to changing GWSCR AFTDES.

Data tables

The following data tables are affected or referenced when AFTDES gateway screening
parameters are changed:

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)

• Allowed affected destination table (ATS67)
• Gateway network table (ATW33)
• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE GWSCR AFTDES

2 Prompt: SR=
Enter: screening reference

3 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number

4 Prompt: PCSR=
Enter: point code start range or ALL
If you enter ALL, go to Step 6; otherwise, continue.

5 Prompt: PCER=
Enter: point code end range or ALL
The system shows the existing parameters.

6 Prompt: NEWPCSR=
Enter: new point code start range or ALL
If you enter ALL, go to Step 8; otherwise, continue.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 408

7 Prompt: NEWPCER=
Enter: new point code end range

8 Prompt: NEWREM*ARK=
Enter: new remark

9 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Delete GWSCR AFTDES

Use this procedure to delete AFTDEST gateway screening entities.

Constraints

No constraints apply to deleting GWSCR AFTDES.

Data tables

The following data tables are affected when AFTDES gateway screening parameters are
deleted:

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)

• Allowed affected destination table (ATS67)
• Gateway network table (ATW33)
• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DELETE GWSCR AFTDES

2 Prompt: SR=
Enter: screening reference

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 409

3 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number

4 Prompt: PCSR=
Enter: point code start range or ALL
If you enter ALL, go to Step 6; otherwise, continue.
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

5 Prompt: PCER=
Enter: point code end range or ALL
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

6 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display GWSCR AFTDES

Use this procedure to display AFTDEST gateway screening parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying GWSCR AFTDES.

Data tables

The system retrieves the AFTDES gateway screening parameters from the following data
tables:

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)

• Allowed affected destination table (ATS67)
• Gateway network table (ATW33)
• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 410

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLAY GWSCR AFTDES

2 Prompt: DSR=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
Screening reference
ALL; go to Step 6.

3 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number

4 Prompt: PCSR=
Enter: point code start range or ALL
If you enter ALL, go to Step 6; otherwise, continue.
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

5 Prompt: PCER=
Enter: point code end range
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

6 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

7 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Allowed CGPA global title address

You can perform the following allowed CGPA global title address procedures:

• Assign GWSCR CGGTA

• Change GWSCR CGGTA
• Delete GWSCR CGGTA
• Display GWSCR CGGTA

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 411

Assign GWSCR CGGTA

Use this procedure to assign the CGGTA gateway screening parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to assigning GWSCR CGGTA.

Data tables

The following data tables are affected when CGGTA gateway screening parameters are
assigned:

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)

• Allowed global title translation table (ATS66)
• Gateway network table (ATW33)
• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: ASSIGN GWSCR CGGTA

2 Prompt: SR=
Enter: screening reference

3 Prompt: SUBSYS*NUM=
Enter: subsystem number or ALL

4 Prompt: GTF=
Enter: [1-4]
1 (NADDR); go to Step 8.
2 (TRANSTYPE); go to Step 5.
3 (TRANSTYPE, NUMPLAN, DIGTYPE); go to Step 5.
4 (TRANSTYPE, NUMPLAN, DIGTYPE, NADDR); go to Step 5.

5 Prompt: TRANS*TYPE=
Enter: [0-255 or ALL]
If you entered 2 in Step 4, go to Step 9; otherwise, continue.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 412

6 Prompt: NUM*PLAN=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1 (ISDN/telephony)
3 (data)
4 (telex)
5 (maritime mobile)
6 (land mobile)
7 (ISDN/mobile)
ALL

7 Prompt: DIGIT*TYPE=
Enter: digit type or ALL
If you entered 3 in Step 4, go to Step 9; otherwise, continue.

8 Prompt: NAD*DR=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1 (subscriber number)
3 (national significant number)
4 (international significant number)
ALL

9 Prompt: HEXGTA=
Enter: hexadecimal global title address

10 Prompt: NSFI1=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
CDGTA
CDPA
STOP
If you enter STOP, go to Step 14; otherwise, continue.

11 Prompt: NSR1=
Enter: next screening reference
If you enter CDPA or CDGTA in Step 10, go to Step 12; otherwise, go to Step 14.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 413

12 Prompt: NSFI2=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
CDPA
CDGTA
STOP
FAIL
If you enter STOP or FAIL, go to Step 14; otherwise, continue.
If you enter CDPA in Step 10, then the choices are: CDGTA, STOP, FAIL.
If you enter CDGTA in Step 10, then the choices are: CDPA, STOP, FAIL.

13 Prompt: NSR2=
Enter: next screening reference

14 Prompt: REM*ARK=
Enter: remark

15 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Change GWSCR CGGTA

Use this procedure to modify the CGGTA gateway screening parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to changing GWSCR CGGTA.

Data tables

The following data tables are affected or referenced when CGGTA gateway screening
parameters are changed:

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)

• Allowed global title translation table (ATS66)
• Gateway network table (ATW33)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 414

• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE GWSCR CGGTA

2 Prompt: SR=
Enter: screening reference

3 Prompt: SSN=
Enter: subsystem number or ALL

4 Prompt: GTF=
Enter: [1-4]
1 (NADDR); go to Step 8.
2 (TRANSTYPE); go to Step 5.
3 (TRANSTYPE, NUMPLAN, DIGTYPE); go to Step 5.
4 (TRANSTYPE, NUMPLAN, DIGTYPE, NADDR); go to Step 5.

5 Prompt: TRANS*TYPE=
Enter: [0-255 or ALL]
If you enter 2 in Step 4, go to Step 9; otherwise, continue.

6 Prompt: NUM*PLAN=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1 (ISDN/telephony)
3 (data)
4 (telex)
5 (maritime mobile)
6 (land mobile)
7 (ISDN/mobile)
ALL

7 Prompt: DIGIT*TYPE=
Enter: digit type or ALL
If you enter 3 in Step 4, go to Step 9; otherwise, continue.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 415

8 Prompt: NAD*DR=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1 (subscriber number)
3 (national significant number)
4 (international significant number)
ALL

9 Prompt: HEXGTA=
Enter: hexadecimal global title address

10 Prompt: NEWSSN=
Enter: subsystem number
The default is the current value.

11 Prompt: NEWGTF=
Enter: [1-4]
1 (NADDR); go to Step 15.
2 (TRANSTYPE); go to Step 12.
3 (TRANSTYPE, NUMPLAN, DIGTYPE); go to Step 12.
4 (TRANSTYPE, NUMPLAN, DIGTYPE, NADDR); go to Step 12.

12 Prompt: NEWTRA*NSTYPE=
Enter: [0-255 or ALL]
If you enter 2 in Step 11, go to Step 16; otherwise, continue.

13 Prompt: NEWNUM*PLAN=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1 (ISDN/telephony)
3 (data)
4 (telex)
5 (maritime mobile)
6 (land mobile)
7 (ISDN/mobile)
ALL

14 Prompt: NDIGIT*TYPE=
Enter: new digit type or ALL
If you enter 3 in Step 11, go to Step 16; otherwise, continue.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 416

15 Prompt: NEWNAD*DR=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1 (subscriber number)
2 (national significant number)
3 (international significant number)
ALL

16 Prompt: NEWHEX*GTA=
Enter: hexadecimal global title address

17 Prompt: NEWNSFI1=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
CDGTA
CDPA
STOP
If you enter STOP, go to Step 21; otherwise, continue.

18 Prompt: NEWNSR1=
Enter: new next screening reference
If you enter CDPA or CDGTA in Step 17, go to Step 19; otherwise, go to Step 22.

19 Prompt: NEWSNSF2=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
CDPA
CDGTA
STOP
FAIL
If you enter CDPA in Step 17, then the choices are: CDGTA, STOP, FAIL.
If you enter CDGTA in Step 17, then the choices are: CDPA, STOP, FAIL.

20 Prompt: NEWNSR2=
Enter: next screening reference

21 Prompt: NEWREM*ARK=
Enter: new remark

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 417

22 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Delete GWSCR CGGTA

Use this procedure to delete CGGTA gateway screening entities.

Constraints

No constraints apply to deleting GWSCR CGGTA.

Data tables

The following data tables are affected when CGGTA gateway screening parameters are
deleted:

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)

• Allowed global title translation table (ATS66)
• Gateway network table (ATW33)
• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DELETE GWSCR CGGTA

2 Prompt: SR=
Enter: screening reference

3 Prompt: SUBSYS*NUM=
Enter: subsystem number or ALL

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 418

4 Prompt: GTF=
Enter: [1-4]
1 (NADDR); go to Step 8.
2 (TRANSTYPE)
3 (TRANSTYPE, NUMPLAN, DIGTYPE)
4 (TRANSTYPE, NUMPLAN, DIGTYPE, NADDR)

5 Prompt: TRANS*TYPE=
Enter: [0-255 or ALL]
If you enter 2 in Step 4, go to Step 9; otherwise, continue.

6 Prompt: NUM*PLAN=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1 (ISDN/telephony)
3 (data)
4 (telex)
5 (maritime mobile)
6 (land mobile)
7 (ISDN/mobile)
ALL

7 Prompt: DT=
Enter: digit type or ALL
If you enter 3 in Step 4, go to Step 9; otherwise, continue.

8 Prompt: NAD*DR=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1 (subscriber number)
3 (national significant number)
4 (international significant number)
ALL

9 Prompt: HEXGTA=
Enter: hexadecimal global title address or ALL
The system shows the parameters.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 419

10 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display GWSCR CGGTA

Use this procedure to display CGGTA gateway screening parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying GWSCR CGGTA.

Data tables

The system retrieves the CGGTA gateway screening parameters from the following data tables:

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)

• Allowed global title translation table (ATS66)
• Gateway network table (ATW33)
• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLAY GWSCR CGGTA

2 Prompt: DSR=
Enter: screening reference or ALL
If you enter ALL, go to Step 10; otherwise, continue.

3 Prompt: DSSN=
Enter: subsystem number or ALL
If you enter ALL, go to Step 10; otherwise, continue.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 420

4 Prompt: GTF=
Enter: [1-4]
1 (NADDR); go to Step 8.
2 (TRANSTYPE)
3 (TRANSTYPE, NUMPLAN, DIGTYPE)
4 (TRANSTYPE, NUMPLAN, DIGTYPE, NADDR)

5 Prompt: TRANS*TYPE=
Enter: [0-255 or ALL]
If you enter 2 in Step 4, go to Step 9; otherwise, continue.
If you enter ALL, go to Step 10.
Otherwise, go to Step 6.

6 Prompt: DNUM*PLAN=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1 (ISDN/telephony)
3 (data)
4 (telex)
5 (maritime mobile)
6 (land mobile)
7 (ISDN/mobile)
ALL

7 Prompt: DDT=
Enter: digit type or ALL
If you enter 3 in Step 4, go to Step 9; otherwise, continue.

8 Prompt: DNAD*DR=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1 (subscriber number)
2 (national significant number)
3 (international significant number)
ALL

9 Prompt: DHEXGTA=
Enter: hexadecimal global title address or ALL
The system shows the parameters.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 421

10 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

11 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Allowed calling party address

You can perform the following allowed calling party address procedures:

• Assign GWSCR CGPA

• Change GWSCR CGPA
• Delete GWSCR CGPA
• Display GWSCR CGPA

Assign GWSCR CGPA

Use this procedure to assign the CGPA gateway screening parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to assigning GWSCR CGPA.

Data tables

The following data tables are affected when CGPA gateway screening parameters are assigned:

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)

• Allowed global title translation table (ATS66)
• Gateway network table (ATW33)
• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: ASSIGN GWSCR CGPA

2 Prompt: SR=
Enter: screening reference

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 422

3 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number
Enter the logical network name of 1-16 characters or a number between the range of
0-31.
The default value is none.

4 Prompt: PCSR=
Enter: point code start range or ALL
If you enter ALL, go to Step 6; otherwise, continue.
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

5 Prompt: PCER=
Enter: point code end range or ALL
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

6 Prompt: SSN=
Enter: subsystem number or ALL

7 Prompt: LNKGID=
Enter: link set group identifier or ALL

8 Prompt: RI=
Enter: [0 or 1]
0 (route on global title address)
1 (route on PC in the routing label and SSN in CDPA)

9 Prompt: NSFIACG=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
CDPA
CDGTA
STOP
If you enter STOP, go to Step 11; otherwise, continue.

Note: If you enter 1 in Step 8, then the choices are CDPA and STOP; otherwise, CDGTA
and STOP.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 423

10 Prompt: NSR=
Enter: next screening reference

11 Prompt: REM*ARK=
Enter: remark

12 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Change GWSCR CGPA

Use this procedure to modify the CGPA gateway screening parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to changing GWSCR CGPA.

Data tables

The following data tables are affected or referenced when CGPA gateway screening
parameters are changed:

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)

• Allowed global title translation table (ATS66)
• Gateway network table (ATW33)
• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE GWSCR CGPA

2 Prompt: SR=
Enter: screening reference

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 424

3 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number

4 Prompt: PCSR=
Enter: point code start range or ALL
If you enter ALL, go to Step 6; otherwise, continue.
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

5 Prompt: PCER=
Enter: point code end range or ALL
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

6 Prompt: SSN=
Enter: subsystem number or ALL

7 Prompt: LNKGID=
Enter: link set group identifier or ALL

8 Prompt: RI=
Enter: [0 or 1]
0 (route on global title address)
1 (route on PC in the routing label and SSN in CDPA)
ALL

9 Prompt: NEWPCSR=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
New point code start range
ALL; go to Step 11.
<RETURN> (current value)

10 Prompt: NEWPCER=
Enter: new point code end range or ALL
<RETURN> (current value)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 425

11 Prompt: NEWSSN=
Enter: new subsystem number or ALL
<RETURN> (current value)

12 Prompt: NEWRI=
Enter: [0 or 1]
0 (route on global title address)
1 (route on PC in the routing label and SSN in CGPA)

13 Prompt: NEWNSFIACG=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
CDPA
CDGTA
STOP
If you enter STOP, go to Step 15; otherwise, continue.

Note: If you enter 1 in Step 12, then the choices are CDPA and STOP; otherwise, CDGTA
and STOP.

14 Prompt: NEWNSR=
Enter: next screening reference

15 Prompt: NEWREM=
Enter: new remark

16 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Delete GWSCR CGPA

Use this procedure to delete CGPA gateway screening entities.

Constraints

No constraints apply to deleting GWSCR CGPA.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 426

Data tables

The following data tables are affected when CGPA gateway screening parameters are deleted:

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)

• Allowed global title translation table (ATS66)
• Gateway network table (ATW33)
• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DELETE GWSCR CGPA

2 Prompt: SR=
Enter: screening reference

3 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number

4 Prompt: PCSR=
Enter: point code start range or ALL
If you enter ALL, go to Step 6; otherwise, continue.
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

5 Prompt: PCER=
Enter: point code end range or ALL
If you enter ALL, go to Step 9; otherwise, continue.
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

6 Prompt: SSN=
Enter: subsystem number or ALL

7 Prompt: LNKGID=
Enter: link set group identifier or ALL

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 427

8 Prompt: RI=
Enter: [0 or 1]
0 (route on global title address)
1 (route on PC in the routing label and SSN in CDPA)
The system shows the parameters.

9 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display GWSCR CGPA

Use this procedure to display CGPA gateway screening parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying GWSCR CGPA.

Data tables

The system retrieves the CGPA gateway screening parameters from the following data tables:

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)

• Allowed global title translation table (ATS66)
• Gateway network table (ATW33)
• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLAY GWSCR CGPA

2 Prompt: DSR=
Enter: screening reference or ALL
If you enter ALL, go to Step 9; otherwise, continue.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 428

3 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number

4 Prompt: PCSR=
Enter: point code start range or ALL
If you enter ALL, go to Step 9; otherwise, continue.
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

5 Prompt: PCER=
Enter: point code end range or ALL
If you enter ALL, go to Step 9; otherwise, continue.
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

6 Prompt: DSSN=
Enter: subsystem number or ALL
If you enter ALL, go to Step 9; otherwise, continue.

7 Prompt: DLNKGID=
Enter: link set group identifier or ALL

8 Prompt: DRI=
Enter: [0 or 1]
0 (route on global title address)
1 (route on PC in the routing label and SSN in CDPA)
ALL
The system shows the parameters.

9 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

10 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Allowed CDPA global title address

You can perform the following allowed CDPA global title address procedures:

• Assign GWSCR CDGTA

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 429

• Change GWSCR CDGTA

• Delete GWSCR CDGTA
• Display GWSCR CDGTA

Assign GWSCR CDGTA

Use this procedure to assign the CDGTA gateway screening parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to assigning GWSCR CDGTA.

Data tables

The following data tables are affected when CDGTA gateway screening parameters are
assigned:

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)

• Allowed global title translation table (ATS66)
• Gateway network table (ATW33)
• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: ASSIGN GWSCR CDGTA

2 Prompt: SR=
Enter: screening reference

3 Prompt: SUBSYS*NUM=
Enter: subsystem number or ALL

4 Prompt: GTF=
Enter: [1-4]
1 (NADDR); go to Step 8.
2 (TRANSTYPE); go to Step 5.
3 (TRANSTYPE, NUMPLAN, DIGTYPE); go to Step 5.
4 (TRANSTYPE, NUMPLAN, DIGTYPE, NADDR); go to Step 5.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 430

5 Prompt: TRANS*TYPE=
Enter: [0-255 or ALL]
If you enter 2 in Step 4, go to Step 9; otherwise, continue.

6 Prompt: NUM*PLAN=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1 (ISDN/telephony)
3 (data)
4 (telex)
5 (maritime mobile)
6 (land mobile)
7 (ISDN/mobile)
ALL

7 Prompt: DIGIT*TYPE=
Enter: digit type or ALL
If you enter 3 in Step 4, go to Step 9; otherwise, continue.

8 Prompt: NAD*DR=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1 (subscriber number)
2 (national significant number)
3 (international significant number)
ALL

9 Prompt: HEXGTA=
Enter: hexadecimal global title address

10 Prompt: NSFI1=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
CDPA
STOP
If you enter STOP, go to Step 12; otherwise, continue.

11 Prompt: NSR1=
Enter: next screening reference

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 431

12 Prompt: REM*ARK=
Enter: remark

13 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Change GWSCR CDGTA

Use this procedure to modify the CDGTA gateway screening parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to changing GWSCR CDGTA.

Data tables

The following data tables are affected or referenced when CDGTA gateway screening
parameters are changed:

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)

• Allowed global title translation table (ATS66)
• Gateway network table (ATW33)
• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE GWSCR CDGTA

2 Prompt: SR=
Enter: screening reference

3 Prompt: SUBSYS*NUM=
Enter: subsystem number or ALL

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 432

4 Prompt: GTF=
Enter: [1-4]
1 (NADDR); go to Step 8.
2 (TRANSTYPE); go to Step 5.
3 (TRANSTYPE, NUMPLAN, DIGTYPE); go to Step 5.
4 (TRANSTYPE, NUMPLAN, DIGTYPE, NADDR); go to Step 5.

5 Prompt: TRANS*TYPE=
Enter: [0-255 or ALL]
If you enter 2 in Step 4, go to Step 9; otherwise, continue.

6 Prompt: NUM*PLAN=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1 (ISDN/telephony)
3 (data)
4 (telex)
5 (maritime mobile)
6 (land mobile)
7 (ISDN/mobile)
ALL

7 Prompt: DIGIT*TYPE=
Enter: digit type or ALL
If you enter 3 in Step 4, go to Step 9; otherwise, continue.

8 Prompt: NAD*DR=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1 (subscriber number)
2 (national significant number)
3 (international significant number)
ALL

9 Prompt: HEXGTA=
Enter: hexadecimal global title address

10 Prompt: NSUBSYS*NUM=
Enter: subsystem number or ALL
The default is the current value.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 433

11 Prompt: NEWGTF=
Enter: [1-4]
1 (NADDR); go to Step 15.
2 (TRANSTYPE); go to Step 12.
3 (TRANSTYPE, NUMPLAN, DIGTYPE); go to Step 12.
4 (TRANSTYPE, NUMPLAN, DIGTYPE, NADDR); go to Step 12.

12 Prompt: NEWTRA*NSTYPE=
Enter: [0-255 or ALL]
If you enter 2 in Step 11, go to Step 16; otherwise, continue.

13 Prompt: NEWNUM*PLAN=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1 (ISDN/telephony)
3 (data)
4 (telex)
5 (maritime mobile)
6 (land mobile)
7 (ISDN/mobile)
ALL

14 Prompt: NDIGIT*TYPE=
Enter: new digit type or ALL
If you entered 3 in Step 11, go to Step 16; otherwise, continue.

15 Prompt: NEWNAD*DR=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1 (subscriber number)
2 (national significant number)
3 (international significant number)
ALL

16 Prompt: NEWHEX*GTA=
Enter: hexadecimal global title address

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 434

17 Prompt: NEWNSFI1=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
CDPA
STOP
If you enter STOP or <RETURN>, go to Step 19; otherwise, continue.

18 Prompt: NEWNSR=
Enter: new next screening reference

19 Prompt: NEWREM*ARK=
Enter: new remark

20 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Delete GWSCR CDGTA

Use this procedure to delete CDGTA gateway screening entities.

Constraints

No constraints apply to deleting GWSCR CDGTA.

Data tables

The following data tables are affected when CDGTA gateway screening parameters are
deleted:

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)

• Allowed global title translation table (ATS66)
• Gateway network table (ATW33)
• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 435

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DELETE GWSCR CDGTA

2 Prompt: SR=
Enter: screening reference

3 Prompt: SUBSYS*NUM=
Enter: subsystem number or ALL

4 Prompt: GTF=
Enter: [1-4]
1 (NADDR); go to Step 8.
2 (TRANSTYPE)
3 (TRANSTYPE, NUMPLAN, DIGTYPE)
4 (TRANSTYPE, NUMPLAN, DIGTYPE, NADDR)

5 Prompt: TRANS*TYPE=
Enter: [0-255 or ALL]
If you enter 2 in Step 4, go to Step 9; otherwise, continue.

6 Prompt: NUM*PLAN=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1 (ISDN/telephony)
3 (data)
4 (telex)
5 (maritime mobile)
6 (land mobile)
7 (ISDN/mobile)
ALL

7 Prompt: DIGIT*TYPE=
Enter: digit type or ALL
If you enter 3 in Step 4, go to Step 9; otherwise, continue.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 436

8 Prompt: NAD*DR=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1 (subscriber number)
2 (national significant number)
3 (international significant number)
ALL

9 Prompt: HEXGTA=
Enter: hexadecimal global title address or ALL
The system shows the parameters.

10 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display GWSCR CDGTA

Use this procedure to display CDGTA gateway screening parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying GWSCR CDGTA.

Data tables

The system retrieves the CDGTA gateway screening parameters from the following data tables:

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)

• Allowed global title translation table (ATS66)
• Gateway network table (ATW33)
• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 437

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLAY GWSCR CDGTA

2 Prompt: DSR=
Enter: screening reference or ALL
If you enter ALL, go to Step 10; otherwise, continue.

3 Prompt: DSSN=
Enter: subsystem number or ALL
If you enter ALL, go to Step 10; otherwise, continue.

4 Prompt: GTF=
Enter: [1-4]
1 (NADDR); go to Step 8.
2 (TRANSTYPE)
3 (TRANSTYPE, NUMPLAN, DIGTYPE)
4 (TRANSTYPE, NUMPLAN, DIGTYPE, NADDR)
ALL

5 Prompt: DTRANS*TYPE=
Enter: [0-255 or ALL]
If you enter 2 in Step 4, go to Step 9; otherwise, continue.

6 Prompt: DNUM*PLAN=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1 (ISDN/telephony)
3 (data)
4 (telex)
5 (maritime mobile)
6 (land mobile)
7 (ISDN/mobile)
ALL

7 Prompt: DDT=
Enter: digit type or ALL

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 438

If you enter 3 in Step 4, go to Step 9; otherwise, continue.

8 Prompt: DNAD*DR=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
1 (subscriber number)
2 (national significant number)
3 (international significant number)
ALL

9 Prompt: DHEXGTA=
Enter: hexadecimal global title address or ALL
The system shows the parameters.

10 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

11 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Allowed called party address

You can perform the following allowed called party address procedures:

• Assign GWSCR CDPA

• Change GWSCR CDPA
• Delete GWSCR CDPA
• Display GWSCR CDPA

Assign GWSCR CDPA

Use this procedure to assign the CDPA gateway screening parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to assigning GWSCR CDPA.

Data tables

The following data tables are affected when CDPA gateway screening parameters are assigned:

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 439

• Allowed called party address table (ATS65)

• Gateway network table (ATW33)
• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: ASSIGN GWSCR CDPA

2 Prompt: SR=
Enter: screening reference

3 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number
Enter the logical network name of 1-16 characters or a number between the range of
0-31.
The default value is none.

4 Prompt: PCSR=
Enter: point code start range or ALL
If you enter ALL, go to Step 6; otherwise, continue.
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

5 Prompt: PCER=
Enter: point code end range or ALL
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

6 Prompt: SSN=
Enter: subsystem number or ALL
If you enter 1 or ALL or a range that includes 1, go to Step 7; otherwise, go to Step 8.

7 Prompt: SCMG=
Enter: SCMG format identifier or ALL

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 440

8 Prompt: NSFIA=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
APCSSN
STOP
If you enter STOP, go to Step 10; otherwise, continue.

9 Prompt: NSR=
Enter: next screening reference

10 Prompt: REM*ARK=
Enter: remark

11 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Change GWSCR CDPA

Use this procedure to modify the CDPA gateway screening parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to changing GWSCR CDPA.

Data tables

The following data tables are affected or referenced when CDPA gateway screening
parameters are changed:

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)

• Allowed called party address table (ATS65)
• Gateway network table (ATW33)
• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 441

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE GWSCR CDPA

2 Prompt: SR=
Enter: screening reference

3 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number

4 Prompt: PCSR=
Enter: point code start range or ALL
If you enter ALL, go to Step 6; otherwise, continue.
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

5 Prompt: PCER=
Enter: point code end range or ALL
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

6 Prompt: SSN=
Enter: subsystem number or ALL
If you enter 1 or ALL or a range that includes 1, go to Step 7; otherwise, go to Step 8.

7 Prompt: SCMG=
Enter: SCMG format identifier or ALL

8 Prompt: NEWPCSR=
Enter: new point code start range or ALL
<RETURN> (current value)
If you enter ALL, go to Step 10.

9 Prompt: NEWPCER=
Enter: new point code end range or ALL
<RETURN> (current value)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 442

10 Prompt: NEWSSN=
Enter: new subsystem number or ALL
<RETURN> (current value)
If you enter 1 or ALL or a range that includes 1, go to Step 11; otherwise, go to Step 12.

11 Prompt: NEWSCMG=
Enter: SCMG format identifier or ALL
<RETURN> (current value)

12 Prompt: NEWREM=
Enter: new remark
<RETURN> (current value)

13 Prompt: NEWNSFIA=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
APCSSN
STOP
<RETURN> (current value)
If you enter STOP, go to Step 15; otherwise, continue.

14 Prompt: NEWNSR=
Enter: next screening reference
The default is the current value.

15 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Delete GWSCR CDPA

Use this procedure to delete CDPA gateway screening entities.

Constraints

No constraints apply to deleting GWSCR CDPA.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 443

Data tables

The following data tables are affected when CDPA gateway screening parameters are deleted:

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)

• Allowed called party address table (ATS65)
• Gateway network table (ATW33)
• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DELETE GWSCR CDPA

2 Prompt: SR=
Enter: screening reference

3 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number

4 Prompt: PCSR=
Enter: point code start range or ALL
If you enter ALL, go to Step 8; otherwise, continue.
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

5 Prompt: PCER=
Enter: point code end range or ALL
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

6 Prompt: SSN=
Enter: subsystem number or ALL
If you enter 1 or ALL or a range that includes 1, go to Step 7; otherwise, go to Step 8.

7 Prompt: SCMG=
Enter: SCMG format identifier or ALL

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 444

8 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display GWSCR CDPA

Use this procedure to display CDPA gateway screening parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying GWSCR CDPA.

Data tables

The system retrieves the CDPA gateway screening parameters from the following data tables:

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)

• Allowed called party address table (ATS65)
• Gateway network table (ATW33)
• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLAY GWSCR CDPA

2 Prompt: DSR=
Enter: screening reference or ALL
If you enter ALL, go to Step 8.

3 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number

4 Prompt: PCSR=
Enter: point code start range or ALL

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 445

If you enter ALL, go to Step 8.

The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

5 Prompt: PCER=
Enter: point code end range or ALL
If you enter ALL, go to Step 8; otherwise, continue.
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

6 Prompt: DSSN=
Enter: subsystem number or ALL
If you enter 1 or ALL or a range that includes 1, go to Step 7; otherwise, go to Step 8.

7 Prompt: DSCMG=
Enter: SCMG format identifier or ALL
The system shows the parameters.

8 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

9 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Allowed affected point code

You can perform the following allowed affected point code procedures:

• Assign GWSCR APCSSN

• Change GWSCR APCSSN
• Delete GWSCR APCSSN
• Display GWSCR APCSSN

Assign GWSCR APCSSN

Use this procedure to assign the APCSSN gateway screening parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to assigning GWSCR APCSSN.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 446

Data tables

The following data tables are affected when APCSSN gateway screening parameters are
assigned:

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)

• Allowed affected point code/subsystem table (ATS68)
• Gateway network table (ATW33)
• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: ASSIGN GWSCR APCSSN

2 Prompt: SR=
Enter: screening reference

3 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number
Enter the logical network name of 1-16 characters or a number between the range of
0-31.
The default value is none.

4 Prompt: PCSR=
Enter: point code start range or ALL
If you enter ALL, go to Step 6; otherwise, continue.
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

5 Prompt: PCER=
Enter: point code end range or ALL
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

6 Prompt: SSN=
Enter: subsystem number or ALL

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 447

7 Prompt: REM*ARK=
Enter: remark

8 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Change GWSCR APCSSN

Use this procedure to modify the APCSSN gateway screening parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to changing GWSCR APCSSN.

Data tables

The following data tables are affected or referenced when APCSSN gateway screening
parameters are changed:

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)

• Allowed affected point code/subsystem table (ATS68)
• Gateway network table (ATW33)
• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE GWSCR APCSSN

2 Prompt: SR=
Enter: screening reference

3 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 448

4 Prompt: PCSR=
Enter: point code start range or ALL
If you enter ALL, go to Step 6; otherwise, continue.
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

5 Prompt: PCER=
Enter: point code end range or ALL
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

6 Prompt: SSN=
Enter: subsystem number or ALL

7 Prompt: NEWPCSR=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
New point code start range
ALL; go to Step 9.
<RETURN> (current value)

8 Prompt: NEWPCER=
Enter: new point code end range or ALL
<RETURN> (current value)

9 Prompt: NEWSSN=
Enter: new subsystem number or ALL

10 Prompt: NEWREM=
Enter: new remark

11 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute changes and exit to the command prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 449

Delete GWSCR APCSSN

Use this procedure to delete APCSSN gateway screening entities.

Constraints

No constraints apply to deleting GWSCR APCSSN.

Data tables

The following data tables are affected when APCSSN gateway screening parameters are
deleted:

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)

• Allowed affected point code/subsystem table (ATS68)
• Gateway network table (ATW33)
• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DELETE GWSCR APCSSN

2 Prompt: SR=
Enter: screening reference

3 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number

4 Prompt: PCSR=
Enter: point code start range or ALL
If you enter ALL, go to Step 6; otherwise, continue.
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

5 Prompt: PCER=
Enter: point code end range or ALL
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 450

6 Prompt: SSN=
Enter: subsystem number or ALL
The system shows the parameters.

7 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display GWSCR APCSSN

Use this procedure to display APCSSN gateway screening parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying GWSCR APCSSN.

Data tables

The system retrieves the APCSSN gateway screening parameters from the following data
tables:

• Gateway screening reference table (ATS60)

• Allowed affected point code/subsystem table (ATS68)
• Gateway network table (ATW33)
• Gateway network ID table (ATW32)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLAY GWSCR APCSSN

2 Prompt: DSR=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
Screening reference
ALL; go to Step 6.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 451

3 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number

4 Prompt: PCSR=
Enter: point code start range or ALL
If you enter ALL, go to Step 6; otherwise, continue.
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

5 Prompt: PCER=
Enter: point code end range or ALL
The point code valid range depends on the point code format that is configured for the
lognet.

6 Prompt: SSN=
Enter: subsystem number or ALL
The system shows the parameters.

7 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

8 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Gateway screening threshold

You can perform the following gateway screening threshold procedures:

• Assign gateway screening threshold

• Display gateway screening threshold

Assign gateway screening threshold

Use this procedure to set the thresholds to be used by the gateway STP to determine when to
generate reports of excessive activity or message rejection.

Constraints

No constraints apply to assigning GWSCR threshold.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 452

Data tables

The following data tables are affected when gateway screening threshold parameters are
assigned:

• Gateway throttling parameters table (ATS69)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: ASSIGN GWSCR THRESH

2 Prompt: LSNAME=
Enter: link set name

3 Prompt: ACTREJ*ECTIONS=
Enter: [0-999999]
Enter the maximum number of activity rejections per unit time. This is optional.

4 Prompt: MIN*UTES=
Enter: [05, 10, 15, 20, or 30]
Enter the interval over which message and rejection thresholds apply. This is optional.

5 Prompt: MES*SAGES=
Enter: [0-999999]
Enter the maximum number of messages per unit time. This is optional.

6 Prompt: MIN*UTES=
Enter: [05, 10, 15, 20, or 30]
Enter the interval over which message thresholds apply. This is optional.

7 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 453

Display gateway screening threshold

Use this procedure to display gateway screening threshold parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying GWSCR threshold.

Data tables

The system retrieves the gateway screening threshold parameters from the following data
tables:

• Gateway throttling parameters table (ATS69)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLAY GWSCR THRESH

2 Prompt: LSNAME=
Enter: link set name
The system displays the gateway screening threshold parameter values.

3 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

4 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Gateway screening throttle

You can perform the following gateway screening throttle procedures:

• Assign gateway screening throttle

• Display gateway screening throttle

Assign gateway screening throttle

Use this procedure to set an upper limit on the number of reports of gateway message
rejection and/or reports of gateway screening table error messages per interval of time.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 454

Constraints

No constraints apply to assigning GWSCR throttle.

Data tables

The following data tables are affected when gateway screening threshold parameters are
assigned:

• Gateway throttling parameters table (ATS69)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: ASSIGN GWSCR THROTT

2 Prompt: REJ*ECTIONS=
Enter: [0-9999]
Enter the maximum number of rejections to be reported per unit time. This is optional.

3 Prompt: REJ*MINUTES=
Enter: [05, 10, 15, 20, or 30]
Enter the interval over which rejection limit applies. This is optional.

4 Prompt: ERR*ORS=
Enter: [0-9999]
Enter the maximum number of table errors to be reported. This is optional.

5 Prompt: ERRMIN*UTES=
Enter: [05, 10, 15, 20, or 30]
Enter the interval over which table error limit applies. This is optional.

6 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Gateway screening
Page 455

Display gateway screening throttle

Use this procedure to display gateway screening throttle parameters.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying GWSCR throttle.

Data tables

The system retrieves the gateway screening threshold parameters from the following data
tables:

• Gateway throttling parameters table (ATS69)

Procedure

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLAY GWSCR THROTT

2 Verify that the system displays the gateway screening throttle parameter values.
END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Terms
Page 456

Terms

Note: Move the mouse over a highlighted term in the document to see its definition. If you
clicked the term to get to this page, use the Back button on the browser to return to the page
containing the term.

This section lists the terms used in this document.

Term Meaning
ACK Acknowledgement
ACTM Active, main
ADMIN Administration
AE1LK ATM over E1 (high-speed) link (processor)
AERM Alignment error rate monitor
AFTDEST Affected destination
AIN Advanced intelligent network
AIS Alarm inhibit signal
ALF Administration link frame
ALR Application location register
ANPD Application node PMC daughtercard
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AOS Automatic out of service
APCSSN Affected point code subsystem
AS Application server
ASP Application server process
AT1LK ATM/T1 link processor
ATM Asynchronous transfer mode
b/s Bit per second
BLKDPC Blocked destination point cod
BLKOPC Blocked originating point code
CCM Common channel manager
CCS Common channel signaling
CDGTA Called party global title address

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Terms
Page 457

Term Meaning
CDPA Called party address
CEDLK Channelized E1 duplex link
CELK Channelized E1 link
CGGTA Calling party global title address
CGPA Calling party address
CLASS Custom local area signaling services
COMM Communications
CP Control point
CSP Concerned signaling point
CTDLK Channelized T1 duplex link
CTLK Channelized T1 link
CTRL Control
DCE Date circuit equipment
DEN Distant end node
DPC Destination point code
DRST Destination restricted
DS0A Digital signal level 0A
DS0LK Digital signal level 0 link
DSS Distributed SS7 services
DTE Data terminal equipment
DUNA Destination unavailable
EQD Equipped
FISO Fault isolation
FLXMGR Flexible routing manager
GTA Global title address
GTF Global title format
GTM Global title modification
GTT Global title translation
GTWYLS Gateway link set
GWSCR Gateway screening
HELK High-speed E1 link

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Terms
Page 458

Term Meaning
HSL High-speed link
HSLK High-speed link processor
IP Internet protocol
IPL Initial program load
IPLK Internet protocol link processor
IPR Information and problem report
IPUA Internet protocol user adaptation processor
ISDN Integrated services digital network
ISERM In-service error rate monitor
ISUP ISDN user part
ITU International Telecommunication Union
kb/s Kilobit per second
LAS Logical application server
LED Light-emitting diode
LEF Link expansion frame
LIDB Line identification database
LM Layer management
LNP Local number portability
LSL Low-speed link
LTD Link timing distribution
M2PA MTP2 peer-to-peer adaptation layer
M3UA MTP3 user adaptation layer
MAINT Maintenance
MAP Mated application
MGC Media gateway controller
MMI Man-machine interface
MOPC Multiple originating point code
MOS Manually out of service
MPC Multiple point code
MPCPAR Multiple point code parameters
MRSP Modified restart procedure

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Terms
Page 459

Term Meaning
ms Millisecond
MSP Mobile service provider
MSU Message signal unit
MTNC Message transport network controller
MTP Message transfer part
NAK Negative acknowledgment
NIC Network indication controller
NNI Network node interface
NRP Number of retransmitted SSCOP protocol data units
NTP Network time protocol
OOS Out of service
OOSA Out of service automatically
OOSM Out of service manually
OOSMN Out of service manually, not operational
OPC Originating point code
OS Operating system
PC Point code
PCI Peripheral component interface
PCM Point code mapping
PCMAP Point code mapping
PCR Preventive cyclic retransmission
PDU Power distribution unit
PMC PCI mezzanine card
PXP Packet export processor
RCT Remote control terminal
RTT Round trip time
RX Receive
SAAL Signaling ATM adaptation layer
SACK Selective acknowledgement
SCCP Signaling connection control part
SCMG SCCP management

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Terms
Page 460

Term Meaning
SCP Signal control point
SCTP Stream control transmission protocol
SD Serial device
SEAS Signaling, engineering, and administration system
SG Signaling gateway
SI Service indicator
SIB Status indication busy
SIO Service information octet
SIP Session initiation protocol
SIPM SIP manager
SIPO Status indication processor outage
SLC Signaling link code
SLS Signaling link selection
SM System Manager
SP Signaling point
SPR Signaling point restart
SRTM Signaling route test message
SRTT Smoothed round trip time
SS7 Signaling system 7
SSCF Service-specific coordination function
SSCOP Service-specific, connection-oriented protocol
SSG Signaling server global
SSN Subsystem number
SSP Signaling selection point
STGE System timing generator for E1
SST Subsystem status test
STP Signal transfer point
SU Signal unit
TCA Transfer cluster allowed
TCP Transfer cluster prohibited
TERMLK Terminal link

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Terms
Page 461

Term Meaning
TFA Transfer allowed
TFP Transfer prohibited
TFR Transfer restricted
TLNP Triggerless local number portability
TMM Traffic metering and measurement
TNC Transport node controller
TT Translation type
TTMAP Translation type mapping
TX Transmit
TXL Transmit level
TXP Transmit prohibited
UIP User IP interface
UNEQD Unequipped
VOPC Virtual originating point code
XMIT Transmit

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 462

Appendix. Database engineering forms

Introduction
This appendix contains the database engineering forms required to configure the 5070 SSG
database. The forms are arranged in the correct order for provisioning.

Table O lists the forms (alphabetically) that are located in this appendix and provides the
corresponding section or appendix where the form is discussed in detail.
Table O. Database configuration forms
Form Figure Section or Appendix

Alias for local node Figure 6 Self-identity

Application server Figure 39 SS7-IP interworking

Application server process Figure 40 SS7-IP interworking

AE1LK, CTDLK, CELK, CEDLK, Figure 14 Processors and links

and HELK processor

AE1LK, HELK, and IPLK link Figure 21 Processors and links

ATM over T1 high speed links Figure 27 thru Figure 29X Processors and links

CCS parameters Figure 7 Self-identity

CCS timers Figure 67 Appendix. SCCP and MTP timers

CSP assignment Figure 54 Concerned signaling points

CSP group Figure 53 Concerned signaling points

CEDLK and CTDLK link Figure 22 Processors and links

Default link span Figure 15 thru Figure 16 Processors and links

DPC route set form Figure 46 Routing

Gateway screening Figure 55 thru Figure 66 Gateway screening

GTM definition Table 49 GTT for SCCP

GTT (regular) Figure 51 GTT for SCCP

GTT destination Figure 50 GTT for SCCP

Hosts file parameters Figure 33 SS7-IP interworking

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 463

Table O. Database configuration forms, contd

Form Figure Section or Appendix

HSL parameters Figure 30 thru Figure 31 Processors and links

IP connection parameters Figure 34 SS7-IP interworking

IP system parameters Figure 38 SS7-IP interworking

IPLK and IPUA form Figure 32 SS7-IP interworking

IPLK parameters Figure 35 thru Figure 37 SS7-IP interworking

Link Figure 21 Processors and links

Link set Figure 9 Link sets

Link span Figure 17 thru Figure 18 Processors and links

Link span loopback Figure 20 Processors and links

Local node Figure 5 Self-identity

Logical network Figure 4 Self-identity

LSL parameters Figure 23 thru Figure 26 Processors and links

MOPC Figure 11 Link sets

PCMAP Figure 10 Link sets

Route set master Figure 45 Route set master

SCCP MAP Figure 52 SCCP applications

Signaling point restart Figure 8 Self-identity

Special link set Figure 13 Link sets

Subsystem name Figure 47 SCCP subsystem

Super link set Figure 12 Link sets

TT Figure 48 GTT for SCCP

UIP parameters Figure 41 thru Figure 42 SS7-IP interworking

UIP system parameters Figure 43 SS7-IP interworking

UIP timer parameters Figure 44 SS7-IP interworking

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 464

Logical network form

Use the logical network form to configure the logical network. The 5070 SSG can support up to
32 logical networks.

Figure 4. Logical network form

Logical network form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

Node name:

ASSIGN, CHANGE, DELETE, DISPLA CCS LOGNET

Logical network name (1-16 char) or

logical network number (0-31)

Network indicator

Protocol class [A, ANSI, I, ITU, C, or CHINA]

Point code

Spare bits

Congestion

RCT support

TFR support

TFP for invalid point code

Rotation of SLS for outgoing messages

Destination lognet

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 465

Fields
Use the following list to complete the logical network form.

Field Entry and description

Logical network Enter the logical network name (1-16 char) or logical
number (0-31)
Network indicator Enter 0 or 1 to select international network indicator.
Enter 2 or 3 to select national network indicator.
Protocol class Enter protocol class.
Point code Enter the point code ([0-7-[0-255]-[0-7]).
Spare bits Enter value for spare bits.
Congestion Enter a congestion procedure:
A (congestion with priority)
B (congestion with level)
RCT support Enter Y to send RCT support to the logical network.
Enter N to not send RCT support to the logical network.
TFR support Enter Y to send TFR support to the logical network.
Enter N to not send TFR support to the logical network.
TFP for invalid point code Enter Y to send TFP support to the logical network.
Enter N to not send TFP support to the logical network.
Rotation of SLS for Enter Y to send SLS support to the logical network.
outgoing messages Enter N to not send SLS support to the logical network.
Destination lognet Enter destination lognet number.

Constraints
No constraints apply to completing this form.

Local node form

Use the local node form to configure the local node. Use additional copies of this form to
configure each alias. The 5070 SSG can support as many as 64 network IDs (designated by
network number), and the same network number can be used more than once.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 466

Figure 5. Local node form

Local node form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

Node name:

ASSIGN, CHANGE, DISPLA CCS NODE

Node name (1-11 alphanumeric characters)

Logical network

Point code

Fields
Use the following list to complete the local node form.

Note: In smaller networks (those assigned network numbers 1-5), cluster number 0 is not used.
Telcordia determines the range of cluster numbers allowed in networks 1-5.

Field Entry and description

Node name Enter a node name (1-11 alphanumeric characters)
Logical network Enter the logical network name or number
Point code Enter the point code

Constraints
The following constraints apply to completing the local node form:

• If the node is the primary point code, complete the primary point code information only.
• A local node form is required for the primary and each alias.
• The alias node name must be different from the name assigned to the 5070 SSG when the
network configuration is defined.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 467

• The mate 5070 SSG must be assigned the same alias in its database as the local 5070 SSG.
• The mate 5070 SSG alias cannot be changed with this MMI.

Alias for local node form

The alias for local node form creates an alias identity for a local node. Use the following form
to configure each alias.

Figure 6. Alias for local node form

Alias for local node form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

ASSIGN, CHANGE, DELETE, DISPLA CCS ALIAS

Alias node name (1-11 alphanumeric

characters)

Logical network

Point code

DSS alias (Y or N)

Fields
Use the following list to complete the alias for local node form.

Field Entry and description

Alias node name Enter a name to identify the 5070 SSG or alias in the database and
displays (1-11 alphanumeric characters).
Logical network Enter the logical network name or number
Point code Enter the point code
DSS alias Enter Y to identify the node as a DSS alias.
Enter N to identify the node as a non-DSS alias.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 468

Constraints
The following constraints apply to completing the alias for local node form:

• If the node name does not exist in the database, the MMI prompts for a new alias point
code.
• The new alias point code may contain any network number in the range of 1-255. The alias
network does not have to match the primary network.
• If the alias point code does not exist, the ASSIGN CCS ALIAS command adds the new alias
node name and point code to the database.

CCS parameters form

Use the CCS parameters form to provision node role, dynamic records, and P_COMP response.

Figure 7. CCS parameters form

CCS parameters form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

Node name:

CHANGE, DISPLA CCS PARAME

Node role

Logical network

Auto off-normal reporting

SCCP hop counter

P*COMP

No service impact link removal

MTP ready wait for flexible routing download

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 469

Fields
Use the following list to complete the CCS parameters form.

Field Entry and description

Type of parameter Enter the type of parameter (system parameter or logical network
parameter)
Node role Enter the correct description for the local node.
Logical network Enter the logical network name or number
Auto off-normal reporting Enter E to enable the automatic hourly off-normal feature.
Enter D to disable the feature.
SCCP hop counter Hop counter for SCCP routing (0-255).
P_COMP SEAS P_COMP response mode
No service impact link Enter E to enable the feature.
removal Enter D to disable the feature.
MTP ready wait for flexible Enable or disable the processor to wait for flexible routing data
routing download download

Constraints
No constraints apply to completing this form.

Signaling point restart form

Use the signaling point restart form to set up the network.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 470

Figure 8. Signaling point restart form

Signaling point restart form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

CHANGE, DISPLA CCS SPR

Logical network

Signaling point restart flag

IPR flag

Broadcast flag

Fields
Use the following list to complete the signaling point restart form.

Field Entry and description

Logical network Enter the logical network name or number.
Signaling point restart flag Enter E to enable the MRSP on the local node.
Enter D to disable the MRSP on the local node.
IPR flag Enter E to enable the DPC activated IPRs on the CCM restore after a
duplex CCM failure.
Enter D to disable the DPC activated IPRs on the CCM restore after a
duplex CCM failure.
Broadcast flag Enter E to enable full broadcast of TFA or TCA messages on the CCM
restoral after the duplex CCM failure.
Enter D to disable full broadcast of TFA or TCA messages on the CCM
restoral after the duplex CCM failure.

Constraints
No constraints apply to completing this form.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 471

Link set form

Complete one link set form for each link set.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 472

Figure 9. Link set form

Link set form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

Node name:

ASSIGN, CHANGE, DELETE, DISPLA CCS LINKSE

Entry number ___________

Link set name

Logical network

Adjacent node name or point code

Point code

Send prevent TFP and TCP messages (Y or N)

Combined link set (1-8 characters)

Link set type (A, B, C, D, E, or F)

SLS conversion (Y or N)

TFP broadcast (Y or N)

Link set restoration priority (1-16)

SPR enable (Y or N)

Request activation (Y or N)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 473

Fields
Use the following list to complete the link set form:

Field Entry and description

Link set name Enter a link set name (1-8 alphanumeric characters).
New link set name (CHANGE Enter a link set name (1-8 alphanumeric characters).
MMI only)
Adjacent node name or point Enter the name of an adjacent node (1-11 alphanumeric characters)
code where the link set terminates.
Logical network Enter the logical network name or number
Point code Enter point code
Add node (if adjacent node Enter the new node to be assigned.
does not exist)
Send prevent TFP messages Enter Y to send preventive TFP to the adjacent node.
Enter N to avoid sending preventive TFP to the adjacent node.
Combined link set Enter the name of the link set that makes up the combined link set
identification (1-8 alphanumeric characters). This name is combined
with the link set identified at the link set name field.
If the link set entered at the link set name field is not a part of a
combined link set, no entry is required in this field.
Link set type Enter the link set type:
• A to select access (an SP to a 5070 SSG pair)
• B to select bridge (a primary 5070 SSG pair to another primary
5070 SSG pair)
• C to select cross (two 5070 SSG systems to form a 5070 SSG pair)
• D to select diagonal (secondary 5070 SSG pair to a primary 5070
SSG pair)
• E to select extended (an SP to an 5070 SSG pair other than the
home 5070 SSG pair)
• F to connect the 2 SPs
Minimum links (CHANGE MMI Enter the minimum number of links.
only)
SLS conversion (CHANGE MMI Enter Y to apply 5- to 8-bit conversion on outgoing link set.
only) Enter N to bypass conversion.
TFP broadcast Enter Y to send TFP messages on the link set.
Enter N to bypass sending TFP messages on link set.
Link set restoration priority Enter a number (1-16) that identifies the priority of links to be
restored.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 474

Field Entry and description

SPR enable Enter Y to enable SPR support.
Enter N to disable SPR support.
Request activation Enter Y to set the link set at OOSA state.
Enter N to set the link set in the OOSMN state.

Constraints
The number of active links must be the same at the 5070 SSG and the distant node.

PCMAP form
Complete one PCMAP form for each point code.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 475

Figure 10. PCMAP form

PCMAP form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

Node name:

ASSIGN, CHANGE, DELETE, DISPLA CCS PCMAP

Entry number ___________

Logical network

Replace DPC

Old point code

New point code

Destination point code

Low circuit ID

High circuit ID

Fields
Use the following list to complete the PCMAP form:

Field Entry and description

Logical network Enter the logical network name or number
Replace DPC Enter Y or N.
Old point code Enter the old point code
New point code Enter the new point code
Destination point code Enter the destination point code
Low circuit ID Enter the low circuit identification number (0-16383)
High circuit ID Enter the high circuit identification number (0-16383)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 476

Constraints
No constraints apply to completing this form.

MOPC form
Complete one MOPC form for each point code.

Figure 11. MOPC form

MOPC form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

Node name:

ASSIGN, CHANGE, DELETE, DISPLA CCS MPCPAR

Entry number ___________

Link set name or number

Adjacent node name (1-11 char, optional)

Originating point code

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 477

Fields
Use the following list to complete the MPC form:

Field Entry and description

Link set name or number Enter one of the following identifiers: A link set name (1-8
alphanumeric characters) or link set number (1-432).
Adjacent node name Enter the adjacent node name (1-11 chars), optional.
Originating point code Enter the originating point code ([1-255]-[0-255]-[0-255]).

Constraints
No constraints apply to completing this form.

Super link set form

Use this form to display the super link set.

Figure 12. Super link set form

Super link set form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

Node name:

DISPLA CCS SUPERL

Super link set number (1-n or ALL)

Display format (B or D)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 478

Fields
Use the following list to complete the super link set form:

Field Entry and description

Super link set Enter the super link set number
Display format Enter one of the following:
B for brief display
D for detailed display.
B is default

Constraints
No constraints apply to completing this form.

Special link set form

Use this form to define a special link set.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 479

Figure 13. Special link set

Special link set form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

ASSIGN, CHANGE, DELETE, DISPLA CCS SKLS

Link set name

Linkset type

Logical network

Originating point code

Request activation (Y or N)

Minimum link number

Format (B or D)

Fields
Use the following list to complete the administration processor form:

Field Entry and description

Link set name Enter the link set name (1-8 char) or link set number.
Lint set type Enter C to form an STP pair.
Logical network Enter logical network name to which the link set belongs.
Originating point code Enter the originating point code for that particular link set in
decimal format.
Request activation Enter the request activation status (Y or N).
Minimum link number Enter the minimum number of links required active to consider
(CHANGE MMI only) the route not restricted (1-16).
Format (DISPLAY MMI only) Enter the display format (B or D).

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 480

Constraints
No constraints apply to completing this form.

AE1LK, CTDLK, CELK, CEDLK, and HELK form

Use this form to equip an AE1LK, CTDLK, CELK, CEDLK, and HELK processor.

Figure 14. AE1LK, CTDLK, CELK, CEDLK, and HELK form

AE1LK, CTDLK, CELK, CEDLK, and HELK form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

CHANGE, DISPLA PROCESS EQUIP * Pair column used for CEDLK or CTDLK only

Entry Sub S unit Pair Board Frame Frame Vertical Horizontal

Status unit unit
number type [0-31] [A-B]* type name number
number number
1
2

Fields
Use the following list to complete the AE1LK, CTDLK, CELK, CEDLK, and HELK form:

Field Entry and description

Sub type Enter the subsystem type.
S unit Enter a unit number corresponding to the device subtype.
Pair Enter A or B.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 481

Field Entry and description

Equipped status Enter EQD to select equipped status. A processor is equipped when it is
operational. For initial database setup, assume that all processors defined are
equipped.
Enter UNEQD to select unequipped status.
Board type Enter the processor board type.
Frame name Enter the frame name.
Frame number Enter the processor frame number.
Vertical unit Enter the number of vertical units from the floor. This entry defines the
physical location of the device.
Horizontal unit Enter the slot number of the slot that contains the processor.

Constraints
No constraints apply to completing this form.

Default link span

Use the form to display and change default link span.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 482

Figure 15. Default link span form for AE1LK, CELK, CEDLK, and HELK

Default link span form for AE1LK, CEDLK, CELK, and HELK
Company name: Page: of
Location: Date:
CHANGE, DISPLA MAINT LKSPDF

Subtype Cyclic redundancy check

error monitoring
EBIT error monitoring CAS monitoring
Slot16 for SS7 signaling AIS16 monitoring
Line code Timing source
Idle code Selection
Continuous integration period
Continuous clear period
Continuous clear threshold
Link span removal
XMIT remote alarm
Long integration period
Long minor threshold
Long major threshold
Long OS threshold
Clear long period
Clear long threshold
Short integration period
Short minor threshold
Short major threshold
Short OS threshold
Short clear period
Clear short threshold
Frame slip short minor threshold
Frame slip short major threshold
Frame slip short OS threshold
Frame slip short clear period
Frame slip short clear threshold
CRC4 OS one sec threshold
EBIT OS one sec threshold

UAS OS one sec threshold

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 483

Fields
Use the following list to complete the default link span form for AE1LK, CEDLK, CELK, and
HELK:

Field Entry and description

Subtype Enter one of the following routing processor subtypes:
AE1LK
CELK
CEDLK
HELK
CRC4 monitoring Cyclic redundancy check error monitoring
EBIT monitoring EBIT error monitoring
CAS monitoring CAS alarm monitoring
Slot16 for SS7 signaling Time slot16 for SS7 signaling
AIS16 monitoring AIS error alarm monitoring
Line code Enter one of the following: AMI (alternate mark inversion) or
HDB3 (high density bipolar three). HDB3 is the default.
Timing source Enter one of the following: SYSTEM or LINE. SYSTEM is default
Idle code Enter a value between 0 and FF. Default is 54.
Selection Enter the selection from the menu (1–16 or 99).
Continuous integration period Number of 100-millisecond scans allowed in a steady presence of
the alarm before OS threshold is crossed.
Continuous clear period The number of seconds to monitor for the clear threshold before
recovering and clearing continuous period alarms.
Continuous clear threshold The maximum continuous response violations allowed during the
clear period.
Link span removal Enter Y or N.
XMIT remote alarm Enter Y or N.
Long integration period The number of hours over which errors are accumulated.
Long minor threshold The long period alarm minor threshold.
Long major threshold The long period alarm major threshold.
Long OS threshold The long period alarm OS threshold.
Clear long period The number of hours to monitor for the clear threshold before
recovering and clearing long period alarms.
Clear long threshold The maximum long period violations allowed during the clear
period.
Short integration period The number of seconds over which errors are accumulated.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 484

Field Entry and description

Short minor threshold The short period alarm minor threshold.
Short major threshold The short period alarm major threshold.
Short OS threshold The short period alarm OS threshold.
Short clear period The number of seconds to monitor for the clear threshold before
recovering and clearing short period alarms.
Clear short threshold The maximum short period violations allowed during the clear
period.
Frame slip short minor threshold The period for frame slip error alarm minor threshold.
Frame slip short major threshold The period for frame slip error alarm major threshold.
Frame slip short OS threshold The period for frame slip error alarm OS threshold.
Frame slip short clear period The number of seconds to monitor for the clear threshold before
recovering and clearing frame slip alarms.
Frame slip short clear threshold The number of seconds to monitor for the clear error threshold
before recovering and clearing frame slip alarms.
CRC4 OS one sec threshold The number CRC4 error counts per second allowable until an OS
alarm is declared.
EBIT OS one sec threshold The number of EBIT error counts per second allowable until an OS
alarm is declared.
UAS OS one sec threshold The number of consecutive unavailable seconds allowable until an
OS is declared.

Constraints
No constraints apply to completing this form.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 485

Figure 16. Default link span form for CTDLK

Default link span form for CTDLK

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

CHANGE, DISPLA MAINT LKSPDF

Subtype: Timing source:

Line length: T1 idle code:
Selection:
Frame loss hourly threshold:
Frame loss daily threshold:
Bipolar 1-second threshold:
Bipolar hourly threshold:
Bipolar daily threshold:
Frame slip hourly threshold:
Frame slip daily threshold:
CRC6 1-second threshold:
CRC6 hourly threshold:
CRC6 daily threshold:
ES hourly threshold:
ES daily threshold:
SES hourly threshold:
SES daily threshold:
UAS 1-second threshold:
UAS hourly threshold:
UAS daily threshold:
DM hourly threshold:
DM daily threshold:
CRC6 errors per degraded minutes:
Link span removal:
XMIT remote alarm:

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 486

Fields
Use the following list to complete the default T1 link span form for CTDLK:

Field Entry and description

Subtype Enter the following routing processor subtype:
CTDLK
Line length Enter one of the following line lengths:
0 = 0-99 ft
1 = 100-199 ft
2 = 200-299 ft
3 = 300-399 ft
4 = 400-499 ft
5 = 500-599 ft
6 = 600-655 ft
Timing source Timing source for the link span (system or line).
T1 idle code Idle channel codes for a link span (0-FF).
Selection Enter the selection from the menu (1-12 or 99).
Frame loss hourly threshold Number of frame loss errors allowed per hour.
Frame loss daily threshold Number of frame loss errors allowed per day.
Bipolar 1-second threshold Number of bipolar violations per second allowed until a critical
alarm is declared.
Bipolar hourly threshold Number of bipolar violations allowed per hour.
Bipolar daily threshold Number of bipolar violations allowed per day.
Frame slip hourly threshold Number of frame slip errors allowed per hour.
Frame slip daily threshold Number of frame slip errors allowed per daily.
CRC6 1-second threshold Number of CRC6 errors per second allowed until a critical alarm is
declared.
CRC6 hourly threshold Number of CRC6 errors allowed per hour.
CRC6 daily threshold Number of CRC6 errors allowed per day.
ES hourly threshold Number of errored seconds allowed per hour.
ES daily threshold Number of errored seconds allowed per day.
SES hourly threshold Number of severely errored seconds allowed per hour.
SES daily threshold Number of severely errored seconds allowed per day.
UAS 1-second threshold Number of consecutive unavailable seconds allowed until a UAS
critical alarm is declared.
UAS hourly threshold Number of unavailable seconds allowed per hour.
UAS daily threshold Number of unavailable seconds allowed per day.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 487

Field Entry and description

DM hourly threshold Number of degraded minutes allowed per hour.
DM daily threshold Number of degraded minutes allowed per day.
CRC6 errors per degraded Number of CRC6 errors allowed within a minute before declaring
minutes as a degraded minute.
Link span removal Enter Y to remove a link span when a 1 second error threshold is
reached.
XMIT remote alarm Enter Y if a remote alarm is to be transmitted to the far-end
switch when the OS threshold is reached and when the link is
removed.

Constraints
No constraints apply to completing this form.

Link span
Use this form to change and display a link span.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 488

Figure 17. Link span form for AE1LK, CTDLK, CEDLK, CELK, and HELK
Link span form for AE1LK, CTDLK, CEDLK, CELK, and HELK

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

CHANGE, DISPLA MAINT LKSPAN

Change option: Status:

Subtype: Line length:
Unit number: Timing source:
Link span number: T1 idle code:
High-speed link number: Selection:
Frame loss hourly threshold:
Frame loss daily threshold:
Bipolar 1-second threshold:
Bipolar hourly threshold:
Bipolar daily threshold:
Frame slip hourly threshold:
Frame slip daily threshold:
CRC6 1-second threshold:
CRC6 hourly threshold:
CRC6 daily threshold:
ES hourly threshold:
ES daily threshold:
SES hourly threshold:
SES daily threshold:
UAS 1-second threshold:
UAS hourly threshold:
UAS daily threshold:
DM hourly threshold:
DM daily threshold:
CRC6 errors per degraded minutes:
Link span removal:
XMIT remote alarm:

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 489

Figure 18. Link span form for AE1LK, CTDLK, CEDLK, CELK, and HELK, part 2

Link span form for AE1LK, CTDLK, CEDLK, CELK, and HELK

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

CHANGE, DISPLA MAINT LKSPAN

Change option: Status:

Subtype:
Unit number:
Link span number:
CRC4 monitoring:
EBIT monitoring:
CAS monitoring:
SLOT16 FOR SS7 signaling:
AIS 16 monitoring:
Line code
Timing source:
E1 idle code:
Selection:
Continuous integration period:
Continuous clear period:
Continuous clear threshold:
Link span removal:
XMIT remote alarm:
Long integration period:
Long minor threshold:
Long major threshold:
Long OS threshold:
Clear long period:
Clear long threshold:
Short integration period:
Short minor threshold:
Short major threshold:

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 490

Figure 19. Link span form for AE1LK, CTDLK, CEDLK, CELK, and HELK, part 3

Link span form for AE1LK, CTDLK, CEDLK, CELK, and HELK

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

CHANGE, DISPLA MAINT LKSPAN

Short OS threshold:
Short clear period:
Clear short threshold:
Frame slip short minor threshold:
Frame slip short major threshold:
Frame slip short OS threshold:
Frame slip short clear period:
Frame slip short clear threshold:
CRC4 OS one second threshold:
EBIT OS one second threshold:
UAS OS one second threshold:

Fields
Use the following list to complete the link span form for AE1LK, CEDLK, HELK, CTDLK, and
CELK:

Field Entry and description

Change option Enter one of the following change options:
A (link span equipage and characteristics only)
B (link span error alarm threshold data only)
C (change both)
Subtype Enter the following routing processor subtype:
AE1LK
CEDLK
HELK
CTDLK
CELK
Unit number Device unit number of the controlling subtype.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 491

Field Entry and description

Link span number Link span number on a link processor.
Status Equip status of link span (EQD or UNEQD).
Line length Enter one of the following line lengths:
0 = 0-99 ft
1 = 100-199 ft
2 = 200-200 ft
3 = 300-300 ft
4 = 400-499 ft
5 = 500-500 ft
6 = 600-655 ft
Timing source Timing source for the link span (systemor line).
T1 idle code Idle channedl codes for a link span (0-FF).
Selection Enter the selection from the menu (1-12 or 99).
Frame loss hourly threshold Number of frame loss errors allowed per hour.
Frame loss daily threshold Number of frame loss errors allowed per day.
Bipolar 1 second threshold Number of bipolar violations per second allowed until a critical
alarm is declared.
Bipolar hourly threshold Number of bipolar violations allowed per hour.
Bipolar daily threshold Number of bipolar violations allowed per day.
Frame slip hourly threshold Number of frame slip errors allowed per hour.
Frame slip daily threshold Number of frame slip errors allowed per daily.
CRC6 1-second threshold Number of CRC6 errors per second allowed until a critical alarm is
declared.
CRC6 hourly threshold Number of CRC6 errors allowed per hour.
CRC6 daily threshold Number of CRC6 errors allowed per day.
ES hourly threshold Number of errored seconds allowed per hour.
ES daily threshold Number of errored seconds allowed per day.
SES hourly threshold Number of severely errored seconds allowed per hour.
SES daily threshold Number of severely errored seconds allowed per day.
UAS 1-second threshold Number of consecutive unavailable seconds allowed until a UAS
critical alarm is declared.
UAS hourly threshold Number of unavailable seconds allowed per hour.
UAS daily threshold Number of unavailable seconds allowed per day.
DM hourly threshold Number of degraded minutes allowed per hour.
DM daily threshold Number of degraded minutes allowed per day.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 492

Field Entry and description

CRC6 errors per degraded Number of CRC6 errors allowed within a minute before declaring
minutes as a degraded minute.
Link span removal Enter Y to remove a link span when a 1 second error threshold is
reached.
XMIT remote alarm Enter Y if a remote alarm is to be transmitted to the far-end
switch when the OS threshold is reached and when the link is
removed.
CRC4 monitoring Cyclic redundancy check error monitoring
EBIT monitoring EBIT error monitoring
CAS monitoring Channel associated signaling alarm monitoring on time slot 16
Slot 16 for SS7 signaling Time slot 16 for SS7 signaling
AIS 16 monitoring AIS 16 error alarm monitoring
Line code Line code for the link span (AMI or HDB3)
Timing source Timing source for the link span (system or line)
E1 idle code Idle channel codes for a link span (0-FF)
Continuous integration period The number of 100 millisecond scans allowed
Continuous clear period The number of seconds to monitor for the clear threshold
Continuous clear threshold The maximum continuous response violations allowed
Link span removal Enter Y to remove a link span when a 1-second error threshold is
reached.
XMIT remote alarm Enter Y if a remote alarm is to be transmitted to the far-end
switch when the OS threshold is reached and when the link is
removed.
Long integration period The number of hours over which errors are accumulated
Long minor threshold The long period alarm minor threshold
Long major threshold The long period alarm major threshold
Long OS threshold The long period alarm OS threshold
Clear long period The number of hours to monitor for the clear threshold
Clear long threshold The maximum long period violations allowed during the clear
period.
Short integration period The number of seconds over which errors are accumulated
Short minor threshold The short period alarm minor threshold
Short major threshold The short period alarm major threshold
Short OS threshold The short period alarm OS threshold
Short clear threshold The number of seconds to monitor for the clear threshold

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 493

Field Entry and description

Clear short threshold The maximum short period violations allowed during the clear
period
Frame slip short minor threshold The period for frame slip error alarm minor threshold
Frame slip short major threshold The period for frame slip error alarm major threshold
Frame slip short OS threshold The period for frame slip error alarm OS threshold
Frame slip short clear period The number of seconds to monitor for the clear threshold
Frame slip short clear threshold The number of seconds to monitor for the clear error threshold
CRC4 OS one second threshold The number of CRC4 error counts per second allowed until an OS
alarm is declared
EBIT OS one second threshold The number of EBIT error counts per second allowed until an OS
alarm is declared
UAS OS one second threshold The number of consecutive unavailable seconds allowed

Constraints
No constraints apply to completing this form.

Link span loopback

Use the link span loopback to enable or disable the loopback mode.

Figure 20. Link span loopback form

Link span loopback form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

ENABLE, DISABL LKSPAN LOOPBK

Subtype:

Unit:

Link span:

Loopback type:

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 494

Fields
Use the following list to complete the link span loopback form:

Field Entry and description

Subtype Routing processor subtype (CTDLK).
Unit Device unit number of the controlling subtype.
Link span Enter the link span to be accessed (0-3).
Loopback type Enter the loopback state to be set for the link span (Local or Remote).

AE1LK, CELK, HELK, and IPLK link form

Use the link form to define the LSLs (even-numbered links) or the HSLs (odd-numbered links)
assigned to link sets shown on a single link form. One link form defines a maximum of 16 links.

Figure 21. AE1LK, CELK, HELK, and IPLK link form

AE1LK, CELK, HELK, and IPLK link form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

ASSIGN, CHANGE, DELETE, DISPLA CCS LINK

Entry Link set SLC Link CSLS PSLS Routing Routing Activate
number name no. proc proc no.
subtype
1

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 495

Fields
Use the following list to complete the link form:

Field Entry and description

Link set name Enter one of the following identifiers:
A link set name (1-8 alphanumeric characters)
A link set number
SLC Enter a signaling link code (0-15) for the link.
Link number Enter the number of the link.
CSLS Combined signaling link selection code (0-31). This is applicable if the link set
is a combined one.
PSLS Signaling link selection (0-15).
RPSUB Enter a routing processor subtype or pair subtype (AT1LK, DS0LK, or IPLK).
RPNUM Enter a routing processor number.
Activate Enter Y to set the link in the OOSA state.

Constraints
The following constraints apply to completing the link form:

• A link must be assigned the same SLC at the 5070 SSG and the distant node.
• The link set must already be defined in the database.
• If two link sets are combined, the number of links assigned to each link set must be equal.
• A link can be assigned to only one link set.
• The processor associated with the link must be equipped before link assignment.

CEDLK, CELK, and CTDLK link form

Use the link form to define the LSLs (even-numbered links) assigned to link sets shown on a
single link form. One link form defines a maximum of 16 links.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 496

Figure 22. CEDLK, CELK, and CTDLK link form

CEDLK, CELK, and CTDLK link form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

ASSIGN, CHANGE, DELETE, DISPLA CCS LINK

Entry Link set SLC Link Routing Pair Routing Span Channel Activate
number name no. proc proc no no. no.
subtype
1

Fields
Use the following list to complete the link form:

Field Entry and description

Link set name Enter one of the following identifiers:
A link set name (1-8 alphanumeric characters)
A link set number
SLC Enter a signaling link code (0-15) for the link.
Link no. Enter the number of the link.
Routing proc subtype Enter the routing processor subtype (CEDLK or CTDLK).
Pair Enter the routing processor pair assigned to the link (0-n).
Routing proc no. Enter the routing processor number.
Span no. Enter the span number.
Channel no. Enter the channel number.
Activate Enter Y to set link in the OOSA state.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 497

Constraints
The following constraints apply to completing the link form:

• A link must be assigned the same SLC at the 5070 SSG and the distant node.
• The link set must already be defined in the database.
• If two link sets are combined, the number of links assigned to each link set must be equal.
• A link can be assigned to only one link set.
• The processor associated with the link must be equipped before link assignment.

LSL parameters form

Complete an LSL parameters form for each low-speed link and group of LSLs that have the
same values.

Use this form to define low-speed E1 link parameters.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 498

Figure 23. Low-speed E1 link parameters form, part 1

Low-speed E1 link parameters form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

CHANGE, COPY, DISPLA CCS CELKPA

Link number or numbers

Group number 1: Congestion level values

Onset level Abatement level Discard level

RX 10-126 1-117 19-135

TXL1 49-104 9-95 58-131

58-113 9-104 67-131

TXL2

TXL3 67-122 9-113 76-131

TX 49-208 9-113

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 499

Figure 24. Low-speed E1 link parameters form, part 2

Group number 2: Timer values

Timer definitions level 2 MTP for D=default, U=user-defined

timers T1-T9
T2 timer select L=low, H=high
T1 aligned and ready 40000-50000 (multiples of 10) ms
T2 not aligned (low) 5000-150000 (multiples of 10) ms
T3 aligned 1000-2000 (multiples of 10) ms
T4 normal proving 7500-95000 ms
T4 emergency proving 400-600 ms
T5 sending SIB 80-120 ms
T6 remote congestion 3000-6000 ms for high baud
T7 acknowledge delay 500-2000 ms for high baud

T8 idle 50-60000 ms for high baud

T9 false congestion 10-120 sec

Group number 3: Marginal threshold values

SU error threshold 1-65535

NAK received threshold 1-65535
Automatic changeover threshold 1-65535

Group number 4: Common link values

Error correction Error threshold for removing a Normal error correction

link from service PCR error correction
N2 octet threshold (for forward Number of octets available for 2000-20000
error correction) retransmissions

N2 octet applies only if the forward error-correction mechanism is selected

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 500

Fields
Use the following list to complete the low-speed E1 link parameters form:

Field Entry and description

Link number or numbers Enter an even number or a range of numbers that identify the link or
links that require the parameters.
RX onset level Enter a value for the maximum number of message buffers that can
contain received messages that have not been transferred.
RX abatement level Enter a value for the minimum number of message buffers that can
contain received messages that have not been transferred.
RX discard level Enter a value for the number of message buffers that can contain
received messages that have not been transferred.
TXL1 onset level Enter a value for the number of message buffers containing level 1
messages waiting for transmission.
TXL1 abatement level Enter a value for the minimum number of message buffers
(abatement level) containing level 1 messages waiting for
transmission.
TXL1 discard level Enter a value to select the maximum number of message buffers
containing level 1 messages waiting for transmission that may be
discarded.
TXL2 onset level Enter a value for the number of message buffers containing level 2
messages waiting for transmission.
TXL2 abatement level Enter a value for the minimum number of message buffers
(abatement level) containing level 2 messages waiting for
transmission.
TXL2 discard level Enter a value to select the maximum number of message buffers
containing level 2 messages waiting for transmission that may be
discarded.
TXL3 onset level Enter a value for the number of message buffers containing level 3
messages waiting for transmission.
TXL3 abatement level Enter a value for the minimum number of message buffers
(abatement level) containing level 3 messages waiting for
transmission.
TXL3 discard level Enter a value to select the maximum number of message buffers
containing level 3 messages waiting for transmission that may be
discarded.
TXONSET Number of message buffers to transmit congestion onset
TXAABT Number of message buffers to transmit congestion abatement
Note: The TXLONSET, TXLABAT, and TXLDISC prompts are issued only if the congestion parameter for
the logical network is set to “CONGESTION WITH PRIORITY”. The TXONSET and TXAABT prompts are
issued only if the congestion parameter for the logical network is set to “CONGESTION WITH LEVELS”.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 501

Field Entry and description

Timer definitions for timers Enter D to select default values.
T1-T7 Enter U to select user-defined values. Complete the remainder of the
timer portion of the form.
T2 timer select Enter L to select the low value for the T2 not-aligned timer at the
5070 SSG when automatic allocation of signaling links is
implemented.
Enter H to select the high value for the timer.
T1 aligned and ready Enter a value for time required for a link to enter the in-service state
(starting when a link enters the aligned state and ending when the
link enters the in-service state).
T2 not aligned (low and high) Enter a value for the time required for the system to declare the link
is in the out-of-alignment state (starting when a signaling terminal
sends an out-of-alignment message to the adjacent node and ending
when the link enters normal alignment, emergency alignment, or the
out-of-service state). The value must be a multiple of 10.
T3 aligned Enter a value for the time when a link is in the normal or proving
alignment state [starting when a signaling terminal sends an
alignment message (normal or proving) to the adjacent node and
ending when the link enters the out-of-alignment state]. The value
must be a multiple of 10.
T4 normal proving Enter a value for the time when a link is in the proving state during
normal alignment (starting when the link enters the proving state and
ending when the link leaves the proving state). The value must be a
multiple of 10.
T4 emergency proving Enter a value for the time when a link is in the proving state during
emergency alignment (starting when a link enters the proving state
and ending when the link leaves the proving state). The value must be
a multiple of 10.
T5 sending SIB Enter a value for the time when a link sends SIB messages to the
distant node (starting when the RX onset threshold for the link is
exceeded and ending when the link leaves the congestion onset
level).
T6 remote congestion Enter a value for the time when SIB messages are received from a
distant node (starting when a SIB message is received from the
distant node and ending when a positive or negative acknowledgment
is received from the distant node over the link). This value is
different for high baud rates or low baud rates. The value must be a
multiple of 10.
T7 acknowledge delay Enter a value for the ACK delay (starting when a SIB message is
received from a distant node and ending when an acknowledgment
message is received from the distant node). The value must be a
multiple of 10.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 502

Field Entry and description

T8 idle Enter a value for the amount of time a link can remain idle before
being removed from service.
To disable this timer, enter DIS.
T9 false congestion Enter a value for a timer that removes links from service when false
link congestion is detected.
To disable this timer, enter DIS.
SU error threshold Enter a value that defines the error threshold for SUs received with
errors on the link in 1 hour.
NAK received threshold Enter a value that defines the number of negative acknowledgments
received on the link in 1 hour.
Automatic changeover Enter a value to select the number of times the link undergoes the
threshold automatic changeover procedure to divert traffic from the link.
Error correction Enter B to select basic error correction.
Enter P to select PCR error correction.
N2 octet threshold Enter a value for octets made available for retransmission
(2000-20000).

Constraints
The following constraints apply to completing the low-speed E1 link parameters form:

• The default values reflect Telcordia recommendations in TR-NWL-000-246.

Low-speed T1 link parameters form

Use this form to define low-speed T1 link parameters.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 503

Figure 25. Low-speed T1 link parameters form, part1

Low-speed T1 link parameters form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

CHANGE, COPY, DISPLA CCS T1LKPA

Link number or numbers

Group number 1: Congestion level values

Onset level Abatement level Discard level

RX 10-126 1-117 19-135

TXL1 49-104 9-95 58-131

58-113 9-104 67-131

TXL2

TXL3 67-122 9-113 76-131

LV1CON Y=Enable, N=Disable

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 504

Figure 26. Low-speed T1 link parameters form, part 2

Group number 2: Timer values
Timer definitions level 2 MTP for D=default, U=user-defined
timers T1-T9
T2 timer select L=low, H=high
T1 aligned and ready 40000-50000 (multiples of 10) ms
T2 not aligned (low) 5000-150000 (multiples of 10) ms
T3 aligned 1000-2000 (multiples of 10) ms
T4 normal proving 7500-95000 ms
T4 emergency proving 400-600 ms
T5 sending SIB 80-120 ms
T6 remote congestion 3000-6000 ms for high baud
T7 acknowledge delay 500-2000 ms for high baud
T8 idle 50-60000 ms for high baud
T9 false congestion 10-120 sec

Group number 3: Marginal threshold values

SU error threshold 1-65535

NAK received threshold 1-65535

Automatic changeover threshold 1-65535

Group number 4: Common link values

Error correction method Method of retransmitting Normal error correction

unacknowledged or negatively PCR error correction
acknowledged signal units
Signal unit error rate monitor Error threshold for removing a 20-1000
link from service

N2 octet threshold (for forward Number of octets available for 2000-20000

error correction) retransmissions

Baud rate (only for CTDLK) Low-speed data transfer rate 4600 b/s
9600 b/s
19.2 kb/s
High-speed data transfer rate 56 kb/s
64 kb/s
N2 octet appears only if the forward error-collection mechanism is selected.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 505

Fields
Use the following list to complete the low-speed T1 link parameters form:

Field Entry and description

Link number or numbers Enter an even number or a range of numbers that identify the link or
links that require the parameters.
RX onset level Enter a value for the maximum number of message buffers that can
contain received messages that have not been transferred.
RX abatement level Enter a value for the minimum number of message buffers that can
contain received messages that have not been transferred.
RX discard level Enter a value for the number of message buffers that can contain
received messages that have not been transferred.
TXL1 onset level Enter a value for the number of message buffers containing level 1
messages waiting for transmission.
TXL1 abatement level Enter a value for the minimum number of message buffers
(abatement level) containing level 1 messages waiting for
transmission.
TXL1 discard level Enter a value to select the maximum number of message buffers
containing level 1 messages waiting for transmission that may be
discarded.
TXL2 onset level Enter a value for the number of message buffers containing level 2
messages waiting for transmission.
TXL2 abatement level Enter a value for the minimum number of message buffers
(abatement level) containing level 2 messages waiting for
transmission.
TXL2 discard level Enter a value to select the maximum number of message buffers
containing level 2 messages waiting for transmission that may be
discarded.
TXL3 onset level Enter a value for the number of message buffers containing level 3
messages waiting for transmission.
TXL3 abatement level Enter a value for the minimum number of message buffers
(abatement level) containing level 3 messages waiting for
transmission.
TXL3 discard level Enter a value to select the maximum number of message buffers
containing level 3 messages waiting for transmission that may be
discarded.
Timer definitions for timers Enter D to select default values.
T1-T7 Enter U to select user-defined values. Complete the remainder of the
timer portion of the form.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 506

Field Entry and description

T2 timer select Enter L to select the low value for the T2 not-aligned timer at the
5070 SSG when automatic allocation of signaling links is
implemented.
Enter H to select the high value for the timer.
T1 aligned and ready Enter a value for time required for a link to enter the in-service state
(starting when a link enters the aligned state and ending when the
link enters the in-service state).
T2 not aligned (low and high) Enter a value for the time required for the system to declare the link
is in the out-of-alignment state (starting when a signaling terminal
sends an out-of-alignment message to the adjacent node and ending
when the link enters normal alignment, emergency alignment, or the
out-of-service state). The value must be a multiple of 10.
T3 aligned Enter a value for the time when a link is in the normal or proving
alignment state [starting when a signaling terminal sends an
alignment message (normal or proving) to the adjacent node and
ending when the link enters the out-of-alignment state]. The value
must be a multiple of 10.
T4 normal proving Enter a value for the time when a link is in the proving state during
normal alignment (starting when the link enters the proving state and
ending when the link leaves the proving state). The value must be a
multiple of 10.
T4 emergency proving Enter a value for the time when a link is in the proving state during
emergency alignment (starting when a link enters the proving state
and ending when the link leaves the proving state). The value must be
a multiple of 10.
T5 sending SIB Enter a value for the time when a link sends SIB messages to the
distant node (starting when the RX onset threshold for the link is
exceeded and ending when the link leaves the congestion onset
level).
T6 remote congestion Enter a value for the time when SIB messages are received from a
distant node (starting when a SIB message is received from the
distant node and ending when a positive or negative acknowledgment
is received from the distant node over the link). This value is
different for high baud rates or low baud rates. The value must be a
multiple of 10.
T7 acknowledge delay Enter a value for the ACK delay (starting when a SIB message is
received from a distant node and ending when an acknowledgment
message is received from the distant node). The value must be a
multiple of 10.
T8 idle Enter a value for the amount of time a link can remain idle before
being removed from service.
To disable this timer, enter DIS.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 507

Field Entry and description

T9 false congestion Enter a value for a timer that removes links from service when false
link congestion is detected.
To disable this timer, enter DIS.
SU error threshold Enter a value that defines the error threshold for SUs received with
errors on the link in 1 hour.
NAK received threshold Enter a value that defines the number of negative acknowledgments
received on the link in 1 hour.
Automatic changeover Enter a value to select the number of times the link undergoes the
threshold automatic changeover procedure to divert traffic from the link.
Error correction Enter B to select basic error correction.
Enter P to select PCR error correction.
N2 octet threshold Enter a value for octets made available for retransmission
(2000-20000).

Constraints
The following constraints apply to completing the low-speed T1 link parameters form:

• The signal encoding value is the only link parameters for DS0A channels that can be
defined.
• The default values reflect Telcordia recommendation in TR-NWL-000-246.

ATM over E1 high-speed links

Use this form to define ATM over E1 high-speed link parameters.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 508

Figure 27. ATM over E1 high-speed link parameters form, part 1

ATM over E1 high-speed link parameters form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

CHANGE, COPY, DISPLA CCS E1LKPA

Entry value___________
Link number
Parameter group

Group number 1: ATM values

VPI 0-4095

VCI 0-65535

LINBDO

QSCLASS 0-3
CLKSCE

TXPUTP

ATMSCR

Group number 2: Congestion level values

Onset level Abatement level Discard level

RXL1 857-7557 86-7020 1629-8100

TXL1 930-4257 368-3888 2374-5362

TXL2 2374-4625 368-4257 2742-5362

2742-4993 368-4625 3111-5362

TXL3

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 509

Figure 28. ATM over E1 high-speed link parameters form, part 2

Group number 3: ATM timer values

TMRDF D or U

COPTCC 100-2000 ms

25-500 ms
COPTKA
500-2000 ms
COPTNR
25-500 ms
COPTP
25-1000 ms
COPTID
0-1200 s
COPTPV
1-15 s
CFNNIT1
15-180 s
CFNNIT2

CFNNIT3 1000-25000 ms

30-1440 min
LMTRS

LMTNC 1000-6000 ms

LMTSUP 10-600 s

LMTLOS 500-10000 ms

LMTTAU 25-250 ms

Group number 4: Traffic measurement marginal threshold values

EPSOEC 0-65535

SDPRETX 0-65535

HTAUTOC 0-65535

CPSOEC 0-65535

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 510

Figure 29. ATM over E1 high-speed link parameters form, part 3

Group number 5: SAAL values

OPMAXCC 1-10

OPMAXPD 5-2120

OPMAXST 3-1021

CFNNIN1 50-50000

LMMXNRP 0-10

LMMEXSF 0-1000

LMQOSTH 100-1000

NUMINTL 1-25

NMITBLK 1-25

CFC1CTR 1-30

Fields
Use the following list to complete the ATM over E1 high-speed link forms:

Field Entry and description

Link number Enter the number of the high-speed link (0-n).
Parameter group Enter the parameter group:
1 to select ATM
2 to select congestion level
3 to select ATM timers
4 to select Traffic measurement marginal threshold
5 to select SAAL timers
VPI Enter the virtual path identifier (0-4095).
VCI Enter the virtual channel identifier (0-65535).
LINBDO Enter the line build out

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 511

Field Entry and description

QSCLASS Enter the quality of service class (0-3).
CLKSCE Enter the clock source:
0 to select line timing
1 to select DCG A
2 to select DCG B
3 to select NIC local oscillator
TXPUTP Enter the transmit pulse template:
0 to select 0-99 ft
1 to select 100-199 ft
2 to select 200-299 ft
3 to select 300-399 ft
4 to select 400-499 ft
5 to select 500-599
6 to select 600-655 ft
ATMSCR Enable or disable ATM scrambling
RXL1ON Enter the receive congestion level 1 onset (857-7557).
RXL1AB Enter the receive congestion level 1 abatement (86-7020).
RXL1DS Enter the receive congestion level 1 discard (1629-8100).
TXL1ON Enter the transmit congestion level 1 onset (930-4257).
TXL1AB Enter the transmit congestion level 1 abatement (368-3888).
TXL1DS Enter the transmit congestion level 1 discard (2374-5362).
TXL2ON Enter the transmit congestion level 2 onset (2374-4625).
TXL2AB Enter the transmit congestion level 2 abatement (368-4257).
TXL2DS Enter the transmit congestion level 2 discard (2742-5362).
TXL3ON Enter the transmit congestion level 3 onset (2742-4993).
TXL3AB Enter the transmit congestion level 3 abatement (368-4625).
TXL3DS Enter the transmit congestion level 3 discard (3111-5362).
TMRDF Timer definition:
D Default timers
U User defined timers
COPTCC Enter the SSCOP timer connection control (100-2000 ms).
COPTKA Enter the SSCOP timer keep alive (25-500 ms).
COPTNR Enter the SSCOP timer no response (500-2000 ms).
COPTP Enter the SSCOP timer poll (25-500 ms).
COPTID Enter the SSCOP timer idle (25-1000 ms).

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 512

Field Entry and description

COPTPV Enter the SSCOP timer force proving (0-1200 s).
CFNNIT1 Enter the SSCF-NNI AERM timer 1 (1-15 s).
CFNNIT2 Enter the SSCF-NNI AERM timer 2 (15-180 s).
CFNNIT3 Enter the SSCF-NNI AERM timer 3 (1-25 ms).
LMTRS Enter the SAAL-LM timer repeat SREC (1-180 min).
LMTNC Enter the SAAL-LM timer no credit (1000-6000 ms).
LMTSUP Enter the SAAL-LM timer ISERM T_SUP (10-600 s).
LMTLOS Enter the SAAL-LM ISERM T_LOSS (500-10000 ms).
LMTTAU Enter the SAAL-LM ISERM T_TAU (25-500 ms).
EPSOEC Enter the SSCOP errored PDUs sum-of-errors counter (1-65535).
SDPRETX Enter the SSCOP SD PDUs transmitted requiring retransmission (1–65535).
HTAUTOC Enter the hourly threshold for automatic changeovers (1-65535).
CPSOEC Enter the SSCOP connection PDUs sum-of-errors counter (1-65535).
OPMAXCC Enter the maximum number of retransmissions per message(1-10).
OPMAXPD Enter the maximum number of PDUs before sending a poll PDU (5-2120).
OPMAXST Enter the maximum number of list elements placed in a STAT PDU (3-1021).
CFNNIN1 Enter the number of PDUs sent during normal proving (50-50000).
LMMXNRP Enter the SAAL LM maximum NRPs during a successful proving attempt
(0-10).
LMMEXSF Enter the SAAL LM ISERM exponential smoothing factor (0-1000).
LMQOSTH Enter the SAAL LM quality-of-service threshold (100-1000).
NUMINTL Enter the number of monitoring intervals (1-25).
NMITBLK Enter the number of monitoring intervals in a block (1-10).
CFC1CTR Enter the number of proving PDUs to be sent after each T3 interval (1-30).

Constraints
The following constraint apply when completing the ATM over T1 high-speed link forms:

• The congestion values must be set with the following criteria: RXL1AB < RXL1ON < RXL1DS
and TXL1AB < TXL1ON < TXL1DS < TXL2AB < TXL2ON < TXL2DS < TXL3AB < TXL3ON <
TXL3DS, with all values differing by at least 25 messages.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 513

HSL parameters
Use this form to define physical HSL parameters.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 514

Figure 30. HSL parameters form, part1

HSL parameters form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

CHANGE, COPY, DISPLA CCS HELKPA

Link number or numbers

Group number 1: Common link values

Error correction method Method of retransmitting Basic error correction

unacknowledged or negatively PCR correction
acknowledged signal units
N2 octet Number of octets available for 20000-100000
retransmission
N2 octet appears only if the forward error-collection mechanism is selected.

Group number 2: Congestion level values

Onset level Abatement level Discard level

RXL1 2-832 2-832 2-832

240-880 120-780 260-2040

TXL1

260-1780 120-1720 280-2040

TXL2

TXL3 280-1890 300-2040 320-2048

TXONSET 240-1890

TXABAT 120-2040

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 515

Figure 31. HSL parameters form, part 2

Group number 3: Timer values

Timer definitions level 2 MTP for D= default, U=user defined

timers T1-T7

T2 timer select L=low, H=High

T1 aligned and ready 25000-350000 (multiples of 10 ms)

T2 not aligned 5000-50000 (multiples of 10 ms)

T3 aligned 1000-2000 (multiples of 10 ms)

T4 normal proving 3000-7000(multiples of 10 ms)

T4 emergency proving 400-600 (multiples of 10 ms)

T5 sending SIB 80-120(multiples of 10 ms)

T6 remote congestion 3000-6000(multiples of 10 ms)

T7 acknowledge delay 500-2000 (multiples of 10 ms)

Group number 4: Marginal threshold values

SU error threshold 1-65535

NAK received threshold 1-65535

Automatic changeover threshold 1-65535

Fields
Use the following list to complete the HSL parameters form:

Field Entry and description

Link number or numbers Enter the number that identify the link that require the parameters.
Error correction Enter B to select basic error correction
Enter P to select PCR

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 516

Field Entry and description

N2 octet threshold Enter a value for octet forced retransmission threshold count.
RXL1ON Enter the receive congestion level 1 onset (2-832).
RXL1AB Enter the receive congestion level 1 abatement (2-832).
RXL1DS Enter the receive congestion level 1 discard (2-832).
TXL1ON Enter the transmit congestion level 1 onset (240-880).
TXL1AB Enter the transmit congestion level 1 abatement (120-780).
TXL1DS Enter the transmit congestion level 1 discard (260-2040).
TXL2ON Enter the transmit congestion level 2 onset (260-1780).
TXL2AB Enter the transmit congestion level 2 abatement (120-1720).
TXL2DS Enter the transmit congestion level 2 discard (280-2040).
TXL3ON Enter the transmit congestion level 3 onset (280-1890).
TXL3AB Enter the transmit congestion level 3 abatement (300-2048).
TXL3DS Enter the transmit congestion level 3 discard (320-2048).
TX onset level Enter a value for the number of message buffers that can contain received
congestion onset messages (240-1890).
TX abatement level Enter a value for the number of message buffers that can contain received
congestion abatement messages (120-2040).
Timer definitions for timers Enter D to select default values.
T1-T7 Enter U to select user-defined values. Complete the remainder of the timer
portion of the form.
T2 timer select Enter L to select the low value for the T2 not-aligned timer.
Enter H to select the high value for the timer.
T1 aligned and ready Enter a value for the timer T1 aligned and ready. The value must be a
multiple of 10.
T2 not aligned Enter a value for the timer T2 aligned and ready. The value must be a
multiple of 10.
T3 aligned Enter a value for the timer T3 aligned. The value must be a multiple of 10.
T4 emergency proving Enter a value for the timer T4 normal proving. The value must be a multiple
of 10.
T5 sending SIB Enter a value for the timer T5 SIB. The value must be a multiple of 10.
T6 remote congestion Enter a value for the timer T6 remote congestion. The value must be a
multiple of 10.
T7 acknowledge delay Enter a value for the timer T7 excessive delay of acknowledgement. The
value must be a multiple of 10.
SU error threshold Enter a value that defines the error threshold for SUs received with errors
on the link in 1 hour.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 517

Field Entry and description

NAK received threshold Enter a value that defines the number of negative acknowledgement
received on the link in 1 hour
Automatic changeover Enter a value to select the number of times the link undergoes the
threshold automatic changeover procedure to divert traffic from the link.

IPLK and IPUA form

Use this form to equip an IPLK and IPUA processor.

Figure 32. IPLK and IPUA form

IPLK and IPUA form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:
CHANGE, DISPLA PROCES EQUIP

Subsystem Device Equipped Board Frame Frame Vertical Horiz

Entry name number unit
number type unit status type unit
number [1-21]
1
2

Fields
Use the following list to complete the IPLK form:

Field Entry and description

Subsystem type Enter the subsystem type.
Device unit number Enter a unit number corresponding the device subtype
Equipped Status Enter EQD to select equipped status. A processor is equipped when it is
operational. For initial database setup, assume that all processors defined are
equipped.
Enter UNEQD to select unequipped status.
Board type Enter the processor board type.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 518

Field Entry and description

Frame name Enter the frame name.
Frame number Enter the processor frame number.
Vertical unit Enter the number of vertical units from the floor. This entry defines the
physical location of the device.
Horizontal unit Enter the slot number of the slot that contains the processor.

Hosts file parameters form

Use this form to define the hosts file parameters to an IP interface on the 5070 SSG.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 519

Figure 33. Hosts file parameters form

Hosts file parameters form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

ASSIGN, CHANGE, DISPLA DELETE HOSTS FILE

Local or remote entity (L or R)

Local IP entity (P or A)

Processor subtype (CCM, IPLK, IPUA, or PXP)

Processor number for CCM, IPLK, IPUA, or PXP

Port ID (1 or 2)

Pair ID (A or B)

Remote IP entity (N)

IP address

Netmask address

Default router address

Network route address 1

Network route netmask address 1

Network route address 2

Network route netmask address 2

Network route address 3

Network route netmask address 3

Network route address 4

Network route netmask address 4

Network gateway router address

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 520

Fields
Use the following list to complete the hosts file form:

Field Entry and description

Local or remote entity Enter the local or remote entity (L or R)
Local IP entity Enter the local IP entity (Processor, P, CCMALIAS or A)
Processor subtype Enter the processor subtype (IPLK, IPUA, CCM, or PXP)
Processor number Enter the processor number for the IPLK (0-63), IPUA (0-47), CCM, or
PXP (0-11)
Port ID Enter the port ID (1 or 2) for the IPLK, IPUA, CCM, or PXP
Pair ID Enter the pair ID for the CCM or PXP processor (A or B)
Remote IP entity Enter the remote IP entity (NTP server or N)
IP address Enter the IP address in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where xxx is
0-255.
Netmask address Enter the netmask address in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where xxx
is 0-255. This is applicable for the IP entity processor.
Default router address Enter the default router address in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where
xxx is 0-255. This is applicable for the IP entity processor.
Network route address 1 Enter the network route address in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where
xxx is 0-255. This is applicable for the CCM, IPLK, IPUA, or PXP
processor.
Network route netmask Enter the network route netmask address in the format
address 1 xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where xxx is 0-255. This is applicable for the CCM,
IPLK, IPUA, or PXP processor.
Network route address 2 Enter the network route address in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where
xxx is 0-255. This is applicable for the CCM, IPLK, IPUA, or PXP
processor.
Network route netmask Enter the network route netmask address in the format
address 2 xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where xxx is 0-255. This is applicable for the CCM,
IPLK, IPUA, or PXP processor.
Network route address 3 Enter the network route address in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where
xxx is 0-255. This is applicable for the CCM, IPLK, IPUA, or PXP
processor.
Network route netmask Enter the network route netmask address in the format
address 3 xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where xxx is 0-255. This is applicable for the CCM,
IPLK, IPUA, or PXP processor.
Network route address 4 Enter the network route address in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where
xxx is 0-255. This is applicable for the CCM, IPLK, IPUA, or PXP
processor.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 521

Field Entry and description

Network route netmask Enter the network route netmask address in the format
address 4 xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where xxx is 0-255. This is applicable for the CCM,
IPLK, IPUA, or PXP processor.
Network gateway router Enter the network gateway router address in the format
address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where xxx is 0-255. This is applicable for the CCM,
IPLK, IPUA, or PXP processor.

Note: After setting up the hosts file, you must remove and restore the affected processors to
pick up the new hosts file.

IP connection parameters
Use this form to define the IP connection parameters.

Figure 34. IP connection parameters form

IP connection parameters form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

ASSIGN, CHANGE, DELETE, DISPLAY CCS IPCONN

Link number

Destination IP address

Destination port

Source port

Fields
Use the following list to complete the IP connection parameters form:

Field Entry and description

Link number Enter the link number (0-3071)
Destination IP address Enter the destination IP address in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where xxx is
0-255.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 522

Field Entry and description

Destination port Enter the destination port number (1-65535).
Source port Enter the source port number (1-65535).

IPLK parameters form

Use this form to define IPLK parameters.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 523

Figure 35. IPLK parameters form, part 1

IPLK parameters form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

CHANGE, COPY, DISPLA CCS IPLKPA

Entry value___________

Link number

Parameter group

Group number 1: MTP2 user peer-peer adaptation

T1 timer ready 40000-50000

T2 status alignment 5000-150000

T3 status proving 1000-2000

T4 proving normal 7500-9500

T4 proving emergency 400-600

T6 remote congestion 3000-6000

T7 acknowledged delay 500-2000

SRTT allowed for proving 0-65535

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 524

Figure 36. IPLK parameters form, part 2

Group number 2: SCTP timing

SCTP T1 initialization 0-65535

SCTP T2 shutdown 0-65535

Bundle timer 0-65535

Idle timer 0-65535

Sack timer 0-65535

Cookie preservative 0-120000

Maximum heartbeat misses 1-100

Group number 3: SCTP sizing

Minimum bundling 0-65535

Inbound buffer 0-10000000

Outbound buffer 0-10000000

Slow start threshold 0-65535

Initial congestion control 0-10000000

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 525

Figure 37. IPLK parameters form, part 3

Group number 4: Congestion level

TXABATELVL1 0-100

TXONSETLVL1 0-100

TXDISCLVL1
0-100

TXABATELVL2 0-100

TXONSETLVL2
0-100

TXDISCLVL2
0-100

TXABATELVL3 0-100

TXONSETLVL3 0-100

TXDISCLVL3
0-100

RXABATE
0-100

RXONSET 0-100

RXDISC
0-100

TXABATE
0-100

TXONSET
0-100

Group number 5: Marginal threshold

Link OOS 1-120000

ASSORETRAN
1-65535

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 526

Fields
Use the following list to complete the IPLK parameters form:

Field Entry and description

Link number Enter the number of the link (0-n).
Parameter group Enter the parameter group:
1 to select MTP2 user peer-peer adaptation
2 to select SCTP timing
3 to select SCTP sizing
4 to select congestion level
5 to select marginal threshold
T1 timer ready Enter the time allowed by M2PA for a response to the M2PA link status
ready message.
T2 status alignment Enter the time allowed by M2PS for a response to the M2PA link status
alignment message.
T3 status proving Enter the time allowed by M2PA for a response to the M2PA link status
proving message.
T4 proving normal Enter the time allowed by M2PA for proving the M2PA link under normal
condition.
T4 proving emergency Enter the time allowed by M2PA for proving the M2PA link under
emergency condition.
T6 remote congestion Enter the time allowed by M2PA for the M2PA peer to be congested
before failing the link.
T7 acknowledged delay Enter the time allowed by M2PA for a response to the M2PA user data
message.
SRTT proving allowed Enter the maximum value of smoothed round trip time allowed for
proving.
SCTP T1 initialization Enter the SCTP timer for waiting for a response during initialization of
an association.
SCTP T2 shutdown Enter the SCTP timer for waiting for a response during shutdown of an
association.
Bundle timer Enter the amount of delay the SCTP allows for bundling of the outgoing
data chunks.
Idle timer Enter the amount of delay the SCTP allows between the round trip time
calculations.
Sack timer Enter the SCTP maximum delay after the arrival of the datagram before
selective acknowledgement.
Cookie preservative Enter the value to increase the cookie life span.
Maximum heartbeat misses Enter the maximum number of consecutive unacknowledged heartbeat
messages allowed by the SCTP.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 527

Field Entry and description

Minimum bundling Enter the minimum message size for bundling.
Inbound buffer Enter the memory allocated for the SCTP inbound message buffer.
Outbound buffer Enter the memory allocated for the SCTP outbound message buffer.
Slow start threshold Enter the initial value of the SCTP slow start threshold.
Initial congestion control Enter the initial size of the SCTP congestion control window.
TXABATELVL1 Enter the value for the maximum number of L1 buffers to transmit
congestion abatement.
TXONSETLVL1 Enter the value for the maximum number of L1 buffers to transmit
congestion onset.
TXDISCLVL1 Enter the value for the maximum number of L1 buffers to transmit
congestion discard.
TXABATELVL2 Enter the value for the maximum number of L2 buffers to transmit
congestion abatement.
TXONSETLVL2 Enter the value for the maximum number of L2 buffers to transmit
congestion onset.
TXDISCLVL2 Enter the value for the maximum number of L2 buffers to transmit
congestion discard.
TXABATELVL3 Enter the value for the maximum number of 31 buffers to transmit
congestion abatement.
TXONSETLVL3 Enter the value for the maximum number of L3 buffers to transmit
congestion onset.
TXDISCLVL3 Enter the value for the maximum number of L3 buffers to transmit
congestion discard.
RXABATE Enter the value for the maximum number of buffers to receive
congestion abatement.
RXONSET Enter the value for the maximum number of buffers to receive
congestion onset.
RXDISC Enter the value for the maximum number of buffers to receive
congestion discard.
TXABATE Enter the value for the maximum number of buffers to transmit
congestion abatement.
TXONSET Enter the value for the maximum number of buffers to transmit
congestion onset.
Link OOS Enter the value for the M2PA link out-of-service duration threshold.
ASSORETRAN Enter the value for the SCTP association retransmitted chunks
threshold.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 528

Constraints
No constraints apply to completing this form.

IP system parameters
Use this form to define the IP system parameters.

Figure 38. IP system parameters form

IP system parameters form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

CHANGE, DISPLAY CCS IPSYSP

Window size 0-1000000

Memory 0-1000000000

Initial retransmission 0-65535

Minimum retransmission 0-65535

Maximum retransmission 0-65535

Cookie life 0-120000

Fields
Use the following list to complete the IP system parameters form:

Name Entry and description

Window size Enter the advertised receiver window size in bytes.
Memory Enter the total memory allocated for the SCTP stack in bytes
Initial retransmission Enter the initial retransmission timeout in ms
Minimum retransmission Enter the minimum retransmission timeout in ms

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 529

Name Entry and description

Maximum retransmission Enter the maximum retransmission timeout in ms
Cookie life Enter the cookie life in ms

Constraints
No constraints apply to completing this form.

Application server form

Use this form to define the application server parameters.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 530

Figure 39. Application server form

Application server form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

ASSIGN, CHANGE, DELETE, DISPLA CCS AS

Entry number __________________

AS name

New AS name (CHANGE MMI only)

Traffic mode

Active threshold number

Notify threshold number

Inbound AS allowed

Outbound AS allowed

Suppress DUNA broadcast

Preventive DUNA

Insufficient TFR

Default activation request

Activation request (CHANGE MMI only)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 531

Fields
Use the following list to complete the application server form:

Name Entry and description

AS name Enter the application server name (1-16 alphanumeric characters).
For CHANGE MMI, enter the application server name or ID.
New AS name (CHANGE MMI Enter the new application server name (1-16 alphanumeric
only) characters).
Traffic mode Enter the traffic mode:
O - Override mode
L - Loadsharing mode
B - Broadcast mode
Active threshold number Enter the minimum number of active ASPs to transition the
application server to AS-ACTIVE state (1-8).
Notify threshold number Enter the notify threshold number (1-8).
Inbound AS allowed Enter Y to allow messages to be received from another AS.
Enter N to not allow messages to be received from another AS.
Outbound AS allowed Enter Y to allow messages to be sent to another AS.
Enter N to not allow messages to be sent to another AS.
Suppress DUNA broadcast Enter Y to suppress DUNA messages.
Enter N to not suppress DUNA messages.
Preventive DUNA Enter Y to convert DRST messages to DUNA messages.
Enter N to not convert DRST messages to DUNA messages.
Insufficient TFR Enter Y to send TFR.
Enter N to not send TFR.
Default activation request Enter Y to use the default activation request.
Enter N to not use the default activation request.
Activation request (CHANGE Enter Y to use activation request for LAS parameters.
MMI only) Enter N to not use activation request for LAS parameters.

Constraints
The following constraints apply to completing the application server form:

• ASPs assigned to the particular AS should be deleted first before deleting the AS.
• If an AS is assigned to the route set master, you cannot delete the last ASP assigned to the
AS unless you delete the AS assigned to the route set master.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 532

Application server process form

Use this form to define the application server process parameters.

Figure 40. Application server process form

Application server process form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

ASSIGN, CHANGE, DELETE, DISPLA CCS ASP

Entry number __________________

ASP name

New ASP name (CHANGE MMI only)

AS name or ID

Routing processor number

Activate

Destination IP address

Destination port number

Source port number

Restart activation request

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 533

Fields
Use the following list to complete the application server process form:

Name Entry and description

ASP name Enter the application server process name (1-16 alphanumeric
characters).
For CHANGE MMI, enter the application server process name or ID.
New ASP name (CHANGE MMI Enter the new application server process name (1-16 alphanumeric
only) characters).
AS name or ID Enter the application server name (1-16 alphanumeric characters or
AS ID.
Routing processor number Enter the processor IDs of the IPUA processors to which the ASP is
going to be assigned (0-47).
Activate Enter Y to request activation.
Enter N to not request activation.
Destination IP address Enter the ASP IP address in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where xxx
is 0-255.
Destination port number Enter the destination port number (1-65535).
Source port number Enter the source port number (1-65535).
Restart activation request Enter Y to request activation of AS.
Enter N to not request activation of AS.

Constraints
The following constraints apply to completing the application server process form:

• The application server name or ID that is being used should exists in the application server
database.
• The IPUA ID must be in the configured IPUA processor range, but not necessarily equipped.

UIP parameters form

Use this form to define the UIP parameters for an ASP.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 534

Figure 41. UIP parameters form, part 1

UIP parameters form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

CHANGE, COPY, DISPLA CCS UIPPAR

Entry value___________

ASP name or ID

Parameter group (CHANGE MMI Group number (1-5)

only)

ASP ID (COPY MMI only) 1-384

ASP destination ID (COPY MMI only) 1-384

Group number 1: SCTP timing parameters

SCTP T1 initialization 0-65535

SCTP T2 shutdown 0-65535

Bundle timer 0-65535

Idle timer 0-65535

Sack timer 0-65535

Cookie preservative 0-65535

Maximum heartbeat misses 1-100

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 535

Figure 42. UIP parameters form, part 2

Group number 2: SCTP sizing parameters

Minimum bundling 0-65535

Inbound buffer 0-4294967295

Outbound buffer 0-4294967295

Slow start threshold 0-65535

Initial congestion control 0-4294967295

Group number 3: Congestion level parameters

Abatement level Onset level Discard level

0-100 0-100 0-100

TXL1

0-100 0-100 0-100

TXL2

0-100 0-100 0-100

TXL3

0-100 0-100 0-100

RX

Group number 4: Traffic measurement marginal threshold parameters

ASSDOWNTRAN 1-65535

ASSORETRAN 1-65535

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 536

Fields
Use the following list to complete the UIP parameters form:

Field Entry and description

ASP name or ID Enter the ASP name (1-16 characters) or ASP ID (1-384).
Parameter group Enter the parameter group:
1 to select SCTP timing
2 to select SCTP sizing
3 to select congestion level
4 to select traffic measurement marginal threshold
5 to select all the categories
ASP ID (COPY MMI only) Enter the ASP ID (1-384).
ASP destination ID Enter the ASP destination ID (1-384)
SCTP T1 initilization Enter the SCTP timer value to wait for a response during initilization of
an association.
SCTP T2 shutdown Enter the SCTP timer value to wait for a response during shutdown of an
association.
Bundle timer Enter the amount of delay the SCTP allows for bundling of the outgoing
data chunks.
Idle timer Enter the amount of delay the SCTP allows between the round trip time
calculations.
Sack timer Enter the SCTP maximum delay after the arrival of the datagram before
selective acknowledgement.
Cookie preservative Enter the value to increase the cookie life span.
Maximum heartbeat misses Enter the maximum number of consecutive unacknowledged heartbeat
messages allowed by the SCTP.
Minimum bundling Enter the minimum message size for bundling.
Inbound buffer Enter the memory allocated for the SCTP inbound message buffer.
Outbound buffer Enter the memory allocated for the SCTP outbound message buffer.
Slow start threshold Enter the initial value of the SCTP slow start threshold.
Initial congestion control Enter the initial size of the SCTP congestion control window.
TXABATELVL1 Enter the value for the maximum number of L1 buffers to transmit
congestion abatement.
TXONSETLVL1 Enter the value for the maximum number of L1 buffers to transmit
congestion onset.
TXDISCLVL1 Enter the value for the maximum number of L1 buffers to transmit
congestion discard.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 537

Field Entry and description

TXABATELVL2 Enter the value for the maximum number of L2 buffers to transmit
congestion abatement.
TXONSETLVL2 Enter the value for the maximum number of L2 buffers to transmit
congestion onset.
TXDISCLVL2 Enter the value for the maximum number of L2 buffers to transmit
congestion discard.
TXABATELVL3 Enter the value for the maximum number of L3 buffers to transmit
congestion abatement.
TXONSETLVL3 Enter the value for the maximum number of L3 buffers to transmit
congestion onset.
TXDISCLVL3 Enter the value for the maximum number of L3 buffers to transmit
congestion discard.
RXABATE Enter the value for the maximum number of buffers to receive
congestion abatement.
RXONSET Enter the value for the maximum number of buffers to receive
congestion onset.
RXDISC Enter the value for the maximum number of buffers to receive
congestion discard.
ASSDOWNTRAN Enter the value for the SCTP association down duration chunks
threshold.
ASSORETRAN Enter the value for the SCTP association retransmitted chunks
threshold.

Constraints
No constraints apply to completing this form:

UIP system parameters form

Use this form to define the UIP system parameters.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 538

Figure 43. UIP system parameters form

UIP system parameters form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

CHANGE, DISPLA CCS UIPSYS

Entry number __________________

Window size 0-1000000

Memory 0-1000000000

Initial retransmission 0-65535

Minimum retransmission 0-65535

Maximum retransmission 0-65535

Cookie life 0-120000

Fields
Use the following list to complete the UIP system parameters form:

Name Entry and description

Window size Enter the advertised receiver window size in bytes.
Memory Enter the total memory allocated for the SCTP stack in bytes
Initial retransmission Enter the initial retransmission timeout in ms
Minimum retransmission Enter the minimum retransmission timeout in ms
Maximum retransmission Enter the maximum retransmission timeout in ms
Cookie life Enter the cookie life in ms

Constraints
No constraints apply to completing this form:

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 539

UIP timer parameters form

Use this form to define the UIP timer parameters.

Figure 44. UIP timer parameters form

UIP timer parameters form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

CHANGE, DISPLA CCS UIPTMR

Entry number __________________

Timer type 1-4

Group number 1: Pending state recovery timer T(r)

Seconds for T(r) timer 0 or 1

Tenths of seconds for T(r) 0-9

Group number 2: SCON timer T(scon)

Seconds for T(scon) timer 1-3

Tenths of seconds for T(scon) 0-9

Group number 3: Time controlled procedure timer T(tcp))

Seconds for T(tcp) timer 0 or 1

Tenths of seconds for T(tcp) 0-9

Group number 4: active timer T(act))

Seconds for T(act) timer 1-60

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 540

Fields
Use the following list to complete the UIP timers parameters form:

Name Entry and description

Timer type Enter the timer type:
1 - Pending state recovery timer T(r)
2 - SCON timer T(scon)
3 - Time controlled procedure timer T(tcp)
4 - Active timer T (act)
Seconds for T(r) timer Enter the number of seconds for T(r) timer (0 or 1)
Tenths of seconds for T(r) Enter the number of tenths of seconds for T(r) (0-9)
Seconds for T(scon) timer Enter the number of seconds for T(scon) timer (1-3)
Tenths of seconds for T(scon) Enter the number of tenths of seconds for T(scon) (0-9)
Seconds for T(tcp) timer Enter the number of seconds for T(tcp) timer (0 or 1)
Tenths of seconds for T(tcp) Enter the number of tenths of seconds for T(tcp) (0-9)
Seconds for T (act) Enter the number of seconds for T (act) (1- 60)

Constraints
No constraints apply to completing this form:

Route set master form

The route set master form identifies the link sets that make up each route set. A route set
contains as many as six link sets. The route set master form also assigns a priority level to each
link set.

Complete an entry on the route set master form for each route set the 5070 SSG uses.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 541

Figure 45. Route set master form

Route set master form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

ASSIGN, CHANGE, DELETE, DISPLA CCS RSMAST

Route set ID number

Link set category

Link set name or number

Super link set number

AS name or number

Priority level

Fields
Use the following list to complete the route set master form:

Name Entry and description

Route set ID number Enter the route set number (1-600).
Link set category Enter the link set category:
S - Super link set
N - Normal link set
AS - Application server
Link set name or number Enter the link set name (1-8 characters) or link set number.
Super link set number Enter the super link set number.
AS name or number Enter the application server name or number.
Priority level Enter the priority level. The value is always 1.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 542

Constraints
The following constraints apply to completing the route set master form:

• The link set name must be defined on the link set form.
• Two link sets in a route set can have the same priority.
• Two link sets in a route set can be active at one time. Link set priority determines the
order in which the link sets are selected as the active route.
• The AS ID must be an application server that has been created and not used in any route
set master.

Note: Link sets that terminate at the specified node are usually assigned a higher priority
than link sets that terminate at an intermediate node such as the mate 5070 SSG.

DPC route set form

Enter each route to a DPC route set on the DPC route set form.

Figure 46. DPC route set form

DPC route set form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

ASSIGN, CHANGE, DELETE, DISPLA CCS DPCRS

Entry number __________________

Node name

Logical network

Point code

Route set master number

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 543

Fields
Use the following list to complete the DPC route set form:

Name Entry and description

Node name Enter the name that identifies the distant node.
Logical network Enter logical network name or number
Point code Enter point code
Route set master Enter the number that identifies the group of link sets making up the route
number set to the specified node.

Constraints
The following constraints apply to completing the DPC route set form:

• The route set master number must be defined in the database.

• The route set master number must be assigned at least one link set.

Note: The same route set master number can be assigned to more than one node.

Subsystem name form

Complete an entry in the subsystem name form for each subsystem in the network used by
SCCP routing or GTT functions.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 544

Figure 47. Subsystem name form

Subsystem name form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

ASSIGN, CHANGE, DELETE, DISPLA SCCP SUBSYS

Entry number ____________________

Subsystem name

Node name

Logical network

Point code

Subsystem number

Reroute

Fields
Use the following list to complete the subsystem name form:

Field Entry and description

Entry number Enter a sequential number based on the previous entry number.
Subsystem name Enter the name of the subsystem.
Node name Enter the name of the node where the subsystem resides.
Logical network Enter the logical network name or number
Point code Enter point code
Subsystem number Enter the subsystem number, or identify the subsystem by point code and
SSN.
Reroute Enter R to reroute SCCP congestion messages to an alternate route.
Enter D to disable SCCP congestion messages to an alternate route.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 545

Constraints
The following constraints apply to completing the subsystem name form:

• The node name must be defined on the ordered route form or the link set form.
• When SSNs are duplicated in different nodes, the subsystem name must be unique for
each.
• The subsystem name represents both the node where the subsystem resides and the SSN.

TT form
Use this form to define each translation type in the TT form.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 546

Figure 48. TT form

TT form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

Node name:

ASSIGN, CHANGE, DELETE, DISPLA SCCP TRANSL

Entry number

GTF

Translation type

Class service

IPR disable

Loop detection

Shared TT type

Fields
Use the following list to complete the TT form:

Field Entry and description

GTF Enter a number (1-4) to select the TT.
Translation type Enter the translation type (0-255).
Class service Enter Y to enable GTT class service feature.
Enter N to disable GTT class service feature.
IPR disable Enter Y to enable GTT failure IPRs.
Enter N to disable GTT failure IPRs.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 547

Field Entry and description

Loop detection Enter the loop detection type:
• None
• Point code
• Route
• Network ID
Shared TT type Enter a number to select the shared translation type (0-255).

Constraints
The following constraints apply to completing the TT form:

• Assign one translation mechanism per TT. Each mechanism can be assigned to multiple
TTs. Any translation mechanism can be assigned to any TT. Each TT must be assigned a
translation mechanism.
• Ensure the originating and shared TT mechanisms, if applicable, are the same.
• The GTA value or range on the GTT entry form must be in the format defined by the
assigned translation mechanism on the TT form.

GTM definition
Use the GTM definition form to assign per-GTTGTM criteria and the associated GTM
parameters.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 548

Figure 49. GTM definition form

GTM definition form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

ASSING, CHANGE, DELETEL, DISPLAY PREGTM

Global title format

Translation type

Numbering plan

NADDR

GTTTWEA

GTM number

New translation type

New numbering plan

NNADDR

GTA digit modification

DIGRS*LOC

NUMDR

DIGI*LOC

DIGDS*LOC

NUMDD

New GT address

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 549

Fields
Use the following list to complete the regular GTM form:

Field Entry and description

GTF Enter a number (1-4) to select the global title indicators.
1 - Translation type and numbering plan
2 - Translation type
Translation type Enter a translation type number (0-255).
Numbering plan Enter a number (0-14) to select the numbering plans.
NADDR Enter nature of address
GTTWEA Enter a global title address digits (1-28 digits).
GTM number Enter a GTM parameter table index entry number (1-999)
New translation type Enter a new translation type value (0-255) or No modification
New numbering plan Enter a new number (0-14) to select the numbering plans
NNADDR Enter a new nature of address value (0-126) or No modification
GTA digit modification Enter a GTA digit modification type. A single value.
No modification
Replace
Insert
Delete
Append
Digit replacement start Enter digit replacement start location (1-28)
location
Number of digits to replace‘ Enter a number of digits to be replaced in the message (1-28)
Digit insert start location Enter digit insert start location (1-28)
Digit delete start location Enter digit delete start location (1-28)
Number of digits to delete Enter a number of digits to be deleted (1-28)
New digits Enter new digits

GTT destination form

Use the GTT destination form to assign one or more GTT destinations to a destination group.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 550

Figure 50. GTT destination form

GTT destination form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

Node name:

ASSIGN, CHANGE, DELETE, DISPLA SCCP GTTDEST

GTT group name

Backup type

Final translation (Y or N)

Weight factor (0-100)

Subsystem name

or

Node name and SSN

or

Logical network
Point code
Subsystem number

Fields
Use the following list to complete the GTT destination form. The form gives three options for
identifying a GTT destination: subsystem name, node name and SSN, and DPC and SSN. Only
one of these options requires data.

Field Entry and description

GTT group name Enter a GTT destination group name.
Backup type Select one of the following types:
• Solitary

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 551

Field Entry and description

• Dominant replicate
• Load-shared replicate
• Weighted load-shared
• Shared replicate
Final translation Enter Y if the 5070 SSG performs a final translation for the message routing.
Enter N if further translation is required for message routing.
Weight Enter a weighting factor:
For weighted load-shared mode, enter a value from 1 to 100.
For shared-replicate mode, enter a value from 1 to 100 for primary
destinations; enter 0 for backup destinations.
Subsystem name Enter the name of the software subsystem that receives the message at the
destination (see the Subsystem name form).
Node name Enter the node name for the subsystem.
Logical network Enter the logical network name (1-16 characters) or logical network number
0-31.
Point code Enter the point code ([1-255]-[0-255]-[0-255])
Subsystem number Enter the subsystem number for a final translation.
Enter 0 for a nonfinal translation.

Constraints
The following constraints apply to adding a GTT destination entry:

• A GTT destination group name must be unique.

• A GTT destination group entry must be unique. The system uses all defined fields in the
entry to determine whether the entry is unique.
• Entries with the same PC/SSN entries that are assigned different weights are considered to
be different entries.
• GTT destinations are identified by one of the following: subsystem name, SSN and node
name, or SSN and PC.
• If the TT is a nonfinal translation, the GTT destination is defined by the node name or
point code.
• If the TT is a final translation, the GTT destination is defined by the node name or point
code and subsystem number. The subsystem name can also be used to define a final GTT
destination.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 552

• If the backup type is load-shared, at least two but no more than eight GTT destinations
must be defined.
• If the backup type is dominant replicate, the following constraints apply:
– At least two but no more than eight GTT destinations must be defined.
– The system organizes the destination data in order of highest to lowest preference.
The destination with the lowest cost route is the primary destination.
• If the backup type is weighted load-shared, the following constraints apply:
– At least two GTT destinations must be defined.
– Each destination requires a weight factor.
– The weight factors are not required to total 100.
• If the backup type is shared replicate, the following constraints apply:
– At least three GTT destinations must be defined (two primaries and one backup).
– Each primary destination requires a weight factor
– Each backup destination requires a weight factor of 0.
– The weight factors are not required to total 100.
• Full point code routing for final translations must be used as defined on the ordered route
form.
• The local node cannot be specified as a nonfinal translation destination.
• Check the GTT destination data against entries on other forms, as follows:
– The destination nodes must be defined in the database.
– For final translations, the destination subsystems must be in the database. Refer to
the Subsystem name form.

Regular GTT form

Use the regular GTT form to define GTT destination groups.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 553

Figure 51. Regular GTT form

Regular GTT form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

ASSIGN, CHANGE, DELETE, DISPLA GLOBAL TRANSL

Global title format

Translation type

Numbering plan

NADDR
GTTTWEA
Group name

Group number
GTM required

GTM number

New translation type

New numbering plan

NNADDR

GTA digit modification

DIGRS*LOC
NUMDR
DIGI*LOC

DIGDS*LOC
NUMDD

New GT address

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 554

Fields
Use the following list to complete the regular GTT form:

Field Entry and description

GTF Enter a number (1-4) to select the global title indicators.
1 - Translation type and numbering plan
2 - Translation type
Translation type Enter a translation type number (0-255).
Numbering plan Enter a number (0-14) to select the numbering plans.
NADDR Enter nature of address
GTTWEA Enter a global title address digits (1-28 digits).
Group name Enter a GTT destination group name.
Group number Enter a GTT destination group number of an active group name
(1-1125).
GTM required Enter Y if the global title modification is required.
Enter N if global title modification is not required.
GTM number Enter a GTM parameter table index entry number (1-999)
New translation type Enter a new translation type value (0-255) or No modification
New numbering plan Enter a new number (0-14) to select the numbering plans
NNADDR Enter a new nature of address value (0-126) or No modification
GTA digit modification Enter a GTA digit modification type. A single value.
No modification
Replace
Insert
Delete
Append
Digit replacement start Enter digit replacement start location (1-28)
location
Number of digits to replace‘ Enter a number of digits to be replaced in the message (1-28)
Digit insert start location Enter digit insert start location (1-28)
Digit delete start location Enter digit delete start location (1-28)
Number of digits to delete Enter a number of digits to be deleted (1-28)
New digits Enter new digits

Constraints
The following constraints apply to completing the regular GTT form:

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 555

• Check the global title translation data against entries on other forms:
– The TT cannot be defined as shared on the TT form.
– The translation mechanism defined on the TT form defines the GTA format required.
– The available GTT destination groups are defined on the GTT destination form.

SCCP MAP form

The SCCP MAP form defines subsystems that are mated. Complete an entry on the MAP form
for each pair of mated applications. Each MAP form contains two entries. The subsystems can
be entered by name, node name and SSN, or DPC and SSN.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 556

Figure 52. SCCP MAP form

SCCP MAP form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

ASSIGN, CHANGE, DELETE, DISPLA SCCP MAP

Entry number

Subsystem name

Node name

Logical network

Point code

Subsystem number

Mated subsystem number

Mated node name

Mated logical network

Mated point code

Mated subsystem number

Fields
Use the following list to complete the SCCP MAP form:

Field Entry and Description

Subsystem name Enter a subsystem name for the first application.
Node name To identify the application by node name and subsystem number, enter
the node name for the first application.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 557

Field Entry and Description

Logical network Enter the logical network name or number.
Point code Enter the point code
Subsystem number To identify the application by DPC, enter the subsystem number for the
first application.
Mated subsystem name Enter a subsystem name for the second (mate) application.
Mated node name To identify the application by node name and subsystem number, enter
the node name of the second (mate) application.
Mated logical network Enter the logical network name (1-16 char) or logical network number
0-31.
Mated point code Enter the point code ([0-7]-[0-255]-[0-7]).
Mated subsystem number To identify the application by node name and subsystem number, enter
the subsystem number for the second (mate) application.

Constraints
The following constraints apply to completing the MAP form:

• Subsystem names must be defined on the subsystem name form.

• The node name must be defined on the ordered route form or the link set form.
• At least one of the subsystems must be at a local or adjacent node.

CSP group form

CSPs are assigned to groups on the CSP group form.

Use the CSP group form to assign the CSP groups to subsystems.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 558

Figure 53. CSP group form

CSP group form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

ASSIGN, CHANGE, DELETE, DISPLA SCCP CSPGRP

Entry number

Group name

Node name

Logical network

Point code

Fields
Use the following list to complete the CSP group form:

Field Entry and description

Group name Enter a name that identifies a group of CSPs.
Node name To identify the CSP by node name, enter the node name.
Logical network Enter the logical network name or number.
Point code Enter the point code.

Constraints
The following constraint applies to completing the CSP group form:

• The node name and DPCs must be listed on either the ordered route form or the link set
form.

CSP assignment form

A CSP can be identified by name, by node name and SSN, or by DPC and SSN.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 559

Use the CSP assignment form to assign CSPs to subsystems.

Figure 54. CSP assignment form

CSP assignment form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

ASSIGN, CHANGE, DELETE, DISPLA SCCP CSP

Entry number

Subsystem name

Node name

Logical network

Point code

Subsystem number

Group name

Fields
Use the following list to complete the CSP assignment form:

Field Entry and description

Subsystem name To identify the CSP by subsystem name, enter the name.
Node name To identify the CSP by node name and subsystem number, enter the
node name.
Logical network Enter the logical network name or number.
Point code Enter the point code.
Subsystem number To identify the CSP by node name and subsystem number, enter the
subsystem number.
Group name Enter the CSP group name.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 560

Constraints
The following constraints apply to completing the CSP assignment form:

• The group name must already be defined in the CSP assignment form.
• Many point codes can be assigned to the same CSP group, but only one CSP group can be
assigned to a subsystem.
• Subsystem names must already be defined on the subsystem name form.
• The node name must be defined on either the ordered route form or the link set form.

Gateway screening GTWYLS form

Use the gateway screening GTWYLS form to assign link sets.

Figure 55. Gateway screening GTWYLS form

Gateway screening GTWYLS form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

ASSIGN, CHANGE, DELETE, DISPLA GWSCR GTWYLS

Link set name

Link set group identifier

Next screening function identifier

Next screening reference

Rejected MSU IPR enabled

Screen

Remark

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 561

Fields
Use the following list to complete the gateway screening GTWYLS form:

Field Entry and description

Link set name Enter a unique link set name.
Link set group identifier Enter the link set group identifier (01-99).
Next screening function Enter any of the following values:
identifier • OPC (allowed originating point code)
• DPC (allowed destination point code)
• BLKOPC (blocked originating point code)
• BLKDPC (blocked destination point code)
• SIO (allowed service information octet)
• STOP (termination of gateway screening process)
Next screening reference Enter the next screening reference value (1-4 alphanumeric).
Rejected MSU IPR enabled Enter the rejected MSR IPR enabled value (Y or N).
Screen Enter the screening enabled value (Y or N).
Remark Enter any remarks (1-8 alphanumeric).

Gateway screening OPC form

Use the gateway screening OPC form to screen the originating point code.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 562

Figure 56. Gateway screening OPC form

Gateway screening OPC form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

ASSIGN, CHANGE, DELETE, DISPLA GWSCR OPC

Screening function

Screening reference

NOMatch

Logical network

Point code start range

Point code end range

Next screening function ID (allowed)

Next screening function ID (blocked)

Next screening reference 1

Next screening function ID

Next screening reference 2

Remark

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 563

Fields
Use the following list to complete the gateway screening OPC form:

Field Entry and description

Screening function Enter the screening function
A (allowed)
B (Blocked)
Screening reference Enter the blocked OPC screening reference (1-4 alphanumeric characters).
NOMatch Enter Y for no matching record.
Enter N for blocked record.
Logical network Enter the logical network name or number.
Point code start Enter the point code start range or enter ALL for all point codes.
range
Point code end range Enter the point code end range ([1-255]-[0-255]-[0-255]).
Next screening Enter any of the following values when screening function is A (allowed):
function ID (allowed) STOP (terminate gateway screening process)
BLKOPC (blocked origination point code)
DPC (allowed destination point code)
BLKDPC (blocked destination point code)
SIO (allowed service information octet)
AFTDEST (allowed affected destination field)
CGPA (allowed calling party address)
CGGTA (allowed calling party global title address)
Next screening Enter any of the following values when screening function is B (blocked):
function ID (blocked) STOP (terminate gateway screening process)
DPC (allowed destination point code)
BLKDPC (blocked destination point code)
AFTDEST (allowed affected destination field)
CGPA (allowed calling party address)
CGGTA (allowed calling party global title address)
SIO (allowed service information octet)
FAIL (failure of gateway screening process)
Next screening Enter the next screening reference value (1-4 alphanumeric characters).
reference 1
Next screening Enter any of the following values:
function ID STOP (termination of gateway screening process)
CGPA (allowed calling party address)
CGGTA (allowed calling party global title address)
FAIL (failure of gateway screening process)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 564

Field Entry and description

Next screening Enter the next screening reference value (1-4 alphanumeric characters).
reference 2
Remark Enter any remarks (1-8 alphanumeric characters).

Gateway screening GWSCR SIO form

Use the gateway screening SIO form to screen the service information octet.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 565

Figure 57. Gateway screening GWSCR SIO form

Gateway screening GWSCR SIO form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

ASSIGN, CHANGE, DELETE, DISPLA GWSCR SIO

Screening reference

Priority

Service indicator

Heading code 0

Heading code1

Next screening function ID

Next screening reference 1

Next screening function ID 2

Next screening reference 2

Remark

Fields
Use the following list to complete the regular GWSCR SIO form:

Field Entry and description

Screening reference Enter the SIO screening reference (1-4 alphanumeric).
Priority Enter the priority value (0-3).

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 566

Field Entry and description

Service indicator Enter the service indicator (00-15).
Heading code 0 Enter the heading code 0 (00-15).
Heading code1 Enter the heading code 1 (00-15).
Next screen function Enter any one of the following:
ID DPC (destination point code)
BLKDPC (blocked destination point code)
CGGTA (calling party global title address)
CGPA (calling party address)
CDGTA (called party global title address)
CDPA (called party address)
AFTDEST (affected destination field)
STOP (terminate the gateway screening process)
Next screen Enter the next screen reference (1-4 alphanumeric).
reference 1
Next screen function Enter any one of the following:
ID 2 CGGTA (calling party global title address)
CGPA (calling party address)
CDGTA (called party global title address)
CDPA (called party address)
STOP (terminate the gateway screening process)
FAIL (block the gateway screening process)
Next screen Enter the next screen reference (1-4 alphanumeric).
reference 2
Remark Enter any remarks (1-8 alphanumeric).

Gateway screening GWSCR DPC form

Use the gateway screening DPC form to screen the destination point code.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 567

Figure 58. Gateway screening GWSCR DPC form

Gateway screening GWSCR DPC form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

ASSIGN, CHANGE, DELETE, DISPLA GWSCR DPC

Screening function

Screening reference

NOMatch

Logical network

Point code start range

Point code end range

Next screening function ID (allowed)

Next screening function ID (blocked)

Next screening reference 1

Next screening function ID

Next screening reference 2

Remark

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 568

Fields
Use the following list to complete the regular GWSCR DPC form:

Field Entry and description

Screening function Enter the DPC screening function
A (allowed)
B (blocked)
Screening reference Enter the DPC screening reference (1-4 alphanumeric).
NOMatch Enter Y for no matching record.
Enter N for blocked record.
Logical network Enter the logical network name or number.
Point code start Enter the point code start range or enter ALL for all point codes.
range
Point code end range Enter the point code end range ([1-255]-[0-255]-[0-255]).
Next screen function Enter any one of the following:
ID (allowed) BLKDPC (blocked destination point code)
CGGTA (calling party global title address)
CGPA (calling party address)
AFTDEST (affected destination field)
STOP (gateway screening process to terminate)
Next screen function Enter any one of the following:
ID (blocked) CGGTA (calling party global title address)
CGPA (calling party address)
AFTDES (affected destination field)
FAIL (gateway screening process to fail)
STOP (gateway screening process to terminate)
Next screening Enter the next screening reference value (1-4 alphanumeric characters).
reference 1
Next screening Enter any of the following values:
function ID STOP (termination of gateway screening process)
CGPA (allowed calling party address)
CGGTA (allowed calling party global title address)
FAIL (failure of gateway screening process)
Next screening Enter the next screening reference value (1-4 alphanumeric characters).
reference 2
Remark Enter any remarks (1-8 alphanumeric characters).

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 569

Gateway screening AFTDES form

Use the gateway screening AFTDEST form to screen the affected destination.

Figure 59. Gateway screening AFTDES form

Gateway screening AFTDES form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

ASSIGN, CHANGE, DELETE, DISPLA GWSCR AFTDES

Screening reference

Logical network

Point code start range

Point code end range

Remark

Fields
Use the following list to complete the gateway screening AFTDES form:

Field Entry and description

Screening reference Enter the screening reference (1-4) alphanumeric characters.
Logical network Enter the logical network name or number.
Point code start range Enter the point code start range ([1-255]-[0-255]-[0-255]) or enter
ALL for all point codes.
Point code end range Enter the point code end range ([1-255]-[0-255]-[0-255]).
Remarks Enter any remarks (1-8 alphanumeric).

Gateway screening CGGTA form

Use the gateway screening CGGTA form to screen the calling party GTA.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 570

Figure 60. Gateway screening CGGTA form

Gateway screening CGGTA form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

ASSIGN, CHANGE, DELETE, DISPLA GWSCR CGGTA

Screening reference

Subsystem number

GTF

Translation type

Numbering plan

Digit type

NADDR

Hexadecimal GTA

Next screening function ID 1

Next screening reference 1

Next screening function ID 2

Next screening reference 2

Remark

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 571

Fields
Use the following list to complete the gateway screening CGGTA form:

Field Entry and description

Screening reference Enter the screening reference (1-4) alphanumeric characters.
Subsystem number Enter the subsystem number (0-255).
GTF Enter the global title format (1-4).
Translation type Enter the translation type (0-255).
Numbering plan Enter the numbering plan (0-7)
1 (ISDN/telephone)
3 (data)
4 (telex)
5 (maritime mobile)
6 (land mobile)
7 (ISDN/mobile)
ALL
Digit type Enter the digit type (0-15).
NADDR Enter the nature of address (single, range, or ALL)
Hexadecimal GTA Enter the hexadecimal GTA (1-28).
Next screen function ID 1 Enter any one of the following:
CDGTA (called party global title address)
CDPA (called party address)
STOP (gateway screening process to terminate)
Next screening reference 1 Enter the next screening reference value (1-4 alphanumeric
characters).
Next screening function ID 2 Enter any of the following values:
CDPA (allowed called party address)
CDGTA (allowed called party global title address)
STOP (termination of gateway screening process)
FAIL (failure of gateway screening process)
Next screening reference 2 Enter the next screening reference value (1-4 alphanumeric
characters).
Remarks Enter any remarks (1-8 alphanumeric).

Gateway screening CGPA form

Use the gateway screening CGPA form to screen the calling party address.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 572

Figure 61. Gateway screening CGPA form

Gateway screening CGPA form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

ASSIGN, CHANGE, DELETE, DISPLA GWSCR CGPA

Screening reference

Logical network

Point code start range

Point code end range

Subsystem number

Link set group identifier

Routing indicator

Next screening function

Next screening reference

Remark

Fields
Use the following list to complete the gateway screening CGPA form:

Field Entry and description

Screening reference Enter the screening reference (1-4) alphanumeric characters.
Logical network Enter the logical network name or number.
Point code start range Enter the point code start range ([1-255]-[0-255]-[0-255]) or enter
ALL for all point codes.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 573

Field Entry and description

Point code end range Enter the point code end range ([1-255]-[0-255]-[0-255]).
Subsystem number Enter the subsystem number (0-255).
Link set group identifier Enter the link set group identifier (1-99) or ALL
Routing indicator Enter the routing indicator of called party:
0 - indicates route on global title address in CDPA
1 - indicates route on PC in the routing label and SSN in the CDPA
ALL - indicates both 0 and 1
Next screening function Enter the next screening function identifier:
CDPA (Called party address)
CDGTA (Called party global title address)
STOP (Gateway screening process terminates)
Next screening reference Enter the next screening reference value (1-4 alphanumeric
characters).
Remarks Enter any remarks (1-8 alphanumeric).

Gateway screening CDGTA form

Use the gateway screening CDGTA form to screen the called party GTA.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 574

Figure 62. Gateway screening CDGTA form

Gateway screening CDGTA form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

ASSIGN, CHANGE, DELETE, DISPLA GWSCR CDGTA

Screening reference

Subsystem number

GTF

Translation type

Numbering plan

Digit type

NADDR

Hexadecimal GTA

Next screening function ID

Next screening reference

Remark

Fields
Use the following list to complete the gateway screening CDGTA form:

Field Entry and description

Screening reference Enter the screening reference (1-4) alphanumeric characters.
Subsystem number Enter the subsystem number (0-255).

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 575

Field Entry and description

GTF Enter the global title format (1-4).
Translation type Enter the translation type (0-255).
Numbering plan Enter the numbering plan (0-7)
1 (ISDN/telephone)
3 (Data)
4 (Telex)
5 (Maritime mobile)
6 (Land mobile)
7 (ISDN/mobile)
ALL
Digit type Enter the digit type (0-15).
NADDR Enter nature of address (single, range, or ALL)
Hexadecimal GTA Enter the hexadecimal GTA (1-28).
Next screening function Enter the next screening function identifier
CDPA (called party address)
STOP (gateway screening process terminates)
Next screening reference Enter the next screening reference value (1-4 alphanumeric
characters).
Remarks Enter any remarks (1-8 alphanumeric).

Gateway screening CDPA form

Use the gateway screening CDPA form to screen the called party address.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 576

Figure 63. Gateway screening CDPA form

Gateway screening CDPA form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

ASSIGN, CHANGE, DELETE, DISPLA GWSCR CDPA

Screening reference

Logical network

Point code start range

Point code end range

Subsystem number

SCMG format identifier

Next screening function

Next screening reference

Remark

Fields
Use the following list to complete the gateway screening CDPA form:

Field Entry and description

Screening reference Enter the screening reference (1-4) alphanumeric characters.
Logical network Enter a logical network name or number.
Point code start range Enter the point code start range ([1-255]-[0-255]-[0-255]) or enter ALL
for all point codes.
Point code end range Enter the point code end range ([1-255]-[0-255]-[0-255]).
Subsystem number Enter the subsystem number (0-255).
SCMG format identifier Enter the SCMG format identifier.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 577

Field Entry and description

Next screening function Enter the next screening function identifier:
APCSSN (point code subsystem number)
STOP (gateway screening process terminates)
Next screening reference Enter the next screening reference value (1-4 alphanumeric
characters).
Remarks Enter any remarks (1-8 alphanumeric).

Gateway screening APCSSN form

Use the gateway screening APCSSN form to screen the affected PC/SSN.

Figure 64. Gateway screening APCSSN form

Gateway screening APCSSN form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

ASSIGN, CHANGE, DELETE, DISPLA GWSCR APCSSN

Screening reference

Logical network

Point code start range

Point code end range

Subsystem number

Remark

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 578

Fields
Use the following list to complete the gateway screening APCSSN form:

Field Entry and description

Screening reference Enter the screening reference (1-4) alphanumeric characters
Logical network Enter a logical network name or number.
Point code start range Enter the point code start range ([1-255]-[0-255]-[0-255]) or enter ALL
for all point codes.
Point code end range Enter the point code end range ([1-255]-[0-255]-[0-255]).
Subsystem number Enter the subsystem number (0-255).
Remarks Enter any remarks (1-8 alphanumeric).

Gateway screening threshold form

Use the gateway screening threshold form to set the thresholds used by the gateway STP to
determine when to generate reports of excessive activity or message rejection.

Figure 65. Gateway screening threshold form

Gateway screening threshold form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

ASSIGN, DISPLA GWSCR THRESH

Link set name

Activity rejections

Minutes 1

Messages

Minutes 2

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 579

Fields
Use the following list to complete the gateway screening threshold form:

Field Entry and description

Link set name Enter the link set name (1-8) alphanumeric characters
Activity rejection Enter the maximum number of activity rejections per unit time.
Minutes 1 Enter the interval over which message and rejection thresholds apply.
Messages Enter the maximum number of messages per unit time.
Minutes 2 Enter the interval over which message thresholds apply.

Gateway screening throttle form

Use the gateway screening throttle form to set an upper limit on the number of reports of
gateway message rejection and/or reports of gateway screening table error messages per
interval of time.

Figure 66. Gateway screening throttle form

Gateway screening throttle form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

ASSIGN, DISPLA GWSCR THROTT

Rejections

Rejection minutes

Errors

Messages

Error minutes

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 580

Fields
Use the following list to complete the gateway screening throttle form:

Field Entry and description

Rejections Enter the maximum number of rejections to be reported per unit
time.
Rejection minutes Enter the interval over which rejection limit applies.
Errors Enter the maximum number of table errors to be reported.
Messages Enter the maximum number of messages per unit time.
Error minutes Enter the interval over which table error limit applies.

CCS timers form

The CCS timers form defines the MTP and SCCP timers for the system.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 581

Figure 67. CCS timers form

CCS timers form

Company name: Page: of

Location: Date:

CHANGE, DISPLA CCS TIMERS

Level 3 MTP timers

T1 (0.5-1.2) s T17 (0.8-1.5) s

T2 (0.7-2.0) s T22 (3.0-6.0) min

T3 (0.5-1.2) s T23 (3.0-6.0) min

T4 (0.5-1.2) s T33 (1.0-10.0) s

T5 (0.5-1.2) s T34 (2.0-120.0) s

T6 (0.5-1.2) s T90 (5.0-20.0) s

T8 (0.8-1.2) s T92 (3.0-15.0) s

T10 (30.0-60.0) s T94 (2.0-60.0) s

T11 (30.0-90.0) s T95 (30.0-360.0) min

T12 (0.8-1.5) s T96 (30.0-120.0) s

T13 (0.8-1.5) s T97 (20.0-720.0) min

T14 (2.0-3.0) s T98 (30.0-90.0) s

T15 (2.0-3.0) s T99 (4.0-12.0) s

T16 (1.4-2.0) s

SCCP timers

T5 (1.0-60.0) s T6 (1.0-60.0) s

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Database engineering forms
Page 582

Fields
Use the following list to complete the CCS timers form:

Field Entry and description

MTP timers Enter a value in the specified range. The timer values are in seconds, tenths
of seconds, and minutes.
SCCP timers Enter a value in the specified range. The timer values are in seconds and
tenths of seconds.

Constraints
No constraints apply to completing the CCS timers form.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. SCCP and MTP timers
Page 583

Appendix. SCCP and MTP timers

This topic lists the MTP timers and SCCP timers that can be configured for a specific network
configuration or for testing purposes.

You can perform the following timer value procedures:

• Change timer values

• Display timer values

Note: After completing the procedures in this section, update your office records to reflect the
changes.

MTP timers
The MTP level 3 software uses a series of timers for functions such as link alignment,
changeover, changeback, and other procedures involving state changes. Do not confuse MTP
level 3 timers with SCCP timers.

Table P lists the timers, ranges, and definitions for MTP level 3 timers.
Table P. MTP timers
Timer Range Definition

T1 0.5-1.2 s Delay to avoid message missequencing on changeover

T2 0.7-2.0 s Waiting for changeover acknowledgment

T3 0.5-1.2 s Delay to avoid message missequencing on changeback

T4 0.5-1.2 s Waiting for changeback acknowledgment (first attempt)

T5 0.5-1.2 s Waiting for changeback acknowledgment (second attempt)

T6 0.5-1.2 s Delay to avoid message missequencing on controlled rerouting

T8 0.8-1.2 s Transfer-prohibited inhibited

T10 30.0-60.0 s Waiting to repeat signaling route set test message

T11 30.0-90.0 s Transfer restricted timer

T12 0.8-1.5 s Waiting for uninhibit acknowledgment

T13 0.8-1.5 s Waiting for forced uninhibit

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. SCCP and MTP timers
Page 584

Table P. MTP timers, contd

Timer Range Definition

T14 2.0-3.0 s Waiting for inhibition acknowledgment

T15 2.0-3.0 s Waiting for repeat signal routing set congestion test

T16 1.4-2.0 s Waiting for route set congestion status update

T17 0.8-1.5 s Delay to avoid oscillation of initial alignment failure and link restart

T22 3.0-6.0 min Waiting to repeat local inhibit test

T23 3.0-6.0 min Waiting to repeat remote inhibit test

T33 1.0-10.0 min Link probation timer

T34 2.0-120.0 s Link suspension timer

T90 5.0-20.0 s Repeat TFR once by response method timer

T92 3.0-15.0 s Stop TFP/TCP broadcast during large failure

T94 2.0-60.0 s Priority level timer

T95 30.0-360.0 min Extended link failure timer

T96 30.0-120.0 s Waiting to repeat signaling route set test message on lower priority route

T97 20.0-720.0 min Unused dynamic status record time limit

T98 30.0-90.0 s Periodic signaling link test timer

T99 4.0-12.0 s Signaling link test acknowledgment timer

SCCP timers
The SCCP subsystem uses timers to manage the status and initialization of network
subsystems. Table Q lists the timers, their ranges, and the definition for each SCCP timer.
Table Q. SCCP timers ranges and defaults
Timer Range (seconds) Definition

T5 1.0-60.0 Subsystem status test timer

T6 1.0-60.0 Coordinated state change timer

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. SCCP and MTP timers
Page 585

Change timer values

Use this procedure to change the timer values in the databases for the MTP level 3 timers and
the SCCP timers.

The system does not allow conflicting information to be entered into the database without
requesting confirmation.

Constraints
• The MTP T96 timer value must be greater than or equal to the T10 timer value if both
timers are enabled.
• The MTP T11 timer value must be at least 5 seconds greater than the T34 timer value if
both timers are enabled.

Data tables

When CCS timers are changed, the following data tables are updated:

• CCS timer table (Y31)

• SCCP timer parameters table (Y86)

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not enter database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE CCS TIMERS

2 Prompt: SYSTEM*TMR=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
S (system timer); go to Step 9.
L (logical network); continue.

3 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number
Enter the logical network name of 1-16 characters or a number between the range of
0-31.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. SCCP and MTP timers
Page 586

4 Prompt: TMR*TYP=
Enter: [MTP or SCCP]
MTP (message transfer part timers)
SCCP (signaling connection control part timers)
If you entered the logical network name or number of ITU protocol in Step 3 and MTP or
SCCP in Step 4, go to Step 5.
If you entered the logical network name or number of ANSI protocol in Step 3 and MTP
in Step 4, go to Step 6.
If you entered the logical network name or number of ANSI protocol in Step 3 and SCCP
in Step 4, go to Step 7.

5 Prompt: ITU*TMR=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
An MTP or SCCP timer number for ITU
MENU (description of MTP or SCCP timers)

Note: If the timer is measured in minutes, go to Step 8. If the timer is measured in

seconds, go to Step 9.

6 Prompt: MTPC*TMR=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
An MTP timer number
MENU (description of MTP timers)

Note: If the timer is measured in minutes, go to Step 8. If the timer is measured in

seconds, go to Step 9.

7 Prompt: SCPC*TMR=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
An SCCP timer number
MENU (description of SCCP timers)

Note: The next prompt depends on the number of the timer. If the timer is measured in
minutes, go to Step 8. If the timer is measured in seconds, go to Step 9.

8 Prompt: MIN*UTES=
Enter: number of whole minutes

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. SCCP and MTP timers
Page 587

9 Prompt: SEC*ONDS=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
An SCCP timer value in whole seconds; go to Step 11.
An MTP timer value in whole seconds; go to Step 10.
<RETURN>; go to Step 11.
If the value is complete, the new system shows the new timer value.

10 Prompt: TEN*THS=
Enter: [0-9]
The new system shows the new timer value.

11 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>, CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute the changes and exit to the system prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display timer values

Use this procedure to show one or more CCS timer values. The values assigned to CCS timers
can be displayed on a terminal or printed. There are no requirements for the order of input.
This is not a data entry procedure; therefore, no network dependencies or system constraints
apply.

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLA CCS TIMERS

2 Prompt: LOG*NET=
Enter: logical network name or number or ALL

3 Prompt: TMR*TYP=
Enter: [MTP or SCCP]
MTP (message transfer part timers); go to Step 5.
SCCP (signaling connection control part timers); go to Step 6.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. SCCP and MTP timers
Page 588

If you entered the logical network name or number of ITU protocol in Step 2 and MTP or
SCCP in Step 3, go to Step 4.
If you entered the logical network name or number of ANSI protocol in Step 2 and MTP
in Step 3, go to Step 5.
If you entered the logical network name or number of ANSI protocol in Step 2 and SCCP
in Step 3, go to Step 6.

4 Prompt: ITU*TMR=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
An MTP or SCCP timer number for ITU
MENU (description of MTP or SCCP timers)
The system shows the value for the timer, go to Step 7.

5 Prompt: MTPD*TMR=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
An MTP timer number
MENU (description of MTP timers)
The system shows the value for the timer, go to Step 7.

6 Prompt: SCPD*TMR=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
An SCCP timer number
MENU (description of MTP timers)
The system shows the value for the timer.

7 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 3; otherwise, continue.

8 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Transport audit tasks
Page 589

Appendix. Transport audit tasks

The following topics provide information about the transport audit tasks:

• Audit fundamentals
• CCS audit status

Audit fundamentals
The SS7 transport audit ensures that interprocessor communications are operational and
avoids message loss in the network when interprocessor faults are detected. The SS7 transport
audit consists of four internal audits that serve as a backup to the operating system,
maintenance, and SS7 protocol mechanisms to detect and isolate faults. The audits isolate the
switch when multiple duplex failures occur by sending an SIPO signal on the links to the
adjacent nodes. This signal informs the nodes not to send traffic to the 5070 SSG although an
IPR is issued. Even if the audit parameters are set to eliminate SIPO signals, the system still
issues IPRs.

Internal audit functions

The CCM audit locates all isolated clusters, links, and routing processors that have not been
reported to the CCM processor. This audit initiates the CCM function to perform FISO and
recovery.

The routing processor to routing processor audit detects and isolates links that cannot be used
because of cluster isolation and multiple device failures. This audit initiates local cluster FISO
when communication to the CCM processors is not available.

The link processor to routing processor audit detects communication failures between link
processors and their routing processors. This audit performs FISO within the detecting link
processor.

The routing processor to link processor audit verifies that each link processor is addressable
from each active routing processors for outgoing SS7 traffic. This audit initiates local cluster
FISO if communication to the CCM processors is not available.

The system audits continuously to verify intracluster and intercluster processor

communications.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Transport audit tasks
Page 590

Audit timers
Timers associated with each audit are as follows.

Audit Timer
CCM 1 - CCM to routing processor
2 - CCM to NIC/link processor
Routing processor to 1 - Routing processor to routing processor
routing processor 2 - Routing processor to CCM
Routing processor to link 1 - Routing processor to link processor
processor 2 - Routing processor to CCM

Processor acknowledgment
Each audit requests positive acknowledgment from other processors. When the system fails to
receive positive acknowledgment, another request is issued. Failure on the specified number
of attempts results in the FISO procedures defined under each audit. Provisioning controls the
frequency and the number of retries for each audit occurrence before executing FISO
procedures.

CCS audit status

You can perform the following CCS audit status procedures:

• Display a CCS audit status

• Allow a CCS audit
• Inhibit a CCS audit
• Set a CCS audit
• Clear a CCS audit
• Change a CCS audit
• Display a CCS audit

Display a CCS audit status

Use this procedure to display dynamic and static status fields (audit and SIPO mode flags) of
the transport audit table entry.

Constraints

No constraints apply to checking the status of a CCS audit.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Transport audit tasks
Page 591

Data tables

The transport audit (W27) data table is accessed when the status of a CCS audit is checked.

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not enter database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: STATUS CCS AUDIT

2 Prompt: AU*DIT=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
CCM or 1 (CCM audit)
RPRP or 2 (routing proc to routing proc audit)
RPLK or 3 (routing proc to link proc audit)
Enter a single audit value or ALL to display all the audits.

3 Prompt: REF*RESH=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (refresh the display); go to Step 4.
R (refresh the display); go to Step 4.
N (show the display once); go to Step 5.
NR (show the display once); go to Step 5.

4 Prompt: FREQ*UENCY=
Enter: refresh frequency in seconds

5 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

6 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Allow a CCS audit

Use this procedure to allow the audit and/or SIPO mode associated with the selected audits.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Transport audit tasks
Page 592

Constraints

No constraints apply to allowing a CCS audit.

Data tables

The transport audit (W27) data table is accessed when the status of a CCS audit is allowed.

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not enter database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: ALLOW CCS AUDIT

2 Prompt: AU*DIT=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
CCM or 1 (CCM audit)
RPRP or 2 (routing proc to routing proc audit)
RPLK or 3 (routing proc to link proc audit)
Enter a single value or ALL to display all the audits.

3 Prompt: OPT*ION=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
A (audit mode)
S (SIPO mode)
B (both audit and SIPO modes)

4 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

5 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Inhibit a CCS audit

Use this procedure to inhibit the audit and/or SIPO mode associated with selected audits.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Transport audit tasks
Page 593

Constraints

No constraints apply to inhibiting a CCS audit.

Data tables

The transport audit (W27) data table is changed when a CCS audit is inhibited.

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not enter database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: INHIBIT CCS AUDIT

2 Prompt: AU*DIT=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
CCM or 1 (CCM audit)
RPRP or 2 (routing proc to routing proc audit)
RPLK or 3 (routing proc to routing link audit)
Enter a single value or ALL to display all the audits.

3 Prompt: OPT*ION=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
A (audit mode)
S (SIPO mode)
B (both audit and SIPO modes)

4 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

5 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Set a CCS audit

Use this procedure to enable the audit, SIPO mode, or both the modes for each of the internal
audits.

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Transport audit tasks
Page 594

Constraints

No constraints apply to setting a CCS audit.

Data tables

The transport audit (W27) data table is changed when the CCS audit is set.

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not enter database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: SET CCS AUDIT

2 Prompt: AU*DIT=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
CCM or 1 (CCM audit)
RPRP or 2 (routing proc to routing proc audit)
RPLK or 3 (routing proc to routing link audit)
Enter a single value or ALL to display all the audits.

3 Prompt: OPT*ION=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
A (audit mode)
S (SIPO mode)
B (both audit and SIPO modes)

4 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>,CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute changes and exit to the command prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Transport audit tasks
Page 595

Clear a CCS audit

Use this procedure to disable the audit, SIPO mode, or both modes for each of the internal
audits.

Constraints

No constraints apply to clearing a CCS audit.

Data tables

The transport audit (W27) data table is changed when a CCS audit is cleared.

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not enter database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: CLEAR CCS AUDIT

2 Prompt: AU*DIT=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
CCM or 1 (CCM audit)
RPRP or 2 (routing proc to routing proc audit)
RPLK or 3 (routing proc to link proc audit)
Enter a single value or ALL to clear all the audits.

3 Prompt: OPT*ION=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
A (audit mode)
S (SIPO mode)
B (both audit and SIPO modes)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Transport audit tasks
Page 596

4 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>,CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute changes and exit to the command prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Change a CCS audit

Use this procedure to change the following parameters for each of the internal audits:

• Frequency of audit
• Timer 1 and timer 2 expiration values
• Number of retries of the audit before timer 1 times out
• Number of retries of the audit before timer 2 times out

Constraints

No constraints apply to changing a CCS audit.

Data tables

The transport audit (W27) data table is changed when a CCS audit is changed.

BEGIN PROCEDURE

ALERT
ALERT! Do not enter database provisioning MMIs if both TMM processors are removed from
service or are in the booted state. The data table accessed by an MMI can be corrupted.

1 Prompt: >
Enter: CHANGE CCS AUDIT

2 Prompt: CAU*DIT=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
CCM or 1 (CCM audit)
RPRP or 2 (routing proc to routing proc audit)
RPLK or 3 (routing proc to link proc audit)

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Transport audit tasks
Page 597

3 Prompt: PERIOD1=
Enter: period between audit functions

4 Prompt: T1V*AL=
Enter: expiration timer 1 in seconds

5 Prompt: T1R*ET=
Enter: number of timer 1 retries

6 Prompt: T2V*AL=
Enter: expiration timer 2 in seconds

7 Prompt: T2R*ET=
Enter: number of timer 2 retries

8 Prompt: EXECUTE<Y/N>,CHANGE <name=>, or ABORT <^A>?

Enter: (one of the following choices)
Y (execute the changes)
N (do not execute the changes and return to the initial prompt)
A prompt name (return to a specific prompt)
<CTRL+A> (do not execute changes and exit to the command prompt)
END PROCEDURE

Display a CCS audit

Use this procedure to display all provisionable information of the selected audits.

Constraints

No constraints apply to displaying a CCS audit.

Data tables

The transport audit (W27) data table is accessed when a CCS audit is displayed.

BEGIN PROCEDURE
1 Prompt: >
Enter: DISPLA CCS AUDIT

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991

3GU 80015 AHAA TCZZA SS7 database provisioning procedures
Edition 01 P04, October 2007
Preliminary Appendix. Transport audit tasks
Page 598

2 Prompt: AU*DIT=
Enter: (one of the following choices)
CCM or 1 (CCM audit)
RPRP or 2 (routing proc to routing proc audit)
RPLK or 3 (routing proc to link proc audit)
Enter a single value or ALL to display all the audits.
The system displays the CCS audit mode.

3 To repeat this procedure, go to Step 2; otherwise, continue.

4 Press <CTRL+A> to exit to the command prompt.

END PROCEDURE

Alcatel-Lucent 5070 Signaling Server Global ECCN 5E991